p 
 
 
 ☆ ☆☆☆☆☆☆☆ ☆☆☆☆☆ 
 
 CHILDREN 
 
 OF THE 
 
 OTHER AMERICAS 
 
 ☆ ☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆ 
 
OFFICE 
 
 T3.8- OFFl0 „^iio- ^ __..^iffEUlOA-N 
 
 V , •* 
 
 • j n co V- 
 
 PlT©* •**'V i " 
 
 nt 
 
 r\Tv4 i-i 
 
 Oj.' 
 
 jt 11-5TES 
 
 of 0OOi ^- : ''ME.3 , _ 
 
 ■■H Jddifor.^ 
 
 Fox 
 
 , 
 
 W 1 *-’ 
 
 
 F " '\ >v-iwifcy *c eao7 
 
 Federal--" _ p> q, 
 
 
 * 0 U» 
 
* 
 
 wx :wx£x<<<<& , xvx , vx<*x<c0>xp>x*ssx‘xxx<*x , x*x-x«£x*x<*>&w!&*x<<c*xcvx£’xvx , x , x< , !yx , x > x*x*x XvX wwivxvi-x-x'xvx'xwiwxw^'iyx'x'x'^^^ 
 
 ☆ ☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆ 
 
 CHILDREN 
 
 OF THE 
 
 OTHER AMERICAS 
 
 A guide to materials in English on the 
 Other Americas suitable for the elemen¬ 
 tary and junior high school grades. 
 
 Prepared by 
 
 M. Elizabeth Barry and Delia Goetz 
 
 with the assistance of 
 
 Dorothy Conzelman 
 under the supervision of the 
 
 Division of Intellectual Cooperation 
 of the Pan American Union 
 
 February 1942 
 
 OFFICE OF THE 
 
 COORDINATOR OF INTER-AMERICAN AFFAIRS 
 
 Washington, D. C. 
 
 ★ 
 
 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
 WASHINGTON : 1942 
 
 ☆ ☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆☆ 
 

 
CHILDREN OF THE OTHER AMERICAS 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 General References and Teaching Aids . 1 
 
 Homes, Schools, and Community Life . 35 
 
 Dances, Songs, and Festivals . 59 
 
 Arts and Handicrafts . 79 
 
 Food, Plants, and Minerals .:. 99 
 
 Their Animal World . 119 
 
 Ancient Civilizations and 
 
 Modern Republics . 135 
 
 Transportation 
 
 »909oe9ee«s9e3«c««et*ee»**** 
 
 161 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
{ Children of the Other Americas } 
 
 GENERAL REFERENCES 
 
 AND 
 
 TEACHING AIDS 
 
 (in) 
 

 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table of Contents 
 
 Page 
 
 Introduction_ vn 
 
 Part I. General References for Pupil and Teacher: 
 
 For the children_ 1 
 
 Books_ 1 
 
 Periodicals and pamphlets_ 1 
 
 For the teacher_ 3 
 
 Books_ 3 
 
 Periodicals and pamphlets_ 6 
 
 Part II. Aids for Teachers: 
 
 Audio-visual teaching aids_ 11 
 
 Costumes_ 12 
 
 Exhibits_ 16 
 
 Flags_ 16 
 
 Maps_ 17 
 
 Museums_ 18 
 
 Organizations having information and materials_ 20 
 
 Periodicals devoted to Latin America_ 23 
 
 Periodicals cited in this guide_ 25 
 
 School correspondence_ 29 
 
 Units for teachers_ 29 
 
 Key to abbreviations_ 32 
 
 (V) 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 'w 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 “We study about your country in our school books but we want 
 to know more about you, the games you play, the songs you sing, the 
 food you like. We want to know about your parties, your lessons 
 and your pets,” wrote a little girl in the Argentine to a small cor¬ 
 respondent in the United States. 
 
 Children need no longer depend only on letters for the knowledge 
 they wish to have about each other. New and interesting textbooks, 
 picture books, magazines, motion pictures, and radio have found 
 their way into the classroom of many schools. There are stories 
 for children which make the countries they study more real. 
 
 Geography in the elementary school now answers many eager 
 questions. It has become the study of the earth as the home of 
 people. It shows how parents and children and larger social groups 
 respond to their natural environment. Today children study geogra¬ 
 phy as the stage upon which the action of life takes place. They 
 discover that action in a given period becomes its history. They 
 learn that people rearrange this stage. They cut tunnels through 
 mountains. They change the course of rivers. They transplant 
 animals and trees and plants from their indigenous homes into new 
 environments. They create radio highways in the sky. Their 
 successes and failures make their history. Music, literature, the 
 arts of the people are intimate expression of these struggles. 
 
 But geography, history, music, literature, art treated as separate 
 subjects for mature students, for specialization and convenience, are 
 not in separate compartments to the child. His mind cuts across such 
 divisions and he sees life as it relates to him as an individual. His 
 school now arranges his program of studies to help him interpret life 
 as he sees it around him and to meet the demands that it places upon 
 him. This new concept has been kept in mind constantly in compiling 
 this guide for teachers and pupils in the elementary grades and junior 
 high school and therefore the material has been grouped not according 
 to the subject matter of the curriculum but around the children’s 
 natural interests. 
 
 The young child learns from stories about typical communities: 
 how a child like himself fits into his home, and the home into a very 
 slightly larger world. His questions when he is introduced to the 
 children of Latin America are the same he asks about playmates at 
 home: What kind of a house do they live in? What are their brothers 
 and sisters like? What games do they play? What do they do in 
 school? Do they help their parents in house and field? What are 
 their pets, and what do they eat? What do they make with their 
 hands? What are the stories they are told? And, as the child 
 
 (VII) 
 
VIII 
 
 grows older: what are the adventures they have when they go outside 
 the home? How do these communities and countries fit into the 
 larger world? To supply as many answers as possible to these 
 questions is the purpose of this guide. 
 
 The aim was to keep it simple in form, selective in content and 
 flexible. 
 
 In the preparation of the guide a vast amount of material has been 
 examined carefully. In the choice of references an effort was made 
 to select articles, books, and pamphlets that are accurate, readable, 
 easily available and not likely to be outdated soon. A few items now 
 out of print but still available in libraries were included either because 
 of their excellence or because no similar references were found. 
 
 In listing the books for children, no textbooks were included, and 
 only a limited number of such books were suggested among those 
 selected for teachers. Neither adult fiction nor highly technical refer¬ 
 ences are given. 
 
 Programs of study and teaching materials vary as the communities 
 differ from Alaska to Patagonia. Chronological age no longer can be 
 accepted as a yardstick for measuring grade placements and child’s 
 interests. His ability depends on many factors—health, home life, 
 environment, talent, travel, and experience. The problem of adapting 
 subject matter to the age level of the child is an individual one for 
 each teacher. Therefore only general directions or suggestions for the 
 use of the material are indicated in the annotations. 
 
 Special attention has been given to references adaptable for assem¬ 
 bly and special programs and projects. 
 
 The first section of the guide contains references which set the stage 
 and provide a general background for the study of Latin America. 
 Although it was not possible to list a separate book on every one of the 
 20 countries, excellent detailed sections on each of the American 
 Republics are found in several of the general books listed. 
 
 Examination of the bibliography, particularly the sections devoted 
 to material for children, will reveal to what extent authors have con¬ 
 centrated on a few countries in Latin America, and how much more 
 information in English is still needed if children are to gain a well- 
 rounded picture of the American nations. But nevertheless, the ref¬ 
 erences contained in the various sections comprising this guide, will 
 suggest to the resourceful teacher many an adventure in discovery. 
 
 4; vL» %4* «i> 
 
 *T* 
 
 Teachers who travel bring back pictures, handicraft articles, post 
 cards, motion pictures, and a glow of excitement when they speak 
 about the places they have been and the people they met there. 
 Neither the materials nor the glow are out of reach for the teacher 
 who must stay at home. 
 
 A list follows of key sources for teaching aids, including motion 
 pictures, film-strips, slides, stereopticon material, poster and postage 
 stamps, recordings, maps, histographs, cartograms, museums particu¬ 
 larly rich in Latin American material, loan exhibits of art or handi¬ 
 crafts, flags, and centers for arranging correspondence with the 
 children of countries to the south. 
 
IX 
 
 The teacher, of course, will explore local botanical gardens, and if 
 there are none, green-houses and flower-shops, for tropical plants and 
 flowers, the zoos and pet shops for animals and birds of Latin America; 
 markets where exotic fruits and vegetables occasionally appear, 
 restaurants where typical dishes are served, tinned foods, labels on 
 medicines which list ingredients. She may place in the classroom a 
 small aquarium or vivarium so that children may observe fish and 
 plants they read about, or take them to see articles of handicraft sold 
 in the shops. Occasionally department stores bring exhibitions of 
 textiles or other collections of interesting objects. In many cities, 
 schools or streets are named for Latin American heroes, or their 
 statues stand in the park. Hobbyists sometimes collect historical 
 material, or postage stamps. Some towns in the United States have 
 been named for places in Latin America. It would be interesting to 
 trace the history of such memorials and to learn the Latin American 
 pronunciation of the names. Many cities trade with Latin America 
 and the Chamber of Commerce would know the articles involved. 
 Local travel agents often have pictorial materials. 
 
 One of the best ways to learn about the people of Latin America 
 is to become acquainted with the people of similar ancestry who live 
 closer home. In the southwest, which was settled by people of 
 Spanish blood, traditions have been carefully preserved, and it is 
 possible to witness religious celebrations of great beauty which are 
 similar to those described in stories of Latin America. In industrial 
 centers such as Kansas City, Milwaukee, St. Louis, there are groups 
 of people who have brought their traditional customs from Mexico; 
 and here the national holidays are occasions for fiestas tipicas. Con¬ 
 sulates, International Houses, Pan American centers or clubs; univer¬ 
 sities; Spanish language groups, and religious organizations are points 
 of contact. These students often enjoy speaking, performing their 
 national dances or singing before school assemblies. 
 
 Teachers probably will find it desirable to cut expenses by pooling 
 materials and circulating films and aids among the various classes. 
 Some sort of organization would enable one or two teachers to handle 
 correspondence for the group with the central sources listed below. 
 Teachers might interest local museums or other organizations in 
 bringing exhibits for which a rental is charged which would be of 
 interest to the community at large. Local radio stations might be 
 consulted about broadcasts. Special reports by teachers with wide 
 knowledge of music, history, art, or other subjects will help sketch 
 background for the group. 
 
 These few suggestions are made with the certainty that many 
 others will occur to the teacher who is aware of the needs of her pupils 
 and of the resources of her own community. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 • ' i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 M ’ 
 
 “ 
 
 
 >- 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ / ■ • : . 
 
 . —, . . , * . **• j ~ a. mi ? - ■« . • M —A i ■ *■ fciWi 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Part I. GENERAL REFERENCES FOR PUPIL AND TEACHER 
 
 BOOKS FOR CHILDREN 
 
 Gill, Richard, and Helen Hoke. The Story of the Other America. Boston 
 Houghton, Mifflin Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Brief, simply written summary of South America’s history from Columbus to 
 the present. The appendix contains a one page text of the outstanding char¬ 
 acteristics of each of the ten countries. Each page of the book is illustrated 
 profusely and the colored end-papers include a map of South America. Useful 
 for beginning study of southern continent. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Neighbors to the South. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1941. 293 p., illus. 
 
 Describes twelve countries of Central and South America and in addition 
 has a chapter each on products, transportation, education, cultural relations, 
 Pan Americanism and the Latin American heroes. Brief historical.background 
 is given,- but emphasis is on the modern scene. Illustrated with 92 excellent 
 photographs. Useful for general reference and supplementary reading. 
 
 Peck, Anne Merriman. Roundabout South America. New York. Harper 
 Bros. 1940. 359 p. 
 
 Good information on South America told in an interesting way. History, 
 culture, industries and education all touched on briefly but with real under¬ 
 standing of countries and people. Good for reference and for supplementary 
 reading. 
 
 Richards, Irmagarde, and Elena Landazuri. Children of Mexico: Their 
 Land and its Story. San Francisco. Harr Wagner Publishing Co. 1935. 323 
 p., illus. 
 
 A general, simply written book on Mexico. The first twelve chapters give a 
 brief survey of life among the Aztecs before the conquest, the coming of the 
 Spaniards, episodes of Colonial days, and a brief chapter each on the national 
 hero, a fiesta, school, Christmas, and places of interest in and around Mexico 
 City. The appendix contains information on the products of Mexico and the 
 index indicates the pronunciation of Spanish and Indian words. 
 
 Rothery, Agnes. South American Roundabout. New York. Dodd, Mead 
 & Co. 1940. 242 p., illus. 
 
 Devoted largely to the countries of South America but includes a chapter 
 on Panama and brief material on Cuba and Haiti. There is interesting mate¬ 
 rial on the plants and animals of the countries included, and some history. 
 Good for social studies and geography. 
 
 Sanchez, Nellie Van de Grift. Stories of the Latin American States. New 
 York. Thos. Y. Crowell Co. 1938. 406 p., illus. 
 
 A reference book on the 20 Republics of Latin America. The history, 
 area, population, climate, form of government, education and important 
 dates of each nation are briefly summarized. Similar information is included 
 for the possessions of other powers in the Caribbean-—Great Britain, France, 
 The Netherlands and the United States. Difficult language and dull style. 
 
 4 
 
 PERIODICAL REFERENCES AND PAMPHLETS FOR CHILDREN 
 
 Barr, Glenn. South American Place Names {Jour. Geog., February 1931, p. 
 79-82). 
 
 A few of the common place names of South America are traced as to their 
 origins, often significant in giving the keynote of the history or geography of a 
 place. Santiago honors St. James, the patron saint of Spain; Argentina is the 
 
 (1) 
 
2 
 
 Spanish adjective meaning silver; Valdivia commemorates the first colonizer of 
 Chile. 
 
 Building America. Our Latin American Neighbors Issue, October 1939, 32 p., 
 illus. 
 
 Covers the land, industries, social problems, early history, revolutionary 
 history and modern scene in Latin America. Approximately 75 pictures and 
 5 pictorial maps increase the usefulness of this outstanding unit. 
 
 D’EgA, Raul. History and Travel in the Americas (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1938, p. 88-96, illus.). 
 
 Good general introduction to Latin America. Touches on the naming of the 
 hemisphere, earliest inhabitants, the wars of independence. 
 
 Herring, Hubert. Cuba: The Island Republic (Jr. Red Cross Jour., March 
 1939, p. 204-205, illus.). 
 
 Overview of the island and its people. In the old days Cuba was the port 
 "on the road to everywhere,” and her location controls access to the Carrib- 
 bean and to the Panama Canal. Incidents in the long struggle to set Cuba free 
 will appeal to students. 
 
 Marden, Luis. Hail Colombia! (Natl. Geog., October 1940, p. 506-536, illus.). 
 
 Good account of social institutions of the larger cities such as Bogota, where 
 the charla (chat) on street-corners is typical of the leisurely tempo of life. 
 Excellent photographs include an Indian village on stilts near Ci6naga, where 
 the streets are waterways. It was such a scene that caused the adjacent coast 
 to be named Venezuela—“little Venice”. There are pictures of Indians in 
 regional dress, and a lovely senorita poses in the fast-disappearing napango 
 costume. The story of the Crown of the Andes, a beautiful gold crown studded 
 with Colombian emeralds made for an image of the Virgin Mary, is told at 
 length. Social studies reference. 
 
 Our South American Neighbors (Child Life , November 1940, p. 504-505). 
 
 Pictures of interest to children in the elementary grades, carefully captioned 
 and used as the magazine’s center spread. Ruins of Macchu Picchu, Iguazu 
 Falls, University of San Marcos, “the world’s highest bridge,” llamas, mules, 
 ponies, children. 
 
 Pan America in Review: Chile (World Youth , March 30, 1940, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 Brief introduction to Chile, emphasizes the climate produced by the long 
 coastline on the west and the Andes on the east. For social studies and as 
 reference material for history, geography. 
 
 -Dominican Republic (World Youth, March 2, 1940, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 Brief historical description of the Dominican Republic where Christopher 
 Columbus was governor and now lies buried. A companion article describes 
 the cruciform beacon designed to mark the discoverer’s resting place. The first 
 map of Santo Domingo is pictured. 
 
 - Haiti (World Youth , June 8, 1940, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 Overview of this republic whose language and cultural ideals stem from 
 France and in the racial composition of which the Negro is predominant. 
 
 - Paraguay (World Youth , May 25, 1940, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 Map and overview of landlocked Paraguay, for upper elementary grades. 
 Emphasizes contrast between unconquered jungle and culture existing in 
 centers since colonial times. 
 
 - Venezuela (World Youth, May 11, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 Historical material on Sim6n Bolivar the Liberator and his birthplace, 
 Caracas. Information on economic resources, especially oil. 
 
 Pan American Union. American Nation Series. Washington, D. C. Illus. 50. 
 
 Separate booklets on each of the twenty Latin American republics prepared 
 by experts in a laboratory set-up. Invaluable to teachers at all levels above 
 primary as supplementary material in geography, history, civics. Physical 
 characteristics, climate, area, population, industry and commerce, transporta¬ 
 tion, communication, education, and other topics included in text books or 
 organized units are covered in these booklets. Each booklet contains about 20 
 carefully selected pictures, tables of information, outline maps and general 
 reference tables. There is also a similar more specialized American City 
 Series containing descriptive material on Latin American capitals and other 
 important cities. 
 
 f 
 
3 
 
 Pan American Union. Flags and Coats-of-arms of the American Nations. Wash¬ 
 ington. 17 p., illus. 10jL 
 
 Historical information and descriptions of the flags and coats-of-arms of the 
 twenty-one American Republics. 
 
 The Products of Brazil {Jr. Arts and Activ., March 1941, p. 19-22, illus.). 
 
 For a unit on Brazil in the middle grades, the teacher will find in this article 
 factual material, suggestions for activities, and illustrative materials. See 
 Intermediate listing. Source map. 
 
 The Resources of the Americas {Jr. Schol., September 1940-Mav 1941, illus.). 
 
 The separate articles in this series include material at children's level on the 
 meeting of the American nations' representatives at Havana in 1940, the people 
 and their points of view, their radio, transportation, industries, crops, mineral 
 wealth, railroads; plans for naval and air defense. Some of these articles have 
 been classified and described in other sections of this guide. 
 
 Scholastic: The American High School Weekly. Pan American Issue, Dec. 9, 
 1940, illus. 
 
 This issue contains “This New World of Peace," a radio play incorporating 
 historical information. In addition there is a page of Latin American Facts 
 p. 32, a Pan American Reading Guide, p. 53, an adventure story from the book, 
 Southward Ho by William LaVarre entitled “All the Gold in Yucatan," etc. 
 
 Waltermire, Helen. A Booklet Map of South America {Jr. Arts and Activ., 
 January 1941, p. 14). 
 
 Project for intermediate children, with teacher’s supervision. The booklet 
 map is clearly and carefully illustrated: and the procedure for making it is 
 described step by step with a list of materials to be used. 
 
 BOOKS FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 Airman. Duncan. The All-American Front. New York. Doubleday, Doran & 
 Co. 1940. 344 p. 
 
 Discusses development of Latin America and how and why it differed from 
 development of North America. Gives frank, unsentimental appraisal of eco¬ 
 nomic, political, social and cultural life, the extreme nationalism of the repub¬ 
 lics; contains a good discussion of democracy and the future of hemisphere 
 solidarity. 
 
 Carlson, Fred A. Geography of Latin America. New York. Prentice-Hall, 
 Inc. 1936. 642 p. 
 
 The book enumerates and interprets the conditions that have influenced the 
 development of the Latin American republics. The general characteristics, 
 description, and interpretation of the natural-cultural regions, and a summation 
 of geography in relation to domestic and foreign affairs are included for each 
 country. The 66 maps and charts include many on rainfall, population, cli¬ 
 mates, principal ports, etc. 134 excellent photographs of plants, animals, 
 people, and places supplement and clarify the text. Comprehensive bibliogra¬ 
 phies are included at the end of each chapter and a pronouncing list of Latin 
 American names is of particular value. 
 
 Compton’s Pictured Encyclopedia and Fact-Index. 1941 edition. F. E. Compton 
 and Co., Chicago 1941. 
 
 In each of the volumes of this new edition there is detailed material pertaining 
 to Latin America. There is general information such as the material in volume 
 13, p. 205-211, entitled “The Southern Half of the New World" classified under 
 the letter S. This also includes a reference-outline for organized study of South 
 America and bibliographies for younger readers and advanced students and 
 teachers. 
 
 Fergusson, Erna. Venezuela. New York. A. A, Knopf. 1939. 346 p. 
 
 A comprehensive, readable book which describes life in the ports, cities, 
 villages and on the enormous ranches of the country. In her travels throughout 
 the country, the author talked to people of all classes and many of these con¬ 
 versations are recorded here. The book contains a good summary of Vene¬ 
 zuela's history, particularly of the colonial period, together with an entire 
 chapter on Sim6n Bolivar. There is also good information on the wealth, 
 industry, and cultural life of Venezuela. The 44 photographs which illustrate 
 the book show the people, the countryside, the cities, and industries. 
 
 
4 
 
 Goetz, Delia, and Varian Fry. The Good Neighbors: The Story of the Two 
 Americas. Headline Book Series. New York. Foreign Policy Assn. 1941. 
 96 p. (revised ed.). 
 
 A brief survey of the history of Latin America from the discovery to the 
 present day, which emphasizes the economic, political, and social development 
 of the southern republics, and their relations with the United States. The 
 value of the book is enhanced by 15 excellent maps and graphs which show 
 distances between the Americas and the rest of the world, means of com¬ 
 munication, products, trade, etc. 
 
 Green, Philip L. Our Latin American Neighbors. New York. Hastings 
 House. 1941. 128 p. 
 
 A brief, simply written survey of Latin America from before Columbus to 
 the present. The geography, conquest, colonial period and independence, 
 and later progress and problems are all discussed. There are chapters on Latin 
 American culture and a good discussion of the racial background and of the 
 various Indian tribes living throughout the Americas. A good general book 
 for background information, also useful for high school or selected junior high 
 school students. 
 
 Hanson, Earl P. . Chile: Land of Progress. New York. Revnal & Hitchcock. 
 1941. 201 p., illus. 
 
 Concise but complete and colorful survey of Chile, sympathetically told. 
 A chapter on Chile’s history gives a good background for the chapters which 
 follow on the people and government, products and industry, social legisla¬ 
 tion, education, culture, and general information for visitors to Chile. Of 
 particular interest is the chapter on culture which gives good information on 
 the music, literature, and dances of Chile. The chapters on the people and 
 government are equally interesting and valuable for an understanding of the 
 country’s development and the characteristics of the people. Illustrated with 
 12 excellent photographs. 
 
 Herring, Hubert. The Good Neighbors: Argentina, Brazil, Chile, and Seven¬ 
 teen Other Countries. New Haven. Yale University Press. 1941. 381 p. 
 
 A well-written book based on fact and first-hand experience by the Director 
 of the Committee on Cultural Relations with Latin America. The book centers 
 mainly on the three countries named in the title and Mexico, with brief space 
 devoted to the others. The author has included much of his own first-hand 
 research into the everyday life of the Latin American. The author understands 
 and appreciates many of the problems of inter-American cooperation. In the 
 last section of the book he gives a realistic appraisal of United States policy in 
 Latin America and of the alternative channels into which that policy might be 
 forced. 
 
 Kelsey, Vera. Seven Keys to Brazil. New York. Funk & Wagnalls Co. 
 1940. 314 p., illus. 
 
 An exhaustive book on Brazil, beginning with a brief survey of the Portu¬ 
 guese, Indians, and Negroes, Brazil’s early settlers, covering the colonial period, 
 describing life under the Emperors, and independence from Portugal. The 
 author describes in detail the seven different regions of Brazil, the culture, 
 industry, and cities. The last part of the book is devoted to a brief discussion 
 of the arts of the country. The wealth of material makes it useful as a refer¬ 
 ence book. The 54 photographs give an idea of people, places, and industries 
 of the country. 
 
 Kelsey, Vera, and Lilly de Jongh Osborne. Four Keys to Guatemala. New 
 York. Funk & Wagnalls Co. 1939. 332 p., illus. 
 
 A comprehensive and authentic book on Guatemala based on material col¬ 
 lected by Mrs. Osborne during a lifetime’s residence in Central America, the 
 major part in Guatemala. The early history of the country, the conquest and 
 colonial period, and the development of the country after it became a republic 
 are all treated in an interesting way. There is admirable material on the arts 
 and crafts, the fiestas and costumes as well as on the economic, political, and 
 cultural life. Particularly valuable are the 10 pages of notes which include 
 detailed information on birds, trees, medicinal plants, flowers, and a list of the 
 dye plants from which Indians obtained their colors. The 56 illustrations of 
 buildings, countryside, dances, fiestas, costumes, and handicraft add to the value 
 of the book. 
 
 # 
 
o 
 
 McCulloch, John I. B. Challenge to the Americas. Headline Book Series.’ 
 New York. Foreign Policy Assn. 1940. 64 p. 
 
 Begins with the 1940 Havana Conference of American Foreign Ministers, 
 summarizes briefly early Pan-Americanism, the beginning of the Good Neighbor 
 policy, and the problems posed for the Americas by the war in Europe and the 
 results of the Panama Conference in 1939. A discussion of neutrality, economic 
 cooperation, European possessions in the Americas, trade, fifth columnists, 
 financial and military aid to the Americas are also included. Maps and charts 
 show European possessions in the Western Hemisphere, naval and air bases, 
 and Latin America’s major exports in 1938. 
 
 Raushenbush, Joan. Look at Latin America. Headline Book Series. New York. 
 Foreign Policy Assn. 1940. 64 p. 
 
 A handy brief reference book on Latin America which gives in condensed form 
 a great deal of information on the peoples, land and climate, products, schools, 
 health, industries and many other aspects of the 20 republics. Distribution of 
 population, products, riches, route of the Pan American highway, principal rail¬ 
 roads and airways, naval, air, and military bases are shown on eleven excellent 
 maps. A dozen charts show exports and imports, U. S. trade with the various 
 republics, chief agricultural exports, strategic materials in Latin America, etc. 
 
 Roberts, W. Adolphe. The Caribbean: The Story of Our Sea of Destiny. 
 Indianapolis. Bobbs-Merrill Co. 1940. 313 p. 
 
 Detailed and colorful survey of Caribbean countries from Columbus to 1940. 
 Full treatment of the conquest, colonial period, independence, and later times 
 and personalities who figured in this history: Columbus, Balboa, Cortes, 
 Pizarro, Las Casas and Bolivar. There is also much information on the rela¬ 
 tions of the American nations with European powers: England, Holland, 
 France. The development of plantations, introduction of sugar, bananas and 
 other crops, and beginnings of the slave trade are traced. Numerous maps, 
 showing voyages and colonizations, and 21 illustrations, including portraits of 
 many famous men, add to the value of the book. 
 
 Romoli, Kathleen. Colombia: Gateway to South America. Garden City. 
 Doubleday, Doran & Co. 1941. 364 p. 
 
 An unusually well-written, informative book in which the author has pre¬ 
 sented the past, present, and future of one of the most important American 
 republics. The author has given not only the factual material of her subject 
 but has included a wealth of legend and tradition which add color and interest, 
 as for instance the chapter on ‘‘The Lake of El Dorado” and the legends of 
 The Gilded Man. In Chapter 31, “Even Neighbors Can Be Friends,” the 
 author discusses past relations between Colombia and the United States and 
 makes some suggestions looking toward a better understanding in the future. 
 Fourteen photographs illustrate the book. 
 
 Schurz, William Lytle. Latin America. New York, E. P. Dutton & Co. 
 1941. 378 p. 
 
 An excellent general survey by an author who has lived more than 20 years 
 in Latin America. The book introduces us to the geography of this vast terri¬ 
 tory, summarizes the early history and gives an interesting picture of the people, 
 the government and the economies of the countries—the industries, transporta¬ 
 tion and foreign trade. The relations between the various republics, with 
 Europe and with the United States are described in realistic manner. The 
 last section, “The Way of Life,” is of particular interest for in that section 
 the author discusses Latin America’s cultural characteristics, social organiza¬ 
 tion, education, religion and literature. An excellent glossary of Spanish and 
 Indian terms, a map and index add to the value of the book. 
 
 Simpson, Lesley Byrd. Many Mexicos. New York. G. P. Putnam’s Sons. 
 1941. 336 p. 
 
 A good general book on Mexico in which the author humanizes its history 
 and highlights the men, events and institutions of the past which have left 
 their traces on the modern scene. From his intensive research the author 
 presents not only much new material but also a new viewpoint on many old 
 problems. There is also good material on many of Mexico’s great figures— 
 Cortes, Mendoza, Velasco, Hidalgo, Juarez and others, as well as a good 
 chapter on education and letters. The author has given a balanced and 
 objective picture of many of the country’s problems. 
 
6 
 
 Weddell, Alexander Milbourne. Introduction to Argentina. New York. 
 The Greystone Press. 1939. 301 p., illus. 
 
 A former American Ambassador to Argentina is the author of this informa¬ 
 tive book which begins by describing the various means of transportation to 
 Argentina and the best time to visit the country. There is a chapter on the 
 people, their racial strains and characteristics, as well as detailed chapters on 
 Buenos Aires and the Argentine countryside. The theatre, opera, clubs, sports, 
 university life and the press, hunting and fishing, birds, flowers and trees are all 
 included in the chapters which follow. The appendices give detailed informa¬ 
 tion for tourists on hotels, restaurants and food, on shops, and excursions out 
 of the city. The 41 excellent photographs which illustrate the book introduce 
 the reader to the beauty spots of Argentina and include few of the people and 
 their occupations. 
 
 Wilgus, A. Curtis. The Development of Hispanic America. New York. 
 Farrar & Rinehart. 1941. 941 p., illus. 
 
 A good, comprehensive text and reference book on the history of the develop¬ 
 ment of Latin America from the earliest times to the present, with 125 maps. 
 The value of the book is further increased by the exhaustive bibliographies at 
 the end of each section, the glossary of Spanish and Portuguese terms, the 
 outline of Hispanic-American constitutions and the more than 50 pages of 
 bibliographical essay on leading works in various languages dealing with 
 Hispanic America. 
 
 Williams, Mary W. The People and Politics of Latin America. New York. 
 Ginn & Co. New edition, 1938. 888 p., illus. 
 
 An authoritative, comprehensive survey of Latin America from the pre- 
 Columbian period through the Inter-American Peace Conference held at 
 Buenos Aires in 1936. The conquest, colonial period and the wars of independ¬ 
 ence are treated in detail. A chapter is devoted to each of the republics except 
 the republics of Central America which are included in one chapter. There 
 are also chapters on education, literature, art, music; on the economic activities 
 of the Spanish colonies; and on colonial society. Throughout the book emphasis 
 has been put on the people of Latin America and upon the constructive develop¬ 
 ment of the countries rather than upon the wars. The 65 illustrations picture 
 many of the persons who have contributed to the political, industrial and 
 cultural progress and throw light upon economic activities, architecture, art 
 and customs. The 21 maps add to the usefulness of the book. 
 
 PERIODICAL REFERENCES AND PAMPHLETS FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 Bellegarde, Dantes. Haiti’s Role in the Western Hemisphere {Quart. Jour. 
 Inter-Amer. Relations, October 1939, p. 57-66). 
 
 In explaining the Haitian contribution to Pan American relations and to the 
 democratic cause, the author summarizes the unique sociological factors of 
 that republic. Some reference is also made to geography, economy and history. 
 
 Benjamin, Harold. Protecting Our Educational Ideals {Jour. Amer. Assn. 
 Univ. Women, Convention Number 1941, p. 211-216). 
 
 Dr. Benjamin, Dean of the College of Education at the University of Mary¬ 
 land, after a recent visit to South America, points out that the greatest natural 
 resource which may be developed in the Americas is the intelligence, health, 
 and energy of their people. He considers education the best long-time de¬ 
 fense, and believes a pattern of activity is needed in this field. Teachers at all 
 levels will bo interested in Dr. Benjamin’s ideas on the relation of education to 
 the joint problems of the United States and Latin America. 
 
 Birnbaum, Martin. Guatemalan Panorama {Nat. Hist., September 1941, 
 p. 73-85, illus.). 
 
 Stresses the archeological treasures of Guatemala and the following aspects 
 of the life of the Indian native: daily existence, dress, amusements, art, and 
 religion. History and geography of the country are also featured. Splendid 
 illustrations. 
 
 Bolton, Herbert E. Cultural Cooperation with Latin America {Jour. Natl . 
 Ed. Assn., January 1940, p. 1-4, illus.). 
 
 An address before the Conference on Inter-American Relations in the Field 
 of Education, held in Washington, D. C., under the auspices of the Division of 
 
 I 
 
Cultural Relations of the Department of State. The author states that cultural 
 cooperation implies a mutual interest in, a mutual desire to understand and a 
 mutual effort to disseminate knowledge of each other’s civilization. He 
 suggests that a nation’s culture comprises the whole body of its civilization; its 
 way of life; its modes of thought; its religious mold; its social structure; its 
 manner of artistic, spiritual, and intellectual expression. The author points to 
 traditions, ideals, and origins the American republics have in common. 
 
 Bressman, E. N. Inter-American Cooperation in Agriculture (World Affairs , 
 September 1941). 
 
 A timely discussion of the importance of agriculture as an effective means of 
 hemisphere defense against economic and political penetration, with a listing 
 of some of the important complementary agricultural products now grown in 
 the tropics of this hemisphere. There is general information about the use 
 of each. The teacher will find valuable timely information on the importance 
 of agriculture as an effective means for hemisphere solidarity. Information 
 useful for classes in science, commerce, and social studies in elementary schools. 
 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. April 1940, Fiftieth Anniversary Issue, 
 360 p., illus. 
 
 This special number issued on the occasion of the fiftieth anniversary of 
 the Pan American Union carries a series of surveys of Pan American achieve¬ 
 ment during the years 1890-1940 in these fields: diplomatic relations, inter¬ 
 national law, agricultural cooperation, and medical and public health progress. 
 May be consulted in many libraries. A limited number of copies available. 
 
 Fortune. South America. (Packet of reprints with special map.) New York. 
 Time Club Bureau (Rockefeller Plaza). 1941. Illus. 500. 
 
 Reprints of seven articles which appeared in Fortune 1937-1940: “The Con¬ 
 tinent,” Dec. 1937; “Peru,” Jan. 1938; “Chile,” May 1938; “Argentina,” 
 July 1938; “Venezuela,” March 1939; “Brazil,” June 1939; “Twenty Nations 
 and One,” Sept. 1940. Illustrated with photographs and caricatures of 
 prominent figures in the inter-American scene; accompanied by a map which 
 shows topography and curvature. The teacher will find these articles easy to 
 follow. In common with all material touching on some phase of the political 
 scene, the proverbial grain of salt must be applied to some of the conclusions 
 reached by the editors of these articles. While the political scene shifts, basic 
 information does not vary. 
 
 Green, Philip Leonard. Cuba: Caribbean Outpost (Agric. in the Americas, 
 April 1941). 
 
 Many Cuban families trace their ancestry back to conquistadores of aristo¬ 
 cratic background, but the vigorous quality of Cuban life can be traced to later 
 Spanish immigrants. The author discusses the weakness of Cuba’s one-crop 
 economy (sugar) and the policy of diversified agriculture which many Cuban 
 leaders urge. He discusses Cuba’s strategic position with relation to the 
 hemisphere and the unquenchable love of liberty of the Cuban people. 
 
 Hanke, Lewis. Latin America: Soil for Democracy? (Harper’s, June 1941, 
 p. 46-57). 
 
 Dr. Hanke, head of the Hispanic Foundation of the Library of Congress, 
 points out the difficulty of generalizing about twenty diverse republics, but 
 analyzes the position of several important groups with respect to democracy. 
 He suggests that material interest might predispose conservative landholders to 
 totalitarian views, that the “cultural fusionists” are intellectuals diameterically 
 opposed to theories of race superiority, and that industrialization is producing 
 an urban middle-class with democratic tendencies. Carefully written, thought 
 provoking. 
 
 James, Preston E. Expanding Frontiers of Settlement in Latin America: A 
 Project for Future Study ( Hispanic Amer. Hist. Rev., May 1941). 
 
 This address presented before the Section on History and Geography of the 
 Eighth American Scientific Congress is a clear consideration of population 
 distribution in Latin America, fundamental to understanding current problems. 
 It is in large part the “hollow frontiers” which attract the attention of Euro¬ 
 pean expansionists. 
 
 490718 0 - 42 -2 
 
8 
 
 Jimenez-Rivera, Georgia. Cultural Obstacles to Pan-Americanism ( Inter¬ 
 national Quarterly, Summer 1941, p. 19-23). 
 
 Stimulating comment on the psychological and cultural difficulties which 
 hamper understanding between the two Americas, by a Latin American; in¬ 
 formal, candid. Georgia Jimenez-Rivera, who has returned to Panama after 
 receiving her Ph. D. in sociology from Columbia University, stresses the differ¬ 
 ence in tempo of life and its effect on personal as well as national relationships. 
 She contrasts the Anglo-Saxon code of “playing fair” with Latin “dignidad ”— 
 a concept of personal dignity which is all-embracing. Helpful to teachers who 
 have contact with Latin Americans as well as to those who have no first-hand 
 acquaintance. 
 
 Long, E. John. Guatemala Interlude (Natl. Geog., October 1936, p. 429-460* 
 illus.). 
 
 Recommended especially for excellence and choice of accompanying photo¬ 
 graphs (23 in black and white and 13 in natural color) covering many aspects 
 of home and community life, history, scenery, industries, animals, and plants. 
 Of special interest: women washing clothes in a hot spring and rinsing them in 
 the cool waters of Lake Amatitlan, arm’s length away; a ceiba tree at Palin which 
 has a spread of more than 180 feet; an unusual relief map erected in the capital 
 city, showing the topography of the entire republic in concrete. Beautiful 
 pictures of a quetzal, the national bird, which gives its name to the dollar coin. 
 
 Manger, William. Inter-American Highlights. Pamphlet. Washington, D. C. 
 Pan American Union. 1940. 55 p., illus. 10^. 
 
 Summarizes outstanding events in inter-American relations during the 
 fifty years that the Pan American Union has been in existence as the mechan¬ 
 ism of cooperation between the republics of the Americas. 
 
 - Relations of the United States with Latin America. Washington, 
 
 D. C. Pan American Union. 1941. 12 p., mimeo. 5^. 
 
 Although not a chronological discussion of relations between the United 
 States and Latin America, this summary touches on most of the outstanding 
 diplomatic agreements. Its section on the Monroe Doctrine is notably con¬ 
 cise and clear. 
 
 National Education Association. Educational Policies Commission. For these 
 Americas. Pamphlet. Washington, D. C. June 1940. 15 p. 10^. 
 
 Primarily a plea for the increased study of Latin America in elementary and 
 secondary schools, but it is prefaced by a particularly fine statement of inter- 
 American relations and traditions. 
 
 Pan American Union. The Americas: A Panoramic View. Washington, D. C. 
 1939. 30 p., illus. 10^. 
 
 Condensed material for basic overview; geographical and historical settings; 
 products and industries, transportation, education; included is a list of pub¬ 
 lications of the Pan American Union offering more detailed information. The 
 15 photographs include a statue of Bolivar, the Inca ruins of Machu Picchu, 
 Rio harbor, Lake Atitlan, scene in the Andes, the University of San Marcos, 
 a view of the port of Buenos Aires. The booklet is so inexpensive that pictures 
 could be clipped for posters, notebooks, etc., for individual and group projects 
 at junior high school level. 
 
 The Phi Delta Kappan. November 1941 number. 160 p. 
 
 The whole number is devoted to Pan American intercultural relationships. 
 Each article and editorial was prepared by an authority in the field. Some of 
 the more lengthy features are entitled “Interchange of Cultural Viewpoints,” 
 “Radio and Pan American Relations,” “Exchange of Teachers and Students,” 
 “The Pan American Union” (in the field of education) and “The Schools and 
 Pan Americanism.” 
 
 Rowe, L. S. The Pan American Union and the Pan American Conferences. 
 Pamphlet. Washington, D. C. 1940. 18 p. 50. 
 
 In two parts: first, a brief historical sketch covering each Pan American 
 conference from 1826 to that of Panama in 1939; second, a survey of the work 
 of the Pan American Union from 1890-1940 with details on the services of 
 the various divisions. 
 
9 
 
 Rudolph, William E. Bolivia’s Water-power Resources ( Geog. Rev., January 
 
 1940, p. 41-63, illus.). 
 
 Excellent picture of Bolivia, developed as an overview of her mineral resources 
 and present and potential water power, with discussion of what development 
 of potential water power will mean to the life of the country. The map and 
 23 photographs are useful at all age levels above fifth grade. Elevation, land 
 formations, bridges, balsas (Indian boats of woven reeds), and Indian groups 
 are shown. 
 
 Sharp, Roland Hall. While Cuba Sings ( Chr . Sci. Mon., Mar. 29, 1941, illus.). 
 
 A compact picture of Cuba’s social conditions, economic hopes and fears at 
 the present time. Color photograph, by Henricks Hodge, shows a Cuban 
 climbing a giant palm at Soledad. Other good pictures. 
 
 Survey Graphic. The Americas: South and North. Special Number, March 
 
 1941, Illus. 50*b 
 
 Articles covering every phase of life in Latin America by 22 authors well 
 qualified to write on the southern republics. The relations between the coun¬ 
 tries of this hemisphere, the prospects for hemisphere solidarity and the part 
 communications and transportation play in achieving it are discussed in 
 several articles. Other sections of the magazine take up Latin America’s 
 resources and trade, the industrialization of various countries as well as the 
 future of special regions, such as the Caribbean and the Amazon. Social 
 conditions in Latin America are described in articles on the work of the 
 women, child welfare, labor, and social insurance and the future of the In¬ 
 dians. Cultural relations between the republics are treated in articles on the 
 exchange of students, music and painting. One hundred excellent photo¬ 
 graphs and 18 maps and charts illustrate this special number. 
 
 White, John W. The New Pan-Americanism (Quart. Jour. Inter-Amer. Rela¬ 
 tions, April 1939, p. 31-36). 
 
 Significance of the Seventh and Eighth International Conferences of Ameri¬ 
 can States, held, respectively, at Montevideo in 1933 and at Lima in 1938. 
 
 Wilson, Charles Morrow. Panama: Keystone of Hemisphere Defense ( Travel, 
 February 1941, p. 23-27, illus.). 
 
 Setting and background of the Panama Canal, world doorway of first im¬ 
 portance for defense. The name Panama means “plenty of fish”, a land for 
 turtle fishers and pearl divers, home of the banana, rich in coconurs, with a 
 future in rubber. Plant and animal life are described. Two pictures of animals, 
 a pet coatl and a sloth are especially interesting; also one of the log dugout 
 used by the San Bias Indians. There is an account of the discovery bvBalboa 
 and history to the present time, including history of the Canal. Rich in factual 
 material and curriculum suggestions for the elementary teacher. 
 
 -Our Future in Central America (Travel, September 1941, p. 7-11, illus.). 
 
 Deals with the importance to the people of the United States of the new 
 agricultural developments of Central America. Discusses food and mineral 
 resources and the new type of citizen that is emerging, skilled, educated, 
 achieving success on the finca (plantation), in medicine, law, as jungle engineer, 
 surveyor, builder of bridges, railroads, and highways. Lists commodities which 
 the United States is obliged to import and which Central America can supply. 
 
Part II. AIDS FOR TEACHERS 
 
 SOURCES OF AUDIO-VISUAL TEACHING AIDS 
 
 1. American Council on Education, Motion Picture Project, 744 Jackson Place, 
 
 Washington, D. C., evaluates and classifies films for classroom use. Write 
 for bulletin entitled The Other Americas Through Films and Records. 
 
 2. The American Film Center, (Inc., 45 Rockefeller Plaza, New York City, is 
 
 prepared to assist schools, youth and adult organizations or any group 
 interested in obtaining the best available motion pictures for nontheatrical 
 purposes. Lists of films will be prepared on specific subjects. Consults 
 with groups to determine how films can be fitted into their programs, ar¬ 
 ranges for booking of films, suggests ways of securing projection service 
 and the costs involved. The film center is not a distributor and issues no 
 catalog. No charge is made for the consultation service. 
 
 3. The American School of the Air broadcasts are a supplementary aid to class¬ 
 
 room teaching. A Teachers’ Manual is supplied free to all teachers who 
 use the programs. Address communications to the Department of Edu¬ 
 cation, The Columbia Broadcasting System, Inc., 485 Madison Avenue, 
 New York City. 
 
 4. Eastman Classroom Films, Eastman Kodak Co., Rochester, N. Y., sells 
 
 prints to educational institutions from which they may be rented. The 
 films deal chiefly with the geographical aspects of the countries. Available 
 are the following silent, 15-min. 16-mm. films: 
 
 Argentina. 
 
 Bolivia. 
 
 Brazil—Amazon Lowlands. 
 
 Brazil—Eastern Highlands. 
 
 Chile. 
 
 Central America. 
 
 Continent of South America. 
 
 From Haiti to Trinidad. 
 
 Mexico. 
 
 Panama Canal. 
 
 Peru. 
 
 5. Erpi Classroom Films, Inc., 35-11 Thirty-fifth Avenue, Long Island City, 
 
 N. Y., deals exclusively in educational films. They sell to film libraries 
 from which films may be rented. Available are the following 11-min. 
 (sound) 16-mm. films: 
 
 Arts and Crafts of Mexico. 
 
 Argentina—People of Buenos Aires. 
 
 Brazil—People of the Plantations. 
 
 Chile-*-People of the Country Estates. 
 
 Land of Mexico. 
 
 People of Mexico. 
 
 Peru—People of the Mountains. 
 
 6. Educational Screen; 64 East Lake Street, Chicago, Ill., is a magazine published 
 
 monthly evaluating and listing materials in the fields of audio-visual 
 instruction. 
 
 Educational Screen Co. publishes 1000 and One: The Blue Book of 
 Non-Theatrical Films. Price 750. 
 
 (ID 
 
12 
 
 7. The Division of Intellectual Cooperation of the Pan American Union furnishes 
 
 a mimeographed pamphlet of 33 pages which lists films and slides available 
 for general use. Price 10^. 
 
 The Pan American Union’s Section of Motion Pictures issues a four-page 
 leaflet entitled Motion Picture Films Available through the Pan American 
 Union. 
 
 8. The RCA Manufacturing Co., Inc., Camden, N. J. (Educational Department) 
 
 furnishes a leaflet entitled Patriotic and Folk Music of the Americas which 
 lists phonograph records with prices. Included in the list pertaining to 
 Latin America are: Ballads and Folk Songs, Indian and Negro Music, 
 National Anthems of Latin American Countries, Representative Styles of 
 Latin American Music. 
 
 9. H. W. Wilson Co., 950 University Avenue, New York City, issues Educational 
 
 Film Catalogue , a general guide to films, kept up-to-date by supplements. 
 
 10. Victor Animatograph Corporation, Davenport, Iowa, furnishes a directory 
 
 of sources of 16-mm films. 
 
 11. The Office of the Coordinator of Inter-American Affairs, 444 Madison Ave¬ 
 
 nue New York City. Write for complete list of films available. 
 
 LATIN AMERICAN COSTUMES 
 
 The people of Latin America dress very much the same as the people of the 
 United States. In the interior of some countries like Guatemala, Ecuador, 
 Bolivia, and Peru, there are isolated Indian villages where the people retain the 
 same dress as their ancestors wore. The gaucho costume is still to be seen in 
 some places in Argentina and Uruguay, just as the cowboy costume is often seen 
 in some parts of the West of this country. Traditional costumes are for special 
 occasions, very much as in North America and other countries of the world. 
 
 GENERAL REFERENCES 
 
 Comins, Eben F. Indians that I Have Drawn (Bull. Pan Amer. Union , Julv 
 1939, p. 369-379, illus.). 
 
 Five pictures of Indians of Bilivia and Peru, illustrative of headdress. 
 
 Fiesta Pan Americana (Think, March 1941, p. 18-19, illus.). 
 
 Eight photographs showing Bolivian, Panamanian, Argentinian, Paraguayan, 
 and Peruvian costumes. 
 
 Folk Dances of Spanish America (Bull. Pan Amer. Union , November 1939, p. 
 652-658, illus.). 
 
 Illustrations of dance'costumes of Peru, Chile, Argentina, and Mexico. 
 Halouce, Edouard. Costumes of South America. Portfolio. French and 
 European Publications, 610 Fifth Avenue, New York City. 1941. Illus. 
 
 Two editions—$20.00 and $25.00: the latter includes illustrations of handi¬ 
 crafts. 
 
 Hernandez, Francisco J. Some Latin American Festivals (Bull Pan Amer. 
 Union , November 1939, p. 642-652, illus.). 
 
 Photographs of Indians: one Bolivian, two Ecuadorean, and three Peruvian, 
 Life and Death in Ancient Maya Land (Natl. Geog., November 1936, p. 622-631. 
 illus.). 
 
 Reproductions in color of 10 paintings by H. M. Herget. 
 
 Marden, Luis. Today in the Feathered Serpent’s City (Natl. Geog., Novem¬ 
 ber 1936‘, p. 598-615, illus.). 
 
 Fourteen natural color photographs showing the dress of the Mayas of 
 today. * 
 
 McMillin, Stewart E. The Heart of Ayma,r£ Land (Natl. Geog., February 
 1927, p. 213-256, illus.). 
 
 Thirteen illustrations of Bolivian and Peruvian Indians and cholos. 
 
 Means, Philip A. The Incas: Empire Builders of the Andes (Natl. Geog., 
 February 1938, p. 225-264, illus.). 
 
 Ten reproductions in color of paintings showing the ancient dress of the 
 Incas, and 10 photographs of the costumes of their descendants. 
 
 Merida, Carlos. Mexican Costumes. The Pocahontas Press, 12 Scott St v 
 Chicago. $18.00. 
 
13 
 
 Portraits of Ancient Mayas (Natl. Geog., November 1935, p. 552-561, illus.). 
 
 Ten reproductions in color of paintings by H. M. Herget. 
 
 Spicer, Dorothy G., and Yolanda Bartas. Latin American Costumes. 
 New York. Hyperion Press. 1941. 83 p., 16 colored pi., numerous black 
 
 and white illus. $5.00. 
 
 Argentina: 
 
 SPECIAL REFERENCES 
 
 Nichols, Madaline W. The Argentine Gaucho (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 May 1941, p. 271-275, illus.). 
 
 Four illustrations of gauchos. 
 
 Paintings of Gaucho Life in Argentina (Bull. Pan Amer. Union , March 1932, 
 p. 172-179). 
 
 Four reproductions of gaucho costumes of olden days. 
 
 Simpich, Frederick. Life on the Argentine Pampa (Natl. Geoq., October 1933, 
 p. 449-491, illus.). 
 
 Thirteen photographs of modern gauchos and 8 reproductions in color of 
 of paintings of gaucho life by Cesareo Bernaldo de Quiros. 
 
 Videla-Rivero, C. J. A Few Words on Argentine Music (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, October 1933, p. 794-800, illus.) 
 
 Three illustrations showing gauchos and the cielito dance. 
 
 Bolivia: 
 
 Castrillo, Primo. The Dancing Aymar^s of Bolivia (Bolivia, Nov.-Dec. 
 1940, p. 6-10, illus.). 
 
 Four pictures of Bolivian ! dance costumes. 
 
 Overbeck, Alicia O. Bolivia: Land of Fiestas (Natl. Geog., November 1934, 
 p. 645-660). 
 
 Thirteen photographs of Indian dancers. 
 
 Brazil: 
 
 Duckworth, Thomas. Carnaval Carioca: Or Rio's Carnival (Brazil Today. 
 December 1940, p. 10-15, 20, illus.). 
 
 Thirteen pictures showing types of costumes worn during this festival 
 period. 
 
 Moore, W. Robert. Rio Panorama (Natl. Geog., September 1939, p. 283- 
 324). 
 
 Thirteen photographs in color of carnival costumes. 
 
 Chile: 
 
 Hall, Robert King, and Margaret G. Stanton. Educating the Chilean 
 Huaso (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, April 1941, p. 216-224, illus.). 
 
 Reproduction of a painting showing a huaso or cowboy. 
 
 Sho Walter, William J. Twin Stars of Chile (Natl. Geog., February 1929, 
 p. 197-248, illus.). 
 
 Two colored pictures of huasos. 
 
 Willis, Bailey. The Awakening of Argentina and Chile (Natl. Geog., August 
 1916, p. 121-142, illus.). 
 
 One photograph of Araucanian Indians and one of huasos. 
 
 Dominican Republic: 
 
 Gayer, Jacob. Hispaniola Rediscovered (Natl. Geog., January 1931, p. 80-311 
 illus.). 
 
 Three pictures in color of Spanish colonial costumes. 
 
 Ecuador: 
 
 Dyott, G. M. The volcanoes of Ecuador (Natl. Geog., January 1929, p. 48-93, 
 illus.). 
 
 Two colored photographs of Otavalo Indians; two of Quechua Indians, one 
 of which is in color. 
 
 Gill, Mrs. Richard C. Mrs. Robinson Crusoe in Ecuador (Natl. Geog., Feb¬ 
 ruary 1934, p. 133-172, illus.). 
 
 Five photographs showing Indian dress. 
 
14 
 
 Guatemala: 
 
 Birnbaum, Martin. Guatemalan Panorama (Nat. Hist., September 1940, p. 
 73-85, illus.). 
 
 Ten pictures of Indians, three of which depict dances. 
 
 Bradley, Carolyn G. We Visited Guatemala (School Arts, November 1940, 
 p. 74-86, illus.). 
 
 Twenty-six illustrations, two in color. 
 
 De Jongh Osborne, Lilly. Guatemala Textiles. Middle American Research 
 Series, Publication No. 6. The Tulane University of Louisiana, New Orleans. 
 1935. Illus. 
 
 Eleven pictures of Guatemalan costumes, identified as to location. One 
 is in color. 
 
 - Making a Textile Collection (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, December 
 
 1933, p. 947-963, illus.). 
 
 Three pictures of Guatemalan costumes. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Letters from Guatemala. Boston. D. C. Heath & Co. 1941. 
 
 Fifteen illustrations of costumes, 11 of which are in color. 
 
 Kelsey, Vera, and Lilly de Jongh Osborne. Four Keys to Guatemala. 
 New York. Funk & Wagnalls. 1939. Illus. 
 
 Twenty-two pictures of costumes. Chapter 7 describes costumes and 
 accessories. 
 
 Lee, Thomas F. Guatemala: Land of Volcanoes and Progress (Natl. Geog., 
 November 1926, p. 599-648, illus.). 
 
 Nineteen photographs of Indians, two colored pictures of ceremonial 
 dances. 
 
 Long, E. John. Guatemala Interlude (Natl. Geog., October 1936, p. 429-460, 
 illus.). 
 
 Thirteen photographs of Indians, 7 of which are in color. 
 
 Textile Arts of the Guatemalan Natives (News Service Bull., Carnegie Institu¬ 
 tion of Washington, February 3, 1935, p. 159-168). 
 
 Six illustrations of costumes, two of which are in color. 
 
 Ward, Constance A. The Guatemala Art Renaissance (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, May 1941, p. 282-290, illus.). 
 
 Six reproductions of paintings of Guatemalan Indians. 
 
 Haiti: 
 
 Craige, J. H. Haitian Vignettes (Natl. Geog., October 1934, p. 435-485, illus.) 
 
 Eleven colored photographs illustrative of present day Haitian dress. 
 Cne shows Mardi Gras costumes. 
 
 Mexico: 
 
 Aztec Ambassadors (Nat. Hist., September 1940, p. 112). 
 
 Reproduction of a drawing. 
 
 Fernandez, Justino. The Mexican Pavilion at the New York World's Fair 
 (Bull. Pan Amer. Union. October 1940, p. 714-718, illus.). 
 
 Photograph showing dolls of the following types: Puebla Indian women, 
 and a Huichol couple. 
 
 Jimenez, Guillermo. The Dance in Mexico (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, June 
 1941, p. 317-324, illus.). 
 
 Three photographs of dance costumes. 
 
 Kerbey, McFall. The Texas Delta of an American Nile (Natl. Geog., Janu¬ 
 ary 1939, p. 51-96). 
 
 Costumes worn in a Texas celebration are shown. Six photographs in 
 color showing charros, china, and a tehuana. 
 
 Marden, Luis. On the Cortes Trail (Natl. Geog., September 1940, p. 335-375). 
 
 In color: two pictures of children in costume, a girl of Oaxaca, and cos¬ 
 tumes for a religious procession. Also two drawings of Indians and Spaniards 
 in the days of the conquest of Mexico. , 
 
 Merida, Carlos. Mexican Costumes. The Pocahontas Press, 12 Scott St., 
 Chicago. $18.00. 
 
 Miller, Max. The Women of Tehuantepec (Mexican Life, October 1938, p. 
 15-16). 
 
 Tehuana costume is described in the article and pictured in a water color. 
 
15 
 
 Modern Progress and Age-Oid Glamour in Mexico (Natl. Geog., December 1934, 
 p. 741-756). 
 
 Series of views, including two photographs of children in fiesta costume, 
 two chinas and two charros. 
 
 Simpich, Frederick. North America’s Oldest Metropolis (Natl. Geog., July 
 1930, p. 45-84, illus.). 
 
 Photograph of a Spanish costume, two pictures of bullfighters; in color: 
 two Indians and four chinas. 
 
 Traditional Mexican Dances (Theatre Arts Monthly, August 1938, p. 565-566). 
 
 Illustrated with 6 photographs. 
 
 Panama: 
 
 Burr, William H. Republic of Panama (Natl Geog., February 1904, p. 57-73). 
 
 Several polleras are shown in one of the photographs. 
 
 Kerbey, McFall. The Texas Delta of an American Nile (Natl. Geog., January 
 1939, p. 64). 
 
 Plate II shows a poller a costume. 
 
 Peru: 
 
 Barris, Anna A. Red Tassels for Huki in Peru. Chicago. A. Whitman and 
 Company. 1939. Illus. 
 
 Twenty-two illustrations showing costumes. 
 
 DeCoste, Frederick. Seeking Friendship in Mexico and Peru (Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, April 1941, p. 205-211). 
 
 Among the illustrations there are two of Peruvian Indians. 
 
 Desmond, Alice, Alida Malkus, and Ednah Wood. Boys of the Andes. 
 Boston. D. C. Heath and Company. 1941. Illus. 
 
 Fourteen illustrations of costumes. 
 
 Kerbey, McFall. Cuzco: America’s Ancient Mecca (Natl. Geog., October 
 1908, p. 669-689, illus.). 
 
 Seven photographs of Indians and cholos. 
 
 - Some Wonderful Sights in the Andean Highlands (Natl. Geog., Sep¬ 
 tember 1908, p. 597-618, illus.). 
 
 Five photographs of Indians and cholos. 
 
 Malkus, Alida. Along the Inca Highway. Boston. D. C. Heath and 
 Company. 1941. 
 
 Shows one ancient Indian costume, and five examples of Indian dress. 
 
 - The Silver Llama. Philadelphia. John C. Winston Company. 1939. 
 
 Has 29 illustrations showing the dress of the Peruvian Indian, 12 of which 
 are in color. 
 
 Peru: Ideal Vacation Land (The Spanish American, West Coast Edition, 
 May-August 1941, p. 51-88). 
 
 Twelve pictures of Peruvian Indians. 
 
 Showalter, William J. The Lure of Lima, City of the Kings (Natl. Geog., 
 June 1930, p. 727-784). 
 
 Six pictures in color of Indians. 
 
 Uruguay: 
 
 Theatre Arts Monthly, May 1939, p. 385. 
 
 Illustration showing the cielito, a popular dance. 
 
 Videla-Rivero, C. J. A Few Words on Argentine Music (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, October 1933, p. 794-800). 
 
 Venezuela. 
 
 Marden, Luis. Caracas: Cradle of the Liberator (Natl. Geog., April 1940, 
 p. 477-513, illus.). 
 
 One photograph of the disappearing traditional dress; three of colonial 
 costumes, one of which is in color. 
 
 The Latin American Village, 206 North Cogswell Road, El Monte, California, 
 
 advertises hand-painted pictures (10 x 13 inches) depicting folk life in South 
 
 America and Mexico. 
 
 The Industrial Arts Cooperative Service, 519 W^est 121st St., New York City, 
 
 maintains a loan service which includes some costumes. Consult their catalogue. 
 
16 
 
 Service Bureau, Women’s Home Companion, 250 Park Avenue, New York City, 
 sells for 10 cents a two-page set of pictures in color of the “Rosita” doll with 
 her costumes from Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Paraguay, and Peru. This paper 
 doll originally appeared in the January 1942 issue of Women’s Home Com¬ 
 panion. 
 
 LATIN AMERICAN EXHIBITS AVAILABLE IN THE UNITED 
 
 STATES 
 
 1. The Riverside Museum, 310 Riverside Drive, New York City, announces: 
 
 Latin American Posters. Two exhibitions of 75 posters each from Brazil, 
 Chile, Cuba, Ecuador, Mexico, Peru, Puerto Rico, and Uruguay. Subjects: 
 Health, Education, Amusement, Transportation, etc. Outdoor bill-board 
 posters by prominent artists, mounted on muslin. Each part, $25 for two 
 weeks, plus transportation one way. 
 
 New Prints from Latin America. Two exhibitions of 75 prints each. 
 Etchings, lithographs, and wood block prints, from Brazil, Chile, Ecuador, 
 Mexico, Peru, and Uruguay. Mounted, no frames, each part $25 for three 
 weeks, plus transportation one way. 
 
 Archaeological Designs of the Chorotegan Indians of Central America. 
 70 mounted and titled watercolors, 24 x 30 inches, unframed. Exhibited 
 in Paris. $50 for three weeks, plus transportation one way. 
 
 2. The Museum of Modern Art, 11 West 53d Street, New York City: 
 
 The Popular Art of Mexico. Approximately 100 items of wide variety, 
 earthenware dishes, jars, figures and toys, textiles and embroideries, masks: 
 baskets, and mats. Installation tables and shelves in attractive colors and 
 unusual forms accompany the exhibition. Photographs on request. Re¬ 
 quires approximately 500 square feet for showing. $50 for three weeks. 
 
 Murals by Portinari. Three mural panels in tempera on canvas (from 
 this important Brazilian artist’s most important paintings) executed for the 
 Brazilian Pavilion at the New York World’s Fair, accompanied by 11 
 drawings and color notes for frescoes in the Ministry of Education in Rio 
 de Janeiro. The murals are approximately 12 feet square, and about 150 
 running feet of wall space will accommodate the entire exhibition. $60 one 
 month. 
 
 3. The American Institute of Graphic Arts, 115 East Fortieth Street, New York 
 
 City: 
 
 Large collection of etchings, books, posters, and magazines which ex¬ 
 emplify the development of the graphic arts in Latin America. Rental fee, 
 $10 and transportation charges. 
 
 4. The American Federation of Arts, Barr Building, Washington, D. C.: 
 
 A collection of Argentine paintings. Also sculpture by Marina Nunez del 
 Prado of Bolivia including 22 wood and terracotta figures of striking Bolivian 
 Indian subjects. Rental fee of $50, plus transportation charges one way. 
 15 percent discount to members of the American Association of University 
 Women, whose Latin American scholarship Miss Nunez del Prado held in 
 1940-41. 
 
 5. The American National Committee on Engraving, 137 East Forty-Third Street, 
 
 New York City: 
 
 Large collection of prints from all the American republics. 
 
 FLAGS 
 
 Grosvenor, Gilbert, and William J. Showalter (Natl. Geog., September 1934, 
 p. 339-396, illus.). 
 
 Historical information pertaining to flag origins and uses. The illustrations 
 include flags famous in American history. Inca banners, an Aztec standard, 
 the banner of Hidalgo, the flag of the Empire of Brazil, and many other flags 
 are shown in color. 
 
17 
 
 Pan American Union. Flags and Coats-of-Arms of the American Republics. 
 Pamphlet. Washington, D. C. 10^. 
 
 Reproductions in color of the flags and coats-of-arms of the twenty-one 
 republics, with a brief description and historical sketch of each. 
 
 Flags of the Latin American republics may be purchased from the following 
 companies: 
 
 American Flag Co., Inc., 73-77. Mercer Street, New York City: 
 
 Printed silk flags, 2x3 inches, mounted on stained staffs with wood gilt 
 spears; and 4x6 inches. Black ebony stand to hold these. Also 8 x 12 and 
 12 x 18 inches printed silk flags. 
 
 Muslin flags, Linette quality, size 12 x 18 inches, set of 21 Pan American 
 flags, mounted on staffs; also wooden stand to hold this set. 
 
 Sewed muslin, Ensign National flags, with coats-of-arms, set of 21 flags, 
 size 2 x 3 ft. with canvas heading and grommets. Also without headings, just 
 tacked on 5 ft. varnished staff with wood gilt spear. 
 
 Annin and Company, Fifth Avenue at 16th St., New York City. 
 
 Dettra Flag Co., Inc., Oaks, Montgomery County, Pa. 
 
 Printed silk flags, mounted on ornamented staffs: 4 x 6, 8 x 12, 12 x 18, 24 x 36 
 inches. Also unmounted flags: 4x6, 8x12, 12x18, 24x36 inches. 
 
 Meyer’s Military Shop, 816 Seventeenth Street NW., Washington, D. C. 
 
 Printed silk flags, in sets of 21 flags, 2 x 3, 4 x 6, 8 x 12. 12 x 18 inches. 
 
 MAPS 
 
 The largest relief map in the Western Hemisphere is in Guatemala. It was 
 constructed in 1905 by a Guatemalan engineer, Colonel Francisco Vela. It is a 
 miniature of the country complete with cities, railroads, lakes, volcanoes, harbors. 
 It covers more than a quarter of an acre within the city limits of Guatemala. 
 
 FOR SALE 
 
 Maps of the Latin American countries are sold by the following, and catalogues 
 or price lists can be had upon application: 
 
 American Geographical Society, Broadway at One Hundred and Fifty-sixth 
 Street, New York City. 
 
 American Map Co., 16 East Forty-second Street, New York City. 
 Denoyer-Geppert, Inc., 5235 Ravenswood Avenue, Chicago, Ill. 
 
 C. S. Hammond Co., 30 Church Street, New York City. 
 
 Educational Research Bureau, 1321 M Street NW., Washington, D. C. 
 International Map Co., Inc., 90 West Street, New York City. 
 
 National Geographic Society, Sixteenth and M Streets NW., Washington, D. C. 
 Two excellent wall maps: (1) Map of South America and (2) Map of the 
 Caribbean Area, compiled and drawn in the Cartographic Section of the 
 National Geographic Society. Price 60^ each. 
 
 A. J. Nystrom & Co., Inc., 3341 Elston Avenue, Chicago, Ill. 
 
 Rand McNally Co., 538 South Clark Street, Chicago, Ill. 
 
 U. S. Hydrographic Office, U. S. Navy Department, Washington, D. C. 
 
 For charts showing coast lines and aviation charts showing limited areas 
 of the interior. 
 
 SPECIAL MAPS 
 
 1. The Pan American Highway Confederation, Pan American Building, Wash¬ 
 
 ington, D. C., issues a four-page leaflet entitled The Pan American Highway: 
 Artery of Commerce, Peace, and Defense, which contains maps of the highway 
 particularly suitable for intermediate grades. 
 
 2. Foreign Policy Association, 22 East Thirty-eighth Street, New York City, 
 
 has a set of 13 maps and charts on Latin America. $1.00 for the set. Ex¬ 
 cellent for social studies in Junior High School. These maps show air 
 routes, highways, steamship, trade routes. 
 
 3. Pan-American Airwa} r s distributes maps when available. Consult the nearest 
 
 office for information. 
 
18 
 
 PICTORIAL MAPS 
 
 Fischgrund Publishing Co., Apartado 2071, Mexico, D. F., Mexico, issues a 
 Pictorial Map of Mexico. $1.00 ($6.00 per dozen). 27 x 43 inches. 
 Friendship Press, 150 Fifth Avenue, New York City, has picture maps of Latin 
 America and of Mexico, with cut-outs representing typical features, to be colored 
 and mounted. 35 x 50 inches. 50^. 
 
 MUSEUMS THAT HAVE LATIN AMERICAN COLLECTIONS 
 
 I. ART 
 
 California: 
 
 Los Angeles: County Museum of History, Science and Art. 
 
 San Diego: Fine Arts Society of San Diego, Fine Arts Gallery of San Diego. 
 San Francisco: 
 
 M. H. De Young Memorial Museum. 
 
 San Francisco Art Association, San Francisco Museum of Art. 
 
 San Marino: Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. 
 
 Colorado: 
 
 Colorado Springs: Colorado Springs Fine Arts Center. Taylor Museum of 
 the Colorado Springs Fine Arts Center. 
 
 Denver: Denver Art Museum. 
 
 Connecticut: 
 
 Hartford: Wadsworth Atheneum, Morgan Memorial and Avery Memorial. 
 New Haven: Yale University, Yale Art Gallery. 
 
 District of Columbia: 
 
 Washington: 
 
 Dumbarton Oaks. 
 
 Textile Museum of the District of Columbia. 
 
 Illinois: 
 
 Chicago: Art Institute of Chicago. 
 
 Maryland: 
 
 Baltimore: 
 
 Baltimore Museum of Art. 
 
 Walters Art Gallery, 
 
 Massachusetts: 
 
 Boston: Museum of Fine Arts. 
 
 Cambridge: Harvard University, William Hayes Fogg Art Museum. 
 Northampton: Smith College Museum of Fine Art. 
 
 Worcester: Worcester Art Museum. 
 
 Michigan: 
 
 Ann Arbor: University of Michigan, Art Museum. 
 
 Detroit: Detroit Institute of Arts. 
 
 Minnesota: 
 
 Minneapolis: Minneapolis Society of Fine Arts, Minneapolis Institute of Arts. 
 Missouri: 
 
 Kansas City: William Rockhill Nelson Gallery of Art and Atkins Museum of 
 Fine Arts. 
 
 St. Louis: City Art Museum. 
 
 Springfield: Springfield Art Museum. 
 
 New Jersey: 
 
 Newark: Newark Museum Association, Newark Museum. 
 
 New Mexico: ' 
 
 Santa Fe: Museum of New Mexico. 
 
19 
 
 New York: 
 
 New York City: 
 
 Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences, Brooklyn Museum. 
 
 Cooper Union, Museum for the Arts of Decoration. 
 
 Costume Institute, Museum of Costume Art. 
 
 Hispanic Society of America. 
 
 Metropolitan Museum of Art. 
 
 Museum of Modern Art. 
 
 Ohio:! 
 
 Cincinnati: Cincinnati Museum Association, Cincinnati Art Museum. 
 Cleveland: Cleveland Museum of Art. 
 
 Toledo: Toledo Museum of Art. 
 
 0 
 
 Pennsylvania: 
 
 Philadelphia: 
 
 Philadelphia Museum of Art. 
 
 University of Pennsylvania, University Museum. 
 
 Rhode Island: 
 
 Providence: Rhode Island School of Design, Museum of Art. 
 
 Virginia: 
 
 Richmond: 
 
 Valentine Museum. 
 
 Virginia Museum of Fine Arts, 
 
 Hawaii: 
 
 Honolulu: Honolulu Academy of Arts. 
 
 II. SCIENCE 
 
 California: 
 
 Berkeley: University of California, Museum of Anthropology. 
 
 San Francisco: California Academy of Sciences, Museum and Steinhart 
 Aquarium. 
 
 Connecticut: 
 
 New Haven: Yale University, Peabody Museum of Natural History. 
 
 District of Columbia: 
 
 Washington: U. S. National Museum. 
 
 Illinois: 
 
 Chicago: Field Museum of Natural History. 
 
 Louisiana: 
 
 New Orleans: Tulane University, Middle American Research Institute. 
 
 Massachusetts: 
 
 Cambridge: Harvard University, Peabody Museum of Archaeology and 
 Ethonology. 
 
 Missouri: 
 
 St. Louis: Educational Museum of the St. Louis Public Schools. 
 
 New Mexico: 
 
 Albuquerque: University of New Mexico, Museum of Anthropology. 
 
 New York: 
 
 Buffalo: Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences, Buffalo Museum of Science. 
 
 New York City: 
 
 American Museum of Natural History. 
 
 Heye Foundation, Museum of the American Indian. 
 
 Rochester: Rochester Museum of Arts and Sciences. 
 
20 
 
 Pennsylvania: 
 
 Philadelphia: 
 
 Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 
 
 University Museum. 
 
 Pittsburgh: Carnegie Museum. 
 
 Washington: 
 
 Seattle: Washington State Museum. 
 
 Wisconsin: 
 
 Milwaukee: Milwaukee Public Museum. 
 
 Hawaii: 
 
 Honolulu: Bernice P. Bishop Museum. 
 
 ORGANIZATIONS THAT HAVE VARIOUS TYPES OF INFOR¬ 
 MATION AND MATERIALS ON LATIN AMERICA* 
 
 1. American Education Press, Inc., 400 South Front Street, Columbus, Ohio. 
 
 Publishes Current Events for upper grades in two editions which carry a 
 regular section on Latin American relations; My Weekly Reader in five ed- 
 tions at elementary reading levels; study booklets, etc. 
 
 2. American Library Association, 520 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Ill. 
 
 Selective, annotated bibliographies, including Latin America; books for 
 young readers, 1941. Single copy 25 cents. 
 
 3. American Printing House for the Blind, 1839 Frankfort Avenue, Louisville, 
 
 Ky. Publishes a number of books in Braille dealing with Latin America. 
 
 4. American Red Cross, Washington, D. C. Publishes American Junior Red 
 
 Cross News for elementary school children, and the Junior Red Cross 
 Journal for children at junior high school levels. Arranges for the ex¬ 
 change of albums and school work. American Neighbors is a booklet of 
 reprints of articles on Latin America taken from the Journal. 
 
 5. Brazilian Information Bureau of the Government of Brazil, 551 Fifth Avenue, 
 
 New York City. Issues Brazil Today, and other material on Brazil. 
 Distributes an Outline of Brazil and A Trip to Brazil. Will answer in¬ 
 quiries regarding Brazil. The same is the case with similar bureaus con¬ 
 ducted by other Latin American governments. 
 
 * 
 
 6. Educational Research Bureau, 1321 M Street NW., Washington, D. C. 
 
 Charts, histo-graphs, maps, publications at higher levels may be pur¬ 
 chased. 
 
 7. The Foreign Policy Association, 22 East Thirty-eighth Street, New York 
 
 City. A nonpartisan educational organization; publishes material on 
 Latin America. Many issues of the Foreign Policy Reports (documented, 
 readable studies published twice a month), and Headline Books (written in 
 popular style and illustrated with charts and maps) are devoted to Latin 
 America. Once a month the weekly Foreign Policy Bulletin carries an 
 article ‘‘Trends in Latin America.” 
 
 8. Industrial Arts Cooperative Service, Inc., 519 West One Hundred and 
 
 Twenty-first Street, New York City. Publishes a handbook-catalogue 
 which lists source materials arranged according to special project areas for 
 elementary and junior high schools. All materials listed are assembled and 
 distributed through this organization. Supplies available include balsa 
 wood, cochineal dye, tagua nuts, material for construction of looms, pic¬ 
 tures and postcards; a loan service includes basketry, costumes, pottery, 
 weaving, etc. Membership is $3.00 a year. 
 
 9. National Audubon Society, Crescent and Mulberry Streets, Harrisburg, Pa. 
 
 Color pictures of birds. 
 
 * Owing to the fact that these organizations do not have unlimited facilities for handling correspondence 
 it is suggested that teachers do not encourage their pupils to write to them unless a child is appointed to 
 represent a whole class or school. 
 
21 
 
 10. National Education Association, 1201 Sixteenth Street NW., Washington, 
 
 D. C. Prepares material for teachers and students; publishes Among Us, 
 a newsletter issued five times a year. The Association cooperates with the 
 Columbia Broadcasting System in its presentation of the School of the Air 
 programs, and assists in the preparation of the CBS Teacher’s Manual. 
 
 11. National Geographic Society, Sixteenth and M Streets NW., Washington, 
 
 D. C. Maintains a school service. Specified packets of back numbers of 
 the National Geographic Magazine may be obtained at 10 for $1.00; separate 
 color sheets from the magazine, 96 sheets for 50 cents; Geographic School 
 Bulletins for teachers published weekly, 25 cents a year for each subscrip¬ 
 tion; maps, pictures. 
 
 12. Pan American Airways System. Provides printed material describing various 
 
 trips; a travel map of the complete Caribbean area is available. It is 
 suggested that the teacher visit the office of Pan American Airways nearest 
 her community for full information. 
 
 13. Pan American Union, Washington, D. C. An international organization 
 
 created and maintained by the 21 American republics for the purpose of 
 fostering mutual understanding and cooperation among the American 
 nations. Its resources are always at the disposal of official or private 
 organizations and individuals anywhere in the Americas. 
 
 (a) The Bulletin of the Pan American Union is the official .organ, and has 
 
 been published regularly for 48 years. There are three editions: 
 English, Spanish, Portuguese. The yearly subscription for the 
 English edition is $1.50. Back issues may be secured from the 
 Office of the Chief Clerk, copies prior to January 1935 selling for 
 25 cents each, and thereafter for 15 cents. 
 
 Latin America—351 Articles Published in the Bulletin of the Pan 
 American Union , a mimeographed pamphlet with titles arranged 
 under fourteen classifications which aid the teacher to select 
 material on topics not listed in this guide. 
 
 (b) The Stamp Section issues a circular listing available Latin American 
 
 stamps and giving prices. This will be furnished in response to 
 requests accompanied by return postage. Displays are lent 
 without charge to accredited organizations. Who’s Who on the 
 Postage Stamps of Latin America is a series of booklets in prepara¬ 
 tion. Five booklets, issued alphabetically by countries, are now 
 available at 10 cents each. Album of 24 views of the American 
 republics in four-color poster stamps, 15 cents an album. 
 
 (c) The Music Division serves as a clearing house for information on 
 
 Latin American music and the promotion of activities connected 
 with musical exchange between the Americas. Publications of 
 this Division include: 
 
 Partial List of Latin American Music Obtainable in the United 
 States. 10£. 
 
 Recordings of Latin American Songs and Dances—An anno¬ 
 tated, selective list of recordings of popular folk music. 
 30 ^. 
 
 (d) The Section of Motion Pictures issues a leaflet entitled Motion 
 
 Picture Films Available through the Pan American Union. The 
 leaflet lists titles of films available without rental fee, and instruc¬ 
 tions for obtaining and using them. The borrower must agree 
 to pay transportation costs both ways. “Native Arts of Old 
 Mexico,” “The Pampa,” “Picturesque Guatemala,” “Up the 
 River to Iguazu,” are among the films of special interest to 
 teachers. 
 
 (e) The Counselor’s Office is in charge of the preparation and distribu¬ 
 
 tion of material suitable for school assemblies and other events 
 planned for Pan American Day (April 14). A set is furnished 
 free of charge to each interested school. Much of this material 
 is of permanent value. List furnished upon request. 
 
22 
 
 (f) The Division of Intellectual Cooperation distributes the following 
 materials of interest to teachers: 
 
 Panorama: A Record of Inter-America Cultural Events. 100 
 a copy. 
 
 Bibliographies: 
 
 A Syllabus for the Teaching of Latin American History in 
 the High Schools. 250. 
 
 English Translations of Latin American Fiction. Free. 
 
 General References on Latin American Education. 
 
 Latin America in 351 Articles Published in the Bulletin of 
 the Pan American Union. Free. 
 
 Latin American Archaeology. Free. 
 
 Latin American Literature: References in English and 
 Translations. 250. 
 
 Latin American Music, the Theater and the Dance. 100. 
 
 Life and Customs in Latin America. 100. 
 
 Outline for the Incidental Study of Latin American His¬ 
 tory, with bibliography. Free. 
 
 Partial List of Latin American Educational Journals. 
 100. Of special interest to teachers and students of 
 comparative education. 
 
 Periodicals published in the United States which carry 
 information on Latin American affairs. Free. 
 
 Selective List of Periodicals of General Interest Published 
 in Latin America. 150. Of special interest to Spanish 
 classes. 
 
 Memoranda: 
 
 Brief Accounts of Important Events in Latin American 
 History which Occurred during the Months from Septem¬ 
 ber to June (school year). Free. 
 
 Christmas Customs in Latin America. Free. 
 
 Information on Summer Schools in the Americas. Free. 
 
 Inter-American School Correspondence. Free. 
 
 Memoranda on the Importance of Spanish, with bibli¬ 
 ography. Free. 
 
 Pan American Clubs in High Schools. Free. 
 
 - Report of the Division of Intellectual Cooperation. Free. 
 
 Suggestions for Persons Planning to Study in Latin 
 America. Free. 
 
 Suggestions for Spanish Clubs or Classes. Free. 
 
 The Exchange of Students and Teachers. Free. 
 
 Why We Observe October 12th. Free. 
 
 Lists: 
 
 Firms Selling Flags of the Americas. Free. 
 
 Latin American Independence Days. Free. 
 
 National Heroes of the Latin American Republics. Free. 
 
 Pictorial Maps and Charts of Latin America. Free. 
 
 Slides and Films on Latin America. 100. 
 
 Spanish Records for Classroom Use. Free. 
 
 Miscellaneous: 
 
 Collection of Mexican Christmas Songs (Spanish words 
 and music. 50. 
 
 Intellectual Relations between the United States and 
 Latin America. 100. 
 
 Latin America a Musical Melting Pot. 100. 
 
 Programs for the Study of Latin America. Free. 
 
 The Flag of the Americas: A Description and Outline 
 Drawing. Free. 
 
23 
 
 (g) Other Pan American Union publications of special interest to the 
 teacher: 
 
 American Nation Series, 20 pamphlets. 50 each. 
 
 American City Series, 25 pamphlets. 50 each. 
 
 Commodity Series, 23 pamphlets. 50 each. 
 
 Foreign Trade Series. Separate booklets on each country, 
 containing latest foreign trade statistics, compiled from 
 official sources. 50 each. 
 
 Miscellaneous pamphlets on Latin American history, education, 
 fine arts archaeology, etc. List supplied on request. 
 
 Commercial Pan America. A monthly review dealing with 
 inter-American economic and financial subjects. $1.00 a 
 year, 100 a copy. 
 
 Pan American Bookshelf. A montly list of new books received 
 by the Columbus Memorial Library of the Pan American 
 Union. 
 
 14. Progressive Education Association, 221 West Fifty-seventh Streeet, New 
 
 York City. Publishes Progressive Education, which features reviews of 
 books and films on Latin Ameria. Is actively engaged in the promotion 
 of Latin American studies in the schools, and keeps on file at headquarters 
 the result of its investigations. 
 
 15. United States Office of Education, Federal Security Agency, Washington, 
 
 D. C. Activities of the Office of Education in this field include the exchange 
 of professors, teachers, and students between the United States and the 
 other American republics, in cooperation with the Department of State. 
 It also provides for the preparation and distribution of materials on Latin 
 America through its Information Exchange on Education and Defense, 
 and the evaluation of credits and other assistance to students from schools 
 and universities in the other republics by the Division of Comparative 
 Education. Exhibits of teaching materials—books, maps, films, handi¬ 
 crafts, pictures—in the inter-American field are prepared by the Library 
 Service Division. 
 
 SOME PERIODICALS PRINTED IN ENGLISH WHICH ARE 
 DEVOTED TO THE OTHER AMERICAS 
 
 Agriculture in the Americas: 
 
 Office of Foreign Agricultural Relations, United States Department of Agricul¬ 
 ture, Washington, D. C. Illustrated. Copies may be obtained from Super¬ 
 intendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, D. C. 
 750 a year, 100 a copy. 
 
 Amigos: 
 
 1137 Loyola Avenue, Chicago. Pocket size. Translations of Latin American 
 stories. Monthly. $1.50 a year. 
 
 Among Us: 
 
 News letter of the Committee on International Relations of the National 
 Education Association. 1201 Sixteenth Street, Washington, D. C. Devoted 
 to the promotion of Latin American studies in the elementary and secondary 
 schools. Free. 
 
 Andean Monthly: 
 
 Published by the Chile-United States Cultural Institute, Casilla 13076, Santiago 
 de Chile, Chile. Illustrated, pocket-size journal. Translations of Chilean 
 stories; articles of general interest on Chile. Monthly. $1.00 a year. 
 
 Argentine News: 
 
 Published by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. Calle Arenales 761, Buenos 
 Aires. Illustrated. Monthly. Gratis. 
 
 490718 0 - 42 -3 
 
 s 
 
24 
 
 Bolivia: 
 
 90 Broad Street, New York City. A monthly survey of Bolivian activities: 
 industry, commerce, banking, trade, statistics. Illustrated. $1.00 a year. 
 
 Brazil: 
 
 Organ of the American Brazilian Association, 17 Battery Place, New York 
 City. Illustrated. Monthly. 20(£ a copy. 
 
 Brazil Today: 
 
 Organ of the Brazilian Information Bureau, 551 Fifth Avenue, New York 
 City. Monthly. $2.00 a year. 
 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union: 
 
 Official organ of the Pan American Union, Washington, D. C. Monthly review 
 of current events in the Americas, Articles on every phase of life and progress 
 in Latin America. $1.50 a year; 15^ a copy. 
 
 Colombia: 
 
 10 Bridge Street, New York City. Illustrated. Monthly. $3.00 a year. 
 
 Commercial Pan America: 
 
 A review of commerce and finance published by the Division of Economic 
 Information of the Pan American Union, Washington, D. C. Monthly. 
 Mimeographed. 
 
 The Dominican Republic: 
 
 Published under the auspices of the Dominican Chamber of Commerce of the 
 United States, Inc., 30 Rockefeller Plaza, New York City. Bimonthly. 
 
 Ecuador: 
 
 Organ of the Ecuadorean-American Chamber of Commerce and the Ecuadorean 
 Information Bureau, 2 Broadway, New York City. Bimonthly. $3.00 a year. 
 
 Goodwill: 
 
 12 Rue dela Revolution, Port-au-Prince, Haiti. For the promotion of cultural 
 ar d economic relations between Haiti and the United States. Monthly. 
 25^ a copy. 
 
 Hispania: 
 
 Organ of the American Association of Teachers of Spanish. Stanford Uni¬ 
 versity, California. Published quarterly. Annual subscription $2.00, 
 including membership dues in the association. Single copies 50^. 
 
 Hispanic American Historical Review: 
 
 Published by Duke University Press, Durham, N. C. Quarterly. $4.00 a year. 
 
 Hispanic Review: 
 
 University of Pennsylvania, 3622 Locust Street, Philadelphia, Pa. A quarterly 
 journal devoted to research in the Hispanic languages and literatures. $4.00 
 a year. 
 
 Mexican-American Review: 
 
 Calle San Juan de Letran 24, Mexico, D. F., Mexico. Published in the interest 
 of Mexican-American relations. Illustrated. Monthly. $3.00 a year. 
 
 Mexican Life: 
 
 Calle Uruguay 3, Mexico, D. F., Mexico. A review of customs, folklore, art, 
 music, books, etc. Illustrated. Monthly. $2.50 a year. 
 
 Mexican News: 
 
 Published by the International New Service, Department of Foreign Affairs 
 of Mexico. Monthly. Distributed free. Address: Departamento de In- 
 formacion para el Extranjero, Secretaria de Relaciones, Calle de Luis 
 Gonzales Obregon 11, Mexico, D. F., Mexico. 
 
25 
 
 Modern Mexico: 
 
 Published by the Mexican Chamber of Commerce of the United States, Inc., 
 60 Wall Street, New York City. News items and special articles about 
 Mexico. Illustrated. Monthly. $2.00 a year. 
 
 New Horizons: 
 
 The magazine of America’s merchant marine of the air, published by Pan 
 American Airways, Inc., 135 East Forty-second Street, New York City. 
 Illustrated. Monthly. $1.00 a year. 
 
 The Inter-American Monthly: 
 
 Published by John I. B. McCullough, 1200 National Press Bldg., Washington,, 
 D. C. Current events; articles of general and specialized interest. Illus¬ 
 trated. 250 per copy, $3.00 per year. 
 
 The Pan American: 
 
 103 Park Avenue, New York City. “Magazine of the Americas” in which 
 items of current interest are published in digest make-up. Illustrated. 
 Monthly. $3.00 a year. 
 
 Pan American Bookshelf: 
 
 A list of books received by the Columbus Memorial Library of the Pan Amer¬ 
 ican Union, Washington, D. C.; issued monthly by the Library. Gratis. 
 
 Panorama: 
 
 Published by the Division of Intellectual Cooperation of the Pan American 
 Union, Washington, D. C. A record of inter-American cultural events. 
 100 a copy. 
 
 South Pacific Mail: 
 
 Calle Prat No. 659, Valparaiso, Chile. Information about Chile and the West 
 Coast countries. Illustrated. Weekly. $2.40 (about 100 a copy.) 
 
 Turismo: 
 
 Organ of the Touring and Automobile Club of Peru. United States representa¬ 
 tive: Brentano’s, 586 Fifth Avenue, New York City. Short English sec¬ 
 tion. Beautifully illustrated articles. 200 a copy. 
 
 Venezuela: 
 
 Published under the auspices of the Venezuelan Chamber of Commerce of the 
 United States, 1775 Broadway, New York City. Illustrated. Monthly. 
 $3.00 a year. 
 
 PERIODICALS CITED IN THIS GUIDE* 
 
 Agriculture in the Americas: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 American Foreign Service Journal: 
 
 American Foreign Service Association, Department of State, Washington, 
 D. C. $4.00 a year; 350 a copy. 
 
 American Junior Red Cross News: 
 
 American National Red Cross, Washington, D. C. 500 a year. 
 
 Among Us: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 Bird Lore: 
 
 Changed to Audubon Magazine in 1941. 1006 Fifth Avenue, New York City, 
 
 $1.50 a year. 
 
 Bolivia: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 "■Unless otherwise specified all these periodicals are issued monthly. 
 
26 
 
 Brazil: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 Brazil Today: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 Building America: 
 
 Americana Company, 2 West Forty-fifth Street, New York City. $2.00 per 
 year; 300 a copy. 
 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 Catholic Boy: 
 
 Catholic Boy Publishing Company, 1300 Foshay Tower, Minneapolis, Minn. 
 $1.00 a year. 
 
 Catholic Historical Review: 
 
 Quarterly. $4.00 a year. Catholic University of America, Washington, D. C. 
 
 Catholic World: 
 
 The Paulist Press, 41 West Fifty-ninth Street. $4.00 a year. 
 
 Child Life: 
 
 Rand, McNally & Co., 536 South Clark Street, Chicago, Ill. $2.50 a year. 
 Children’s Play Mate Magazine: 
 
 A. R. Mueller Printing and Lithograph Co., 3025 East Seventh-fifth Street, 
 Cleveland, Ohio. 15(4 a copy. 
 
 Christian Science Monitor—Weekly Magazine Section: 
 
 The Christian Science Publishing Society, Boston, Mass. 5(4 a copy. 
 
 The Classmate (a weekly): 
 
 The Methodist Publishing House, 420 Plum Street, Cincinnati, Ohio. 75(4 a 
 year. 
 
 Commercial Pan America: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 Current Events: 
 
 American Education Press, Inc., 400 South Front Street, Columbus, Ohio. 
 75(4 a year (less in quantity). 
 
 Educational Screen: 
 
 Educational Screen, Inc., 64 East Lake Street, Chicago, Ill. $2.00 a year. 
 Foreign Commerce Weekly: 
 
 United States Department of Commerce. $4.00 a year; 100 a copy. 
 
 Fortune Magazine: 
 
 Time Incorporated. Time and Life Building, Rockefeller Center, New' York 
 City. $10.00 a year; $1.00 a copy. 
 
 Geographical Review: 
 
 Published by American Geographical Society, Broadw'ay at One Hundred 
 Fifth-sixth Street, New York City. $5.00 a year. 
 
 Geographic School Bulletins (weekly): 
 
 National Geographic Society, Sixteenth and M Streets NW., Washington, 
 D. C. 250 to cover postage. 
 
 Grace Log (suspended in 1935): 
 
 W. R. Grace Company, 7 Hanover Square, New York City. 
 
 Grade Teacher: 
 
 Educational Publishing Corporation, Darien, Conn. $2.50 per year. 
 
27 
 
 Harper’s Magazine: 
 
 Harper & Brothers, 49 East 33rd St., New York City, $4.00 a year; 400 a copy. 
 Hispania: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 Hispanic American Historical Review: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 House and Garden: 
 
 Conde Nast Publishing Company, Inc., Greenwich, Conn. $3.00 a year. 
 
 The Instructor: 
 
 Owen Publishing Co.^ Danville, New York City. $2.50 a year. 
 
 The Inter-American Quarterly: 
 
 John McCullough, Publisher, 1200 National Press Building, Washington, 
 D.C. $1.50 a year. 
 
 International Quarterly: 
 
 International House, 500 Riverside Drive, New York. $1.00 a year; 250 a copy. 
 
 Journal of Geography: 
 
 National Council of Geography Teachers, Menasha, Wis. $2.50 a year. 
 
 Journal of the American Association of University Women (quarterly): 
 
 American Association of University Women, 1634 Eye Street NW., Washing¬ 
 ton, D. C. 
 
 Journal of the National Education Association: 
 
 1201 Sixteenth Street, Washington, D. C. $2.00 a year. 
 
 Junior Arts and Activities: 
 
 740 Rush Street, Chicago, Ill. $2.00 a year. 
 
 The Junior Natural History Magazine: 
 
 The American Museum of Natural History, Central Park West at Seventy- 
 ninth Street, New York City. $1.00 a year; 100 a copy. 
 
 Junior Red Cross Journal: 
 
 American National Red Cross, Washington, D. C. $1.00 per year. 
 
 Junior Scholastic (weekly): 
 
 Scholastic Corporation, 430 Kinnard Avenue, Dayton, Ohio. 900. For two 
 or more, 500 a school year. 
 
 Magazine of Art: 
 
 American Federation of Arts, Barr Building, Washington, D. C. $5.00 a year; 
 500 a copy. 
 
 Mexican Folkways: 
 
 Published by Frances Toor, Manchester 8, Mexico, D. F. $1.00 a single copy. 
 
 Modern Mexico: 
 
 See preceding list. 
 
 My Weekly Reader: 
 
 American Education Press, Inc., 400 South Front Street, Columbus, Ohio. 
 750 a year. (Special rates for school clubs.) 
 
 National Geographic Magazine: 
 
 National Geographic Society, Sixteenth and M Streets NW., Washington, 
 D. C. $3.50 a year. 
 
 Natural History: 
 
 American Museum of Natural History, Central Park West at Seventy-Ninth 
 Street, New York City. $3.00 a year. 
 
28 
 
 News Service Bulletin: 
 
 School Edition, Carnegie Institution of Washington. (Discontinued.') 
 
 Pan-Pacific: 
 
 Pan-Pacific Union, Honolulu, Hawaii. $3.00 a year; 500 a copy. 
 
 Parents Magazine: 
 
 52 Vanderbilt Avenue, New York City. $2.00 a year. 
 
 Phi Delta Kappan: 
 
 Phi Delta Kappa, 2034 Pidge Road, Homewood, Ill., $1.50 a year; 250 a copy. 
 
 Progressive Education: , 
 
 Progressive Education Association, 221 West Fifty-Seventh Street, New York 
 City. $3.00 a year. 
 
 Quarterly Journal of Inter-American Relations: 
 
 Changed to Inter-American Quarterly in January 1940. 1200 National Press 
 
 Building, Washington, D. C. $1.50 a year. 
 
 Recreation: 
 
 National Recreation Association, 315 Fourth Avenue, New York City. $2.00 
 a year. 
 
 Scholastic (weekly): 
 
 Scholastic Corporation, 430 Kinnard Avenue, Dayton, Ohio. $1.00 a year. 
 School Arts: 
 
 Davis Press, Inc., Worcester, Mass. $3.00 a year. 
 
 School Life: 
 
 United States Office of Education, Washington, D. C. $1.00 a year. 
 
 School Management: 
 
 52 Vanderbilt Avenue, New Y r ork City. $1.00 a year; 200 a copy. 
 
 Scientific Monthly: 
 
 American Association for the Advancement of Science, Smithsonian Institution 
 Building, Washington, D. C. $5.00 a year. 
 
 Social Education: 
 
 1201 Sixteenth Street NW., Washington, D. C. $2.00 a year; 300 a copy. 
 Story Parade: 
 
 70 Fifth Avenue, New York City. $2.00 a year. 
 
 Survey Graphic: 
 
 119 East Nineteenth Street, New York City. $3.00 a year. 
 
 Theatre Arts Monthly: 
 
 Theatre Arts, Inc., 40 East Forty-ninth Street, New York City. $3.50 a 
 year; 350 a copy. 
 
 Think: 
 
 International Business Machines Corporation, New Y r ork City (590 Madison 
 Avenue). No price indicated. 
 
 Travel: 
 
 Robert M. McBride & Co., 116 East Sixteenth Street, New York City. $4.00 
 a year; 350 a copy. 
 
 World Affairs (quarterly): 
 
 American Peace Society, 734 Jackson Place, Washington, D. C. $3.00 a 
 year. 
 
 World Youth (fortnightly except July and August): 
 
 World Youth, Inc., % Maude Meagher, Quito Road, Los Gatos, Calif. $2.00 
 a year. (Suspended publication June 8, 1940.) 
 
29 
 
 INTER-AMERICAN SCHOOL CORRESPONDENCE 
 
 It is as important to know people as to know books. The Pan American 
 Union and the United States Office of Education are vitally interested in the 
 promotion of inter-American school correspondence, but do not have lists of 
 names available for distribution; therefore they usually refer inquirers to the 
 following agencies: 
 
 International Friendship League, 41 Mount Vernon Street, Boston, Mass. 
 International Students Society. Director: Newton H. Crowell, Box 67, Van¬ 
 couver, Wash. 
 
 American Junior Red Cross. A special type of correspondence, especially suited 
 to elementary school needs, is handled through the National Headquarters of 
 the American Junior Red Cross. Portfolios containing composite letters, 
 drawings, pictures, are arranged like scrap books by members of a school group 
 and sent to a school in a country of their choice. Transportation and trans¬ 
 lations are arranged by the National Headquarters of the Alnerican Junior 
 Red Cross in conjunction with the International Red Cross. 
 
 National Bureau of Educational Correspondence. Director: Dr. A. J. Roehm, 
 George Peabody College for Teachers, Nashville, Tennessee. 
 
 Student Forum on International Relations. Secretary: Marinora Wilson, 
 406 Butter Street, San Francisco, Calif. Sponsors the formation of clubs and 
 correspondence exchanges. 
 
 Student Letter Exchange. Director: R. C. Mishek, Waseca High School, 
 Waseca, Minn. Supplies names of correspondents to elementary, high school, 
 and college students. 
 
 School Life, U. S. Office of Education, July 1941, lists sources of information 
 in an article entitled “Pen-and-ink Friendships for the Americas’’ by Helen 
 K. Mackintosh. 
 
 The Caravan, 132 East Sixty-fifth Street, New York City. Supplies names of 
 correspondents to its membership, which is open to children and adults. 
 
 The Christian Science Monitor Mail Bag. Miss Ethel C. luce, Editor, Junior 
 Department, The Christian Science Monitor, Boston, Mass. Will supply names 
 of correspondents to subscribers’ children. 
 
 The Odyssey Press, Inc., 386 Fourth Avenue, New York City, will supply names of 
 correspondents to subscribers to El Eco. A long, self-addressed envelope and 
 6 cents in stamps should accompany the request. 
 
 Agencies in Latin America 
 
 Instituto Cultural Argentino Norteamericano, Maipu 686, Buenos Aires, Argen¬ 
 tina. Has a special department for the exchange of letters between its students 
 of English and young people in the United States. 
 
 Casa do Estudante do Brasil, Largo da Carioca 11, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. Has 
 an active department for the exchange of student correspondence, under the 
 auspices of the Departments of Education and of Foreign Affairs. Address 
 requests to: Bureau Brasileiro de Correspondence Escolar Internacional. 
 Seccion Argentina de Correspondence Escolar Internacional, Avenida de Mayo 
 1396, Buenos Aires, Argentina. This office is under the auspices of the Argen¬ 
 tine National Committee of Intellectual Cooperation. 
 
 Escuela “Republica Argentina,” Ave. Republica Argentina No. 78, Mexico, D. F., 
 desires to secure for its school children letters from pupils who can write in 
 Spanish. Address letters to: Senora Directora. 
 
 Instituto “Rita Lecumberry,” Guayaquil, Ecuador. Address requests to the 
 Directora: Senorita Emma Ortiz. 
 
 UNITS FOR TEACHERS* 
 
 Brooklyn Museum. Handbook of Brooklyn Museum School Service. Dr. 
 Herbert J. Spinden, Ed. Brooklyn, 74 p. 
 
 Pamphlet on Brooklyn Museum’s School Service. Includes four units on 
 Latin American Life; describes illustrative material available for loan. The 
 
 *See also: The Other Americas, by Jessie A. Lane, U. S. Office of Education, Washington, D. C. 
 
30 
 
 Amazon Unit (p. 33-37) is accompanied by maps, pictures of jungle animals 
 and insects, plants such as manioc and rubber trees, grating of manioc; pictures 
 of people such as a medicine man treating a sick child. For younger children. 
 The Maya Unit (p. 63-67) for older children, includes pictures of people, 
 ornaments, flowers, buildings, pottery and stone sculpture. The Andean Unit 
 (p. 68-71) includes maps and pictures of domestic plants in Peruvian art, 
 wool-bearing animals of the Andes, Peruvian weaving, mummy bundles. The 
 Mexican Unit {p. 72-74) lists historical pictures, pictures of costumes, markets, 
 buildings, etc. 
 
 Burbanck, Marguerite. Learning about Latin America (,Social Ed., January 
 1941, p. 18-20). 
 
 The author presents a method of procedure used in a senior high school, but 
 teachers at all levels will be interested in the experience of a teacher who 
 organized material available in most communities. Elementary and junior 
 high school teachers will find much adaptable to their problems. 
 
 Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. Our Neighbors: North and South. 
 405 West One-hundred-seventeenth Street, New York. 13 p., mimeo., 50. 
 
 Contains information, references to written material, sources for films, radio, 
 music, dances, art, to aid in planning program. 
 
 Carnegie Institution of Washington. The Maya of Middle America (News Serv. 
 Bull., School Ed., vol. 2, Nos. 17-22, pp. 117-151, illus.). 
 
 The Carnegie Institution of Washington has in the past issued from time 
 to time illustrated accounts of its investigations suitable for school use. The 
 reference cited contains a study of the Maya, in five parts. Excellent maps, 
 color sheets, photographs. Lesson planning material for intermediate grades 
 and junior high school. The service has been suspended at the present time 
 but four volumes have been deposited in the main State and institutional 
 libraries of the country. Bound copies may be obtained from the Institution 
 at $2.50 each. Complete tables of contents for each volume sent on request. 
 
 Fueler, Alice Cook. The Andes Countries (Grade Teacher, November 1938, 
 p. 42-43, 71, illus.). 
 
 Teaching material organized for the middle grades. Factual material 
 mentions important astronomical observatory at Bogota, Colombia, and the 
 Harvard University Observatory at Arequipa, Chile, on the slope of Mt. Misti, 
 an outdoor schoolroom in Bolivia, ancient Inca masonry, a cholo (part-Indian) 
 boy, etc. Objectives stated: “To show the human response to the geographical 
 conditions in the Andes countries as exemplified in the lives of their people 
 and to discover which of their interests are similar to our own.” 
 
 Industrial Arts Cooperative Service, Inc., 519 One-hundred and twenty-first 
 Street, New York City. 
 
 Illustrated pamphlets in mimeographed form varying in size from a few 
 to sixty pages. Contain informational material, direction sheets and annotated 
 bibliographies. Latin American units available are the following: “Aztecs” 
 (400), “Indians of Peru” (40c), “Peruvian Textiles and Design” (600), “The 
 Story of Rubber” (400). Directions for making Tee-Dee Loom (made from 
 tongue depressors) on which belts, head bands or any narrow fabric may be 
 woven are included in the direction sheets. Materials suggested for use in' the 
 pamphlet studies may be purchased from the cooperative. They are listed, 
 with prices, in the handbook catalogue. 
 
 Julian, Katherine L. Mexico (. Instructor , April 1938, 7 p., illus.). 
 
 The material is organized for primary, for middle and for upper grades. 
 There are bibliographies and exercises for each of the three levels. Reprinted 
 
 1939 as No. 18 of The Instructor Series of Illustrated Units, by the F. A. 
 Owen Publishing Company, Danville, N. Y. A separate portfolio of pictures 
 supplements the text. Price 300, 250 each for four or more. 
 
 -South America ( Instructor , April 1936, 7 p., illus.). 
 
 Organized for primary, middle and upper grades with bibliography and 
 study lessons for each level. General objectives and abilities to be developed 
 are stated, activities are suggested and informational material is given. The 
 pictures include animals, products, and glimpses of typical rural and urban 
 environments. Reprinted 1940 as No. 22 of The Instructor Series of Illustrated 
 Units, by the F. A. Owen Publishing Company, Danville, N. Y. Separate 
 portfolio of pictures. Price of the unit, 300; 250 each for four or more. 
 
31 
 
 McSpadden, Anne. People Who Live in Thin Air. Richard M. Perdew, Ed. 
 Office of the Coordinator of Inter-American Affairs, Dept, of Commerce Bldg., 
 Washington, D. C. 39 p., mimeo. 
 
 Unit study of life in the Andes mountains prepared for children in the upper 
 elementary school. Organized for teachers, with suggestions for activities, 
 possible outcomes from study, materials available for teachers, selected bibliog¬ 
 raphy. 
 
 Oberhauser, Ann. Our Good Neighbors (Jr. Arts and Activ ., January 1941, 
 p. 6-14, illus.). 
 
 Organized for elementary grades. The author presents fundamental aims 
 which she believes should be goals in studying South America. The approach, 
 development, correlating and culminating activities are outlined. In addition, 
 there is approximately a page and one-half of factual material to draw upon. 
 There is a full page portrait of Simon Bolivar with a short sketch of his life, and 
 a source map of South America with suggestions for its use. A page of in¬ 
 formation on South American weaving is given. This is accompanied by 
 patterns for several typical designs and illustrated instructions for weaving 
 them. 
 
 - The Central American Republics (Jr. Arts and Activ., June 1941, p. 19- 
 
 24, illus.). 
 
 This is an organized unit for the convenience of teachers in the upper elemen¬ 
 tary grades. It may be followed as presented, or modified and extended. 
 There is a suggested method of procedure, subject matter already organized, 
 additional information about the countries, and a map simple enough for 
 locational interpretations. There is an excellent picture of Miraflores Locks; 
 one of a palace in Antigua, Guatemala; and one of a Maya monument in 
 Honduras. Two pages of suggestions for arts and crafts and one page of pic¬ 
 tures featuring scenes in the banana industry. 
 
 - The Smaller South American Republics (Jr. Arts and Activ., May 1941, 
 
 p. 22-23, illus.). 
 
 Important historical and geographical facts interesting to intermediate and 
 upper grade children are given about each of the following countries: Venezuela, 
 Colombia, Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia, Paraguay, and Uruguay. A project in tin 
 craft utilizing Peruvian Indian designs is described and illustrated. A tin can, 
 hammer, nail, colors and a pair of sturdy shears are all the materials necessary 
 for the construction work. 
 
 - A Unit on Argentina (Jr. Arts and Activ., February 1941, p. 12-15, illus.). 
 
 A page of factual material includes a description of the pampas, of the 
 estancias or ranches, and of the dress of the gaucho, as well as some history and 
 general information. Activity suggestions include the making of a diorama. 
 Illustrations that may be used in the making of a diorama are given and there is 
 a sketch of one that is completed. Directions for making an Argentine cart 
 are given, and the various parts are illustrated; the material suggested is wood. 
 There is also a full page product map. Teaching unit for intermediate grades, 
 could be adapted for lower levels. 
 
 United States Office of Education. Hemisphere Solidarity. Education and 
 National Defense Series, Pamphlet No. 13. Federal Security Agency. Wash¬ 
 ington, D. C. 1941. 23 p., illus. 
 
 A teacher’s guide on inter-American relations prepared especially for senior 
 high school but valuable to all teachers as approach to problems of defense 
 pertinent to the community as a whole. Promoting travel, improving trans¬ 
 portation, managing immigration, raising standards of living, improving 
 technical leadership, health, sanitation, etc., discussed. 150, from Supt. of 
 Documents, Washington, D. C. 
 
 - Inter-American Friendship and Understanding. Pamphlets. 
 
 A loan packet of 10 pamphlets, 6 of which are listed as both elementary and 
 secondary material, 2 as elementary only. The latter are ‘‘Christ of the 
 Andes” (3 p.), a play by Eleanor Holston Brainard and “A Pan American 
 Friendship Party” by Dorothy Kathryn Egbert (5 p.), both issued by the Pan 
 American Union. Packet useful for teachers with different age groups in one 
 room. New material in preparation. Teacher should write directly to United 
 States Office of Education, Federal Security Agency, Washington, D. C. 
 
32 
 
 Wilshire, Ellen McClellan, and Hugh B. Wood. Brazil: The Land of 
 Opportunity. Curriculum Bulletin. Eugene, Oregon. Distributed by Uni¬ 
 versity of Oregon Cooperative Store. 1940. 38 p., mimeo. 50^:. 
 
 General information on Brazil and suggestions for using it. Emphasizes the 
 need for understanding the culture of other peoples through intensive studies 
 of special groups. The approach to the unit is through a play “The Emperor’s 
 Treasure Chest.” The emperor was Dom Pedro. Although no attempt is 
 made to assign various activities to specific grade levels, the play is better 
 suited to younger children and the unit material to high school age. The 
 source material cited in this unit is useful also in the study of other Latin 
 American countries. This is the third in a series of units prepared for Junior 
 Programs, Inc. (New York City), a nonprofit agency sponsoring professional 
 . plays for young people, and edited by Professor Wood. 
 
 Wyler, Rose. Studying Latin America in the Primary Grades: Unit Sugges¬ 
 tions and Source Materials. Richard M. Perdew, Ed. Office of the Coordina¬ 
 tor of Inter-American Affairs, Dept, of Commerce Bldg., Washington, D. C. 
 26 p., mimeo. No charge. 
 
 The pamphlet is divided into three parts as follows: I. Our Hemisphere— 
 An Orientation Unit, II. Jungle People of the Amazon, III. Planning Other 
 Activities. 
 
 New Jersey State Teachers College. Pan-Americana: Visual and Teaching Aids 
 in Spain, Spain in the United States and Latin America. Compiled by Dr. 
 Lile Hermers, Montclair, N. J. 50^. 
 
 This pamphlet lists charts, exhibits, films, pictures, slides, and publications 
 available from various sources and useful in teaching. Essentially for use in 
 Senior High and Junior College. The list of materials arranged by countries 
 will offer suggestions for teachers at intermediate grade level. 
 
 Progressive Education. New Fellowship Conference Issue, October 1941, illus* 
 
 Section II of this issue is devoted to source material: books, pamphlets, 
 recordings useful in teaching Latin America are listed. Preceded by a section 
 on the Eighth International Conference of the New Education Fellowship, 
 with articles by Agustin Nieto Caballero, Rector of the National University 
 of Colombia, Carlos Ddvila, former Chilean Ambassador to the United States, 
 and Luis Sanchez Ponton, Minister of Education in Mexico at the time of the 
 conference. 
 
 KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Agric. in the Americas_1_ 
 
 Bull. Pan Amer. Union_ 
 
 Chr. Sci. Mon_ 
 
 Geog. Rev__, _ 
 
 Hispanic Amer. Hist. Rev_ 
 
 Jour. Amer. Assn. Univ. Women_ 
 
 Jour. Geog_ 
 
 Jour. Natl. Ed. Assn_ 
 
 Jr. Arts and Activ_ 
 
 Jr. Red Cross Jour___ 
 
 Jr. Schol_ 
 
 Natl. Geog_ 
 
 Nat. Hist_1_ 
 
 News Service Bull_ 
 
 Quart. Jour. Inter-Amer. Relations. 
 
 Agriculture in the Americas. 
 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. 
 
 Christian Science Monitor. 
 
 Geographical Review. 
 
 Hispanic American Historical Review. 
 
 Journal of the American Association of 
 University Women. 
 
 Journal of Geography. 
 
 Journal of the National Education Associa¬ 
 tion. 
 
 Junior Arts and Activities. 
 
 Junior Red Cross Journal. 
 
 Junior Scholastic. 
 
 National Geographic Magazine. 
 
 Natural History. 
 
 News Service Bulletin, Carnegie Institution 
 of Washington. 
 
 Quarterly Journal of Inter-American Rela¬ 
 tions. 
 

 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 34 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
{ Children oj the Other Americas } 
 
 HOMES, SCHOOLS, AND 
 COMMUNITY LIFE 
 
 ( 35 ) 
 
Table of Contents 
 
 Page 
 
 I. Introduction __ 39 
 
 II. References for the Primary Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 39 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 41 
 
 III. References for the Intermediate Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 41 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 44 
 
 IV. References for the Junior High School: 
 
 1. Books_ 46 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 47 
 
 V. References for the Teacher: 
 
 1. Books_ 49 
 
 2. Periodicals_ 51 
 
 Key to Abbreviations_ 55 
 
 (37) 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HOMES, SCHOOLS, AND COMMUNITY LIFE 
 
 I. INTRODUCTION 
 
 In a world made small by the airplane and radio, our American 
 neighbors are drawn nearer to us in time. But if we are to be friends 
 as well as neighbors, we must become better acquainted with the 
 people, learn more about their home life, their schools, and the char¬ 
 acter of the community in which they live. 
 
 A section of this guide is therefore devoted to various types of 
 communities in which the people of Latin America live. These com¬ 
 munities are situated in small sections of larger geographical areas, 
 varying from the high mountain ranges to damp, warm lowlands; 
 from fertile plantations to wind-swept plains. The homes and the 
 life of the people are determined by their surroundings, and their 
 work as well as their play is influenced by the environment; therefore 
 many references on the geography of Latin America have been 
 included in this section to give the proper background. Other refer¬ 
 ences deal almost entirely with family life, which is very beautiful 
 and closely knit among Latin American peoples, and with the activi¬ 
 ties of the community at large. The majority of the references deal 
 with rural communities. The self-contained pattern of village life 
 shows the child how man obtains his food and clothing, and how the 
 exchange of his surplus products with his neighbors becomes an occa¬ 
 sion for pleasurable meetings. Obviously, these references include 
 material on phases of home and community life—games, handicrafts, 
 music, products, etc.—to which separate sections of this guide are 
 devoted. This explains why many of the books listed in this section 
 appear also in others. 
 
 Several references take Latin American children out of their natural 
 setting and place them in the United States. These stories show that 
 the children of the United States do not have to wait until they grow 
 up to contribute toward inter-American friendship, for in many areas 
 of the United States people are living who were born in countries to 
 the south. Some of these people will return home and tell of their 
 experiences in "the United States. In the southwest, which was 
 settled by people of Spanish blood, and in many industrial centers of 
 this country where there are numbers of Mexicans, certain traditions 
 have been carefully preserved, and children may see at first hand 
 some of the customs dear to the children of Latin America. 
 
 II. REFERENCES FOR THE PRIMARY GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Armer, Laura Adams. The Forest Pool. New York. Longmans, Green & Co. 
 1938. 40 p., illus. 
 
 A simple story of two little Mexican boys, an iguana and a parrot. There is 
 a brief mention of Moctezuma and his cloak of hummingbird feathers, as well 
 as life in the ancient city of the hummingbirds. Also a legend of the iguanas. 
 Beautifully illustrated in colors. Picture book format. 
 
 ( 39 ) 
 
 490718 0 - 42 -4 
 
40 
 
 Bannon, Laura. Manuela’s Birthday in Old Mexico. Chicago. Albert Whit¬ 
 man & Co. 46 p., illus. 
 
 Good story of a birthday party in Mexico, well told in simple language and 
 illustrated with attractive colored pictures. These illustrations include differ¬ 
 ent Mexican dolls which children could make. Manuela’s American friends 
 make such a doll for her birthday and the way they make it is described in 
 sufficient detail for the children to make one themselves. Excellent for doll 
 projects in schools. 
 
 Barris, Anna Andrews. Red Tassels for Huki in Peru. Chicago. Albert 
 Whitman & Co. 62 p., illus. 
 
 Good information on the habits of llamas and customs of the people. What 
 happens to Huki when he runs away and a lion tries to capture him. The 
 descriptions of the interior of the home and the good pictures of the clothing of 
 the Indians would be useful in handicraft and art classes. Also useful would 
 be the detailed description of a dance which children could read and follow. 
 
 Bemelmans, Ludwig. Quito Express. New York. Viking Press. 1939. 
 47- p., illus. 
 
 The humorous adventures of a little boy of Ecuador who wanders away from 
 his home, takes a train ride, an excursion on a bo&t and makes friends with the 
 conductor. Charming illustrations. 
 
 Bennett, Virginia. Maria Mello and Her Monkey. New York. Grosset & 
 Dunlap, Inc. Illus. 
 
 Charming story of a little Brazilian girl and her monkey. She lives in a 
 house on stilts and her father gathers rubber. Good handling of environment, 
 description of way of life. 
 
 Bontemps, Arna, and Langston Hughes. Popo and Fifina, New York. The 
 Macmillan Co. 1932. 100 p., illus. 
 
 The everyday life of two children of Haiti. The incident of the little boy 
 making a carved tray might be used in connection with handicraft. 
 
 Desmond, Alice Curtis. The Lucky Llama. New York. The Macmillan Co. 
 1939. 63 p., illus. 
 
 A simple, informative story giving many of the customs of the country and 
 a good picture of village life, through Kalu’s experiences in the home of the 
 Indians who rescues him from a fierce condor. Excellent description of markets. 
 Includes legend of why a white llama never works. Picture of swinging bridge. 
 Colorful word pictures useful in motivating art work. 
 
 Burfee, Helen and John McMorris. Mateo and Lolita. Boston. Houghton 
 Mifflin Co. 1939. 62 p., illus. 
 
 Much good information on life in Mexico, including markets, spinning, 
 pottery and a visit to Xochimilco. Simply told, illustrated by excellent 
 photographs. Useful as a supplementary reading book. 
 
 Eliot, Frances. Pablo’s Pipe. New York. E. P. Dutton & Co. 1936. 
 48 p., illus. 
 
 The adventures of a little Mexican boy who plays a pipe so well that he is 
 invited to join a group of traveling musicians. He buys presents for his family 
 with the money he earns, including a big hat for himself. Bright illustrations. 
 
 Gill, Richard C. Kalu the Llama. New York. Henry Holt & Co. 1939. 
 35 p., illus. 
 
 An amusing story of a pet llama in Ecuador who thought it would be more 
 fun to be a horse, and his adventures when he wanders away from the herd. 
 Excellent illustrations. 
 
 Gill, Richard C., and Helen Hoke. Paco Goes to the Fair. New York. 
 Henry Holt & Co. 1940. 39 p., illus. 
 
 Story of a family of weavers in Ecuador. Paco gets into trouble when he 
 uses the wrong dye, but when he finds more which turns out to be a lovely 
 shade of red he sells the yarn and gets an unexpected trip to the fair. Many 
 of the pictures would be of interest in connection with work on spinning and 
 weaving, and the excellent views of house interiors could serve as basis for 
 projects in handicraft and art. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Letters from Guatemala. New World Neighbors Series. 
 Boston. D. C. Heath Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Letters which a young American boy visiting in Guatemala writes back to 
 his friend. They tell of his visits on banana and coffee plantations and in an 
 
41 
 
 Indian village. He tells, too, of his life in a Guatemalan school and the Christ¬ 
 mas and Independence Day celebrations. Illustrated in color. 
 
 Jackson, Charlotte E. Tito the Pig of Guatamala. New York. Dodd, 
 Mead & Co. 1940. 73 p., illus. 
 
 A Guatemalan boy takes his pet pig to market. The trouble begins when the 
 pig eats the father’s identification card and he is thrown into jail. Much 
 excitement follows, but through the pig’s antics the father is finally freed. 
 A humorous story with much of interest on the customs of the county. Bright, 
 colorful illustrations. 
 
 Lanks, Herbert C. Nancy Goes to Mexico. Philadelphia. David McKay 
 Co. 1939. 39 p., illus. 
 
 A simple story of Mexico told in the language of a child. Tells of Nancy’s 
 Mexican friends and how they lived, and includes brief chapters on burros, 
 schools, markets, the maguey plant and its many uses, and on birds and animals. 
 Gives the legend of the Virgin of Guadalupe, who has the likeness of an Indian 
 maiden and is the patron saint of Mexico. In addition to excellent photographs, 
 there are charming pen and ink sketches on margins. Useful as a supplementary 
 reader. 
 
 Simon, Charlie. Popo’s Miracle. New York. E. P. Dutton & Co. 1938 
 223 p., illus. 
 
 Everyday life of Mexican peasants, including description of many village 
 customs and the legends of the burro of Amecameca and of San Miguel, it is 
 the story of Rafael, who cares for his baby brother, and the pack of artist’s 
 materials the burro brought. Rafael’s journey to return the pack gives him the 
 opportunity to study art. Good incidental material on the preparations for the 
 harvest fiesta—the costume and dance—and on markets. A useful book for 
 general customs as well as for fiestas and art classes. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Baldwin, Louise E. Silver Pesos for Carlos (Jr. Red Cross News, October 1939, 
 p. 3-5, story, illus.). 
 
 For generations the men of Carlos’ family have been tinsmiths, but Carlos 
 loves to paint and draw. He solves his problems with the help of his little sister. 
 The devotion of Carlos and Anita to each other, their unselfishness and sense 
 of fair play, make a story of family life which children will enjoy. 
 
 Our South American Neighbors (Child Life, November 1940, p. 504-505, picture 
 pages). 
 
 Pictures of interest to children carefully captioned and used as the magazine’s 
 center spread. Ruins of Macchu Picchu, Iguazu Falls, the University of San 
 Marcos, “the w r orld’s highest bridge,” llamas, mules, ponies, children. 
 
 III. REFERENCES FOR THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Brown, Rose. Two Children of Brazil. New York. J. E. Lippincott Co. 
 1940. 229 p., illus. 
 
 Describes in detail a coffee plantation and the steps in growing coffee. Gives 
 much information on the everyday life of the people and includes accounts of 
 special occasions such as a carnival, with description of costumes, and a birthday 
 party, with specific directions about food and games which the children could 
 use for a party in their own class. Also contains information on markets, a 
 chapter on the Botanical Gaiden, the story of the royal palm, spice tree, and 
 tea bush. Includes material on insects and butterflies of particular interest to 
 children vdio like to collect them. Although it is overloaded with detail it 
 would be a useful book in nature study, art, and social studies. 
 
 Burbank, Addison. The Cedar Deer. Ncw t York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 
 1940. 156 p., illus. 
 
 Story of a little Indian boy who carves a deer from wood as a gift for the 
 President. Contains good historical material on the Mayas and the Conquest, 
 as w r ell as information on present-day life, some legends and a story told by the 
 knife vendor in the market. Good information on markets. Excellent chapter 
 
42 
 
 on the “Flying Tree Dance”—detailed description of preparations for the 
 fiesta, the costumes worn by the performers, and the dance itself, in which the 
 dancers, having attached themselves by a rope around the waist to the top of 
 the tall pole, dive into space; illustrated by two fine pictures. Much informa¬ 
 tion on Indian costumes. Good glossary of Spanish and Indian words. Some 
 illustrations are in color. 
 
 Cannon, Marian. Children of the Fiery Mountain. New York. E. P. 
 Dutton & Co.. 1940. 96 p., illus. 
 
 A well-told story of everyday life on a coffee plantation in Guatemala. De¬ 
 scription of a Christmas fiesta and directions for making a nacimiento (model 
 of the birth scene at Bethlehem). There is good action, and a volcanic eruption. 
 Useful book in handicraft, for making Christmas project. Good illustrations, 
 some in color. 
 
 Coats worth, Elizabeth. The Boy with the Parrot: A Story of Guatemala. 
 New York. The Macmillan Co. 1930. 101 p., illus. 
 
 A young boy from a village on Lake Atitlan starts out with a peddler’s pack 
 to go to the capital. His adventures on the way, his arrival at the City, his 
 meeting with the toy-maker in Antigua, where he tries his hand at making a 
 pottery whistle, are told with understanding of «the country. Some history is 
 introduced. 
 
 - Tonio and the Stranger. New York. Grosset & Dunlap, Inc. 1941. 
 
 69 p., illus. 
 
 The adventures of a shepherd boy and his little sister when they help a man 
 escape from robbers and the unexpected treasure he brings to the little sister 
 make a charming story told with understanding and sympathy. Mexican 
 setting. 
 
 Desmond, Alice; Alida Malkus; and Ednah Wood. Boys of the Andes. New 
 World Neighbors Series. Boston. D. C. Heath & Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Includes three stories: “A Farm Boy of the Andes”, “Eleven Thousand 
 Llamas” and “A Battle of Kites.” Each story has a short preface, describing 
 the country and the life of the boy mentioned in the story. One boy is a farm 
 boy, one a shepherd in the Peruvian Andes, and the third a boy of the Chilean 
 mining district. Illustrated in color. 
 
 Gill, Richard and Helen Hoke. The Story of the Other America. Boston. 
 Houghton, Mifflin Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Brief, simply written summary of South America’s history from Columbus 
 to the present. The appendix contains a one-page text of the outstanding 
 characteristics of each of the ten countries. Each page of the book is profusely 
 illustrated and the colored end-papers include a map of South America. Useful 
 for beginning study of the southern continent. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Panchita: A Little Girl of Guatemala. New' York. Harcourt, 
 Brace & Co. 1941. 180 p., illus. 
 
 In this simple story of Guatemala there is much information on food, dress, 
 homelife, farming, and fiestas in Guatemala in addition to detailed information 
 on pottery making. How little Panchita finally settles down to learning how 
 to make pottery after seeing a golden-haired doll in the city makes a charming 
 story of life in the little pink house that stood at the end of the crooked street 
 that wound out to the end of the village. The illustrations have character. 
 
 Lee, Melicent Humason. Pablo and Petra: A Boy and Girl of Mexico. 
 New York. Thomas Y. Crowell Co. 1934. 150 p., illus. 
 
 Good information on the daily life and customs of Mexico. The description 
 of making tortillas as well as the description of village huts could be used in an 
 Indian village unit. Excellent material on markets and the fiesta of the corn. 
 
 - Volcanoes in the Sun: A Boy and Girl of Guatemala. New York. 
 
 Thomas Y. Crowell Co. 1937. 150 p., illus. 
 
 Life on a coffee plantation in Guatemala, Indian clothing and some history 
 introduced. Good information on trees, plants, birds, and fruit of the country 
 is included. Good glossary of Spanish and Indian words. 
 
 Malkus, Alida Sims. The Silver Llama. Philadelphia. John C. Winston Co. 
 1939. 108 p., illus. 
 
 Well told story of Peru in general and of the habits and training of llamas 
 in particular. What happens when the “Silver Llama” has to make his way 
 in the w'orld. The legend of the white llama (w r hich traditionally doesn’t 
 
43 
 
 work) is included as well as a story of the Spanish invasion. The Silver Llama 
 brings good luck when he helps find the golden basin filled with jewels. Beauti¬ 
 fully illustrated in color, showing dress of Peruvian Indians. For general infor¬ 
 mation, history and art. 
 
 Purnell, Idella, and John Weatherwax. The Talking Bird: An Aztec 
 Story Book. New York. The Macmillan Co. 1930. 195 p., illus. 
 
 Fairy tales and legends of the Aztecs which Paco’s grandfather told him. 
 Each story is prefaced by an incident of modern life in Mexico. These include 
 descriptions of market days, a fiesta, a Christmas celebration, a picnic and 
 Independence Day. The description of the posadas in the Christmas play is 
 so detailed that children could carry out the customs in a Christmas play at 
 school. The striking black and white illustrations add much to the stories. 
 
 Richards, Irmagarde, and Elena Landazuri. Children of Mexico: Their Land 
 and Its Story. San Francisco. Harr Wagner Publishing Co. 1935. 323 p., 
 
 illus. 
 
 A general, simply written book on Mexico. The first 12 chapters give a 
 brief survey of life among the Aztecs before the conquest, the coming of the 
 Spaniards, episodes of colonial days, and a brief chapter each on the national 
 hero, a fiesta, school, Christmas and places of interest in and around Mexico 
 City. The book is illustrated by many photographs. The appendix contains 
 information on the products of Mexico and the index indicates the pronunciation 
 of Spanish and Indian words. 
 
 Rothery, Agnes. South American Roundabout. New York. Dodd, Mead 
 & Co. 1940. 242 p., illus. 
 
 Devoted largely to the countries of South America but includes a chapter on 
 Panama and brief material on Cuba and Haiti. There is interesting material 
 on the plants and animals of the countries included, and some history. Good 
 for social studies and geography. 
 
 Steen, Elizabeth K. Red Jungle Boy. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1937. 80 p., illus. 
 
 A well-written account of the everyday life of the Carajd, Indians in Brazil. 
 Their adventures on fishing and hunting expeditions and much information 
 about jungle life and the habits of the animals is told in an interesting way. 
 In addition there is material on the Indians’ food, their dress, games and a 
 dance. Striking illustrations in color add to the value of the book. 
 
 Stoker, Catharine Ulmer. Little Daughter of Mexico. Dallas. Dealy and 
 Lowe. 1937. 314 p., illus. , 
 
 Gives much good information on Mexican life, including such colorful 
 occasions as market day, Independence Day and a birthday, also Christmas 
 festivities, handicrafts. Gives the legend of the Virgin of Guadalupe, who has 
 the face of an Indian maiden and is the patron saint of Mexico. 
 
 Tarshis, Elizabeth Kent. The Village that Learned to Read. Boston. 
 Houghton, Mifflin Co. 1941. 158 p., illus. 
 
 The story of Pedro, a little Mexican boy who vowed he would not learn to 
 read when the new school was opened in his village. The opening of the school, 
 the fiesta and the devices the childaen use to get Pedro to take an interest in 
 school are interesting and amusing. What happens to keep him from going to 
 the City and leads him finally to learn to read makes a delightful, well written 
 story with many amusing incidents. The book is illustrated with over 60 pen 
 and ink sketches that have life and gayety. 
 
 Thomas, Margaret Loring. The Burro’s Money Bag. New York. Abing¬ 
 don Press. 1931. 123 p., illus. 
 
 Good story of every day life among the Mexican peasants. How a little boy 
 earned enough money by selling gardenias at the train to buy a burro and his 
 adventures in the city where he goes to visit his relatives, gets lost but finally 
 reaches home safely. The story ends happily with a fine fiesta. 
 
 - Paulo in the Chilean Desert. New York. Bobbs-Merrill Co. 1934. 
 
 190 p., illus. 
 
 Describes life in the Chilean desert near a copper smelter and relates how a 
 young boy learned to fend for himself. There is a football game, and a detailed 
 description of a chinchilla hunt. 
 
44 
 
 Waldeck, Jo Besse M. Exploring the Jungle. New World Neighbors Series 
 Boston. D. C. Heath & Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Good account of life in the jungle (Guianas) and of two Arawak children 
 who live there. Includes brief chapters on jungle vines, jungle trees and products- 
 obtained from them. Contains excellent glossary and good illustrations, 
 many of them in color. Good for material on Indians and in nature study. 
 
 -Little Jungle Village. New York. Viking Press. 1940. 176 p., illus. 
 
 How two little Arawak Indian children start a jungle village. Well-presented 
 information on plants, animals and trees of jungle. Good illustrations. 
 
 Weil, Ann. The Silver Fawn. Indianapolis. Bobbs-Merrill Co. 1939. 228- 
 
 p,. illus. 
 
 Story of a little Mexican boy and his friendship for the American who opens 
 a silver shop. Includes good detailed information on Mexican life and 
 customs which could be used as basis for Mexican units. Good for handicrafts, 
 art and customs. 
 
 Winslow, Anna C. Our Little Chilean Cousin. Boston. L. C. Page & Co. 
 1928. 1940 p., illus. 
 
 Describes hacienda (ranch) life in Chile-—customs, dances, games and a 
 Christmas celebration. There are trips to the lake region, the copper and 
 nitrate fields, Robinson Crusoe Island and the Christ of the Andes statue com¬ 
 memorating the peaceful settlement of a boundary dispute with Argentina. 
 There is also material on the Araucanian Indians, Independence Day and Chile’s 
 national hero. Useful book for general information on Chile and for specific 
 information on holidays. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Coatsworth, Elizabeth. Black Lava ( Story Parade , Oct.-Dec. 1940, story> 
 illus.). 
 
 Adventures of a little Mexican boy who herded sheep on the lonely pedregal , 
 where the black lava flowed over the earth many centuries ago. Illustrations 
 by Wilfred Bronson accompany the skillful word-pictures of the boy and his 
 family, the toys he makes of twigs for his little sister, their food, clothing, 
 chickens, goats, the neighboring pyramid. The story emphasizes the devotion 
 of the family group and the heroism of the boy. 
 
 Coblentz, Catherine Cate. The Violet Tree (Jr. Red Cross News, November 
 1937, p. 3-6, story, illus.). 
 
 Luis, a little boy of Spanish and Indian ancestry who lives in a thatched 
 bohio on stilts and plays with his white hen, discovers a wonderful tree in 
 purple bloom hidden in a ravine. He decides to keep it for his very own to 
 gaze upon until the blossoms are all gone, and is stubbornly silent when he 
 hunts orchids for the sehorita to paint. Why he finally shares his treasure 
 with the lonely artist makes a moving story. Intimate picture of family life, 
 birdcalls. The author reports the “violet tree” had not been classified bo- 
 tanically at the time the story was published. For art and language arts. 
 Activity suggestion: making a cup for a pet from a coconut shell, dramatizing 
 and painting scenes. 
 
 Cowboys of South America (My Weekly Reader, April 7-11, 1941, illus.). 
 
 Two pictures of cowboys that children will like, one from the Aigentine 
 and one with three cowboys from Uruguay. Children in 3d and 4th grades 
 can read the text and find it interesting. Can be kept in a class scrapbook on 
 South America. Children may want to dramatize a cowboy scene after reading 
 the material. Sufficient action in the material to suggest a home-made movie 
 for 3d and 4th grades, scenes showing grass taller than a man; fences and 
 windmills being repaired; cowboys in their everyday clothes; soft black hat, 
 baggy trousers, short boots and a plain leather saddle covered with sheep¬ 
 skin, and in their dress-up clothes: silver-trimmed belt, white shirt and a coat, 
 dress saddle trimmed with silver and horse’s bridle studded with silver decora¬ 
 tions; scenes around camp fires; special kind of tea from a special kind of 
 cup. 
 
45 
 
 If You Lived in Peru (Jr. Nat. Hist., Apr. 1939, photographs, p. 8-9). 
 
 Five excellent photographs with explanation of each: a street scene in the 
 town of Puno with llamas, little girl with a lamb that had strayed from the 
 flock, a woman weaving, children selling pineapple slices, view of Lake Titi¬ 
 caca. Interest and vocabulary for children nine to eleven. 
 
 If You Lived in Santo Domingo (Jr. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1939, photographs, p. 8-9). 
 
 Five photographs by Rollo H. Beck with 50-100 words of explanatory 
 information about each picture. Show a worker in a tobacco field, a boy shov¬ 
 eling cocoa beans, an excellent picture of a house, boats and produce at the 
 river bank early in the morning, women on their way to work with bundles of 
 laundry on their heads. 
 
 Johnson, Siddie Joe. Debby and Francesca (Jr. Red Cross News, February 
 1941, p. 164-167, story, illus., reprinted from book Debby, Longmans,Green 
 & Co.). 
 
 Two little girls, an American and a Mexican, could not understand each 
 other’s language but became friends in spite of this. Francesca had come 
 from Mexico with her mother and her baby brother to be with her father 
 who worked on a farm. Debby lived in a trailer nearby. The friendship of 
 the children proved that the language problem need not be a barrier to under¬ 
 standing and appreciation. 
 
 Lambert, Clara. Theresa Follows the Crops. (Jr. Red Cross A T ews, April 1937, 
 p. 234-237, illus.). 
 
 Story of a little Mexican girl traveling with her parents who harvest crops 
 from California to Washington. Theresa’s is a type of environment that is 
 not generally known to children in industrial areas. She meets with unfriend¬ 
 liness at school until teachers and children learn to understand her problems 
 and to appreciate her art. Suggests that children too can contribute towards 
 inter-American friendship by being helpful to Latin American children who 
 come to the United States. 
 
 LaVarre, William. Golden Skeletons of Darien (Jr. Schol., September 16, 
 1940, p. 8-12, illus., reprinted from book Southward Ho, Doubleday, Doran 
 and Co.). 
 
 This episode, a reading unit in itself, excites curiosity to know more about 
 the Darien jungles, where the Rio Sambu descends from the mountains that 
 form the boundary between Colombia and Panama. The Chakoi Indians are 
 hostile to w r hite explorers. They remember Spanish raiders of earlier times 
 w r ho looked for gold, and are not amused by the practical jokes of passing 
 airmen. 
 
 Ledig, Elizabeth Lineback. Barbecue in the Andes (Jr. Red Cross News, 
 February 1940, p. 11-13, story, illus'.). 
 
 In this charmingly told story, two Indian children of Peru accompany their 
 pretty godmother to a house party at a sheep ranch in the Andes and watch 
 the annual separating of the flocks. Contrast of life at the ranch and in the 
 village, lower in the mountains, where the children live. Description of 
 method by which the sheep are brought to the stone-fenced corral to be graded, 
 cleansed of ticks, counted and separated according to age and sex. The 
 yachamanca or barbecue is the main feature of the celebration which follows. 
 
 - Carnival Day in the Andes (Jr. Red Cross News, April 1938, p. 3-6, 
 
 illus.). 
 
 A second story of Antonia and her brother, the Indian village children who 
 figure in “Barbecue.” The family journeys to the capital city bringing simple 
 gifts for the children’s Spanish godmother who is Beauty Queen of the carnival. 
 Charming glimpses of fishing, vspinning, social customs, and manners. Complete 
 description of the festival. 
 
 Lee, Melicent Humason. A Mexican Market (School Arts, November 1940, 
 p. 101-102, 10a). 
 
 Short and vivid description of a Mexican market organized in such a colorful 
 way that children can read and enjoy it. The costumes worn by men and 
 women, the produce and handiwork brought to the market, and the manner 
 in which buyers and sellers conduct themselves, described in careful detail. 
 The dialogue of the accompanying sketch called “Mexican Market Day—A 
 Playlet,” approximately eight words for each of the six vendors, may be used 
 as given or to suggest creative composition. The directions for costuming. 
 
46 
 
 are clearly expressed and the pupils could easily obtain the materials suggested 
 from their homes. 
 
 Mexican Pictures {Children 1 s Play Mate, June 1941, illus.). 
 
 A picture story of village life and customs in present-day Mexico. Shows an 
 adobe house, corn-husk dolls, cactus plants, a shepherd with his goats, a burro 
 with his load, a woman making tortillas, children in fiesta costumes, pieces of 
 pottery. Food, clothing, and activities are described. The Mexican flag 
 illustrated does not bear the coat-of-arms. Factual material. Ideas for artis¬ 
 tic reproduction. 
 
 News of the Desert Queen {Jr. Red Cross News, October 1940, p. 46-47). 
 
 Children from the Desert Queen School in California describe a trip across 
 the border into Mexico in a correspondence album for children in New Zealand. 
 They visited a Mexican school. There is an amusing picture of a mother burro 
 and her baby with the caption “Desert Canaries/’ so-called because of the way 
 they bray. 
 
 Our South American Neighbors {Child Life, November 1940, p. 504-505, picture 
 pages). 
 
 See Primary list. Pictures may be used to supplement activities. 
 
 Out of Jungles Come Farms in Brazil {My Weekly Reader, April 7-11, 1941. illus.). 
 
 Interesting information on the work of engineers in transforming swamp and 
 jungle into small farms where the people raise vegetables, fruits and sugar cane. 
 Two pictures and two shaded outline maps give information on areas and 
 products. 
 
 Purnell, Idella. Faco’s Pay-day {Jr. Red Cross News, May 1938, p. 17-19, 
 story, illus.). 
 
 An unusually interesting picture of home life on a ranch in Mexico. Glimpses 
 of less usual foods with which the family ekes out its diet: St. John’s roses 
 cooked with rice, leaves of quelite, boiled like spinach, sweet smelling limoncillo 
 tea. Paco’s opportunity to prove his bravery and devotion to his family comes 
 while he is driving burros to the city. Supplementary reading for social studies. 
 
 -The Values {Jr. Red Cross News, October 1937, p. 5, story, illus.). 
 
 Nico is in charge of the Columbus Day program at the Instituto Col6n in 
 Guadalajara, and his mother and father come all the way from Ayutla in the 
 hot untidy bus to see the play that Nico has written. Nico’s father is a miner, 
 and the boy is embarrassed when he sees his parent’s peasant clothes in the audi¬ 
 ence. However, his home training helps him to discover “the values” and he 
 is happy at the end of the day. The three scenes of Nico’s play are given. 
 Children of fourth and fifth grade level may be interested in writing and pro¬ 
 ducing a play based on similar historical material. 
 
 Thomas, Margaret Loring. Up in Peru {Jr. Red Cross News, October 1936, 
 p. 42-43, illus.) 
 
 A journey by train from the boat at Mollendo across the Atacama Desert 
 to the oasis city of Arequipa. General description of the city and its life, 
 especially the market. The Indians come down from the mountains, up from 
 the warm valleys laden with vegetables, fruit, flowers, furs, shawls, anything 
 they make or grow. Sunday afternoon is the time for family reunions and 
 festivities, the plaza is the center. Colorful, detailed description of the patio 
 at the pension with its roses and palm tree and turkey-coop on the roof. Geog¬ 
 raphy, social studies, language arts. 
 
 Von Hagen, Christine. Francisco’s Lucky Day {Jr. Red Cross News, March- 
 April, 1941, story, illus.) 
 
 The story of a working day in a little boy’s life on a cacao hacienda at Tenquel 
 in Ecuador and x of the adventures he had the next day on his first trip to the city 
 of Guayaquil. Social studies material. 
 
 IV. REFERENCES FOR THE JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Gill, Richard C. Manga. New York. Frederick A. Stokes Co. 1937. 
 
 268 p. 
 
 Well written, swift moving story of adventure in the jungles of Ecuador. 
 Describes customs of the Indians, a young American’s association with them 
 
 I 
 
47 
 
 and the friendship which develops. Good information on birds and animals. 
 
 - The Volcano of Gold. New York. Frederick A. Stokes Co. 1938. 
 
 256 p., illus. 
 
 The young American returns to Ecuador and the characters from the author’s 
 previous book Manga continue their adventures. These include a journey into 
 hostile Indian country, their capture by the enemy, their escape and finally, 
 their finding of the treasure. The background of Indians and jungle is authen¬ 
 tic and well handled. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Neighbors to the South. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1941. 293 p. 
 
 Describes twelve countries of Central and South America and in addition 
 has a chapter each on products, transportation, education, cultural relations, 
 Pan Americanism and the Latin American heroes. Illustrated with 92 excellent 
 photographs. Useful for general reference and supplementary reading. 
 
 Holton, Priscilla. Chuck Martinez. New York. Longmans, Green & Co. 
 1940. 312 p., illus. 
 
 Information on the everyday life of a group of Mexican schoolboys, including 
 their athletics, a country fiesta, etc. How Chuck Martinez rescued his father, 
 who was kidnapped by bandits. The dance described in Chapter 8 might be 
 used in a school fiesta. 
 
 Lay, Marion. Wooden Saddles. New York. Wm. Morrow & Co. 1939. 
 174 p., illus. 
 
 The exciting adventures of a Mexican boy who is captured by gypsies and 
 escapes, taking his pet fawn with him; later he wins a roping contest, runs into 
 a revolution, is taken prisoner, but escapes and lives for a time in a small 
 village. A great deal of information about the country is introduced incident¬ 
 ally. Description of charro suit in Chapter 9 would be useful for making a 
 costume. Well illustrated. 
 
 Peck. Anne Merriman. Young Mexico. New York. Robert McBride & Co. 
 1934. 270 p. 
 
 Good, detailed survey of Mexican life in city and village, among upper class 
 and peasants, in tropical lowlands and cold highlands. Markets, fiestas, school, 
 work, and history (in brief), all covered in an interesting way. Useful for 
 supplementary reading and for special Mexican unit on fiestas. Good illu¬ 
 strations. 
 
 -— Roundabout South America. New York. Harper Bros. 1940. 359 p. 
 
 Good information on South America told in an interesting way. History, 
 culture, industries, and education all touched on briefly but with real under¬ 
 standing of countries and people. Good for reference and for supplementary 
 reading. 
 
 Wiese, Kurt. The Parrot Dealer. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 1932. 
 239 p., illus 
 
 Life in Brazil. Good, detailed description of markets, a shark-fishing ex¬ 
 pedition, a jaguar hunt, trip with a mule train, capturing an anteater, wild 
 pigs; and a toucan. Interesting material on a carnival and a revolution. 
 Gives great deal of information about the country, presented in an interesting 
 way with good action. Useful in nature study, handicrafts. Children could 
 construct market or stage a carnival. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Craige, J. H. Haitian Vignettes {Natl. Geog ., October 1934, p. 435-485, illus.). 
 
 The author, a captain in the U. S. Marine Corps, writes from personal ex¬ 
 perience of the life and social customs of Haiti, and relates some history. His 
 account of the life of Henri Christophe and description of the famous Citadel 
 are accompanied by 13 natural color photographs, and 40 in black and white. 
 They include the Cathedral in Port-au-Prince, trading craft, gunboats, urban 
 and rural homes, primitive sugar mill, agave fiber hung out to dry, bamboo 
 musical horns, and various occupations. 
 
 D’Emery, Charles, Rio de Janeiro: Glamour under the Southern Cross {Bull. 
 Pan Amer. Union, February 1939, p. 61-67, illus.). 
 
 A short descriptive article about Rio de Janeiro and its natural setting. Good 
 factual material, excellent photographs of Rio from Sugar Loaf, Rio under a 
 
48 
 
 full moon, the shore drive, the Monroe Palace, the botanical gardens in Rio. 
 Two photographs of the 100 ft. statue of Christ the Redeemer on Corcovado 
 show its location in relation to surrounding country. 
 
 Duncan, David D. Fighting Giants of the Humboldt (Natl. Geog., March 1941, 
 p. 373-400, illus.). 
 
 Primarily natural science material, this article is listed because fishing and 
 guano are economic factors, and glimpses are given of these industries. “Burro 
 redcaps” carry home the fishermen’s catch while their masters continue to fish, 
 and the “sanitation corps” is made up of vultures. In connection with the 
 guano industry, there are pictures of cormorants, which fly in “clouds.” Good 
 illustrations, map. 
 
 Ledig, Elizabeth Lineback, Heigh-ho, Come to the Fair (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, May 1933, p. 385-390, illus.). 
 
 A vivid description of the Sunday fairs at Huancayo, Peru, the scene of one 
 of the oldest and most colorful markets on the southern continent. Illustra¬ 
 tions show silverware and pottery. Peruvian handwoven rugs and blankets, 
 figures of wood and plaster. 
 
 Marden, Luis. Caracas, Cradle of the Liberator (Natl. Geog.. April 1940, p. 
 477-513, illus.). 
 
 Nineteen natural color photographs and 18 black and white enrich this 
 description of Caracas, birthplace of Simon Bolivar, the Liberator of a large 
 part of South America. The article covers the geographical setting of the city 
 and the industries of the surrounding country, such as fishing, pearling, orchid 
 growing, coffee raising. It describes homes, schools, sports and games, the 
 dance, food, clothing, and social customs; also the custom of naming street 
 corners instead of the streets. There is a brief account of Simon Bolivar, his 
 birthplace and tomb. Social studies reference, history. 
 
 Moore, Robert W. Rio Panorama (Natl. Geog., September 1939, p. 283-324, 
 illus.L 
 
 A description of the harbor and spectacular natural setting of Rio, its docks, 
 streets, parks; city planning and building; commercial, professional achieve¬ 
 ments and interests; recreational aspects. 12 clear photographs of unusual 
 variety. The origin of the country’s name is given as coming from the pau 
 brasil, a tree used as dyewood. Pieces of this wood, which Amerigo Vespucci 
 and other early explorers took back to Europe suggested red-hot coals, or brasas. 
 So Brazil the country became rather than Terra da Vera Cruz, which the 
 Portuguese navigator Cabral first called it. Interspersed through the article 
 are 34 natural color photographs entitled “Carioca Carnival”; these show street 
 scenes during the carnival days that precede Ash Wednesday each year. 
 
 Pan American Union. American Nations Series and American Cities Series. 
 Washington, D. C., illus. 
 
 Separate booklet on each republic and on each of the capital cities of Latin 
 America. Comprehensive material in convenient form. See references for the 
 teacher. 
 
 Robb, Maurine. Streets of Buenos Aires (Jr. Red Cross Jour., December 1940, 
 p. 118-119). 
 
 Revealing glimpses of a community through description of its streets. The 
 author covers several of the important thoroughfares in Buenos Aires and 
 describes in detail the life of the little street in the suburb of Belgrano where she 
 lives. Chimney sweep, butcher’s boy, turkeys pass by. There are gay carts, 
 fragrant blossoms, wrought iron gates, little uniformed children attending Eng¬ 
 lish, German, American schools, and the “walking dairy,” relic of the past. 
 
 Simpich, Frederick. Life on the Argentine Pampa (Natl. Geog., October 1933, 
 p. 449-492, illus.). 
 
 Forty-one photographs and 9 paintings by the Argentine artist Cesareo 
 Bernaldo de Quiros supplement this article. Glimpses of history and material 
 on the geography of this region round out the picture of man’s adaptation to 
 the pampa environment presented by the excellent photographs of everyday 
 life, rural scenes, occupational activities, animal life. For a single periodical 
 reference, this article contains an abundance of material on the pampas. 
 
49 
 
 Williams, Maynard Owen. Buenos Aires. Queen of the River of Silver 
 (Natl. Geog., November 1939, p. 561-600, illus.). 
 
 In Argentina, one out of every three persons lives in Buenos Aires. Street 
 names and statues outline the history of this city of three and a half million. 
 The article describes the flow of life in a twenty-four hour span. A series of 
 24 natural color photographs entitled “Buenos Aires: Metropolis of the Pampa” 
 rounds out the vivid impression of docks, streets, parks and life of the people. 
 
 V. REFERENCES FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 1. Books 
 
 Carlson, Fred A. Geography of Latin America. New York. Prentice-Hall, 
 Inc. 1936. 642 p., illus. 
 
 The book discusses the conditions that have influenced the development of 
 the Latin American republics. The general characteristics, description and 
 interpretation of the natural-cultural regions, and a summation of geography 
 in relation to domestic and foreign affairs are included for each country. There 
 are 134 excellent photographs of plants, animals, people and places to supple¬ 
 ment and clarify the text. The 66 maps and charts include many on rainfall, 
 population, climates, principal ports, etc. Comprehensive bibliographies are 
 included at the end of each chapter and a list giving the pronunciation of Latin 
 American names is of particular value. 
 
 Goodspeed, T. Harper. Plant Hunters in the Andes. New York. Farrar & 
 Rinehart, Inc. 429 p., illus. 
 
 Although primarily the account of a botanical expedition in Peru and Chile, 
 the book gives a great deal of information on the people, the homes and com¬ 
 munities in which the expedition worked. Their search for specimens took 
 them into environments varying from desert and jungle to coastal plain and the 
 towering Andes mountains. Excellent photographs give a close-up of people, 
 homes, the countryside and the occupations of the people and in addition, 
 include many photographs of the ruins of conquest and colonial days. 
 
 Green, Philip L. Our Latin American Neighbors. New York. Hastings 
 House. 1941. 128 p. 
 
 A brief, simply written survey of Latin America from before Columbus to 
 the present. The geography, conquest, colonial period, and independence, and 
 later progress and problems are all discussed. There are chapters on Latin 
 American culture and a good discussion of racial background and of the various 
 Indian tribes living throughout the Americas. A good general book. 
 
 Hanson, Earl P. Chile: Land of Progress. New York. Reynal & Hitchcock. 
 1941. 201 p., illus. 
 
 Concise but complete and colorful survey of Chile, sympathetically told. 
 A chapter on Chile’s history gives a good background for the chapters which 
 follow on the people and government, products and industry, social legislation, 
 education, culture and general information for visitors to Chile. Of particular 
 interest is the chapter on culture which gives good information on the music, 
 literature and dances of Chile. The chapters on the people and government are 
 equally interesting and valuable for an understanding of the country’s develop¬ 
 ment and the characteristics of the people. Illustrated with 12 excellent 
 photographs. 
 
 Herring, Hubert. The Good Neighbors: Argentina, Brazil, Chile and Seven¬ 
 teen Other Countries. New Haven. Yale University Press. 1941. 361 p. 
 
 A well-written book based on fact and first-hand experience by the Director 
 of the Committee on Cultural Relations with Latin America. The book cen¬ 
 ters mainly on the three countries named in the title and Mexico, with brief 
 space devoted to the others. The author has included much of his own research 
 into the everyday life of the people. He understands and appreciates the 
 problems of inter-American cooperation, and in the last section of the book 
 he gives a realistic appraisal of our policy in Latin America and of the alterna¬ 
 tive channels into which that policy might be forced. 
 
50 
 
 Kelsey, Vera. Seven Keys to Brazil. New York. Funk & Wagnalls Co.,. 
 
 1940. 314 p. 
 
 An exhaustive book on Brazil, beginning with a brief survey of the Portu¬ 
 guese, Indians and Negroes, Brazil’s early settlers, covering the colonial period, 
 describing life under the Emperors, and independence from Portugal. The 
 author describes in detail the seven different regions of Brazil, the culture, 
 industry and cities. The last part of the book is devoted to a brief discussion 
 of the arts of the country. The wealth of material makes it useful as a refer¬ 
 ence book. The 54 photographs give an idea of people, plaecs and industries 
 of the country. 
 
 Kelsey, Vera, and Lilly de Jongh Osborne. Four Keys to Guatemala. 
 New York. Funk & Wagnalls Co. 1939. 332 p. 
 
 A comprehensive and authentic book on Guatemala based on material 
 collected by Mrs. Osborne during a lifetime’s residence in Central America, 
 the major part in Guatemala. The early history of the country, the conquest 
 and colonial period, and the development of the country after it became a 
 republic are all treated in an interesting way. There is admirable material 
 on the arts and crafts, the fiestas and costumes as well as on the economic, 
 political and cultural life. Ten pages of notes include detailed information 
 on birds, trees, medicinal plants, flowers and a list of the dye plants from which 
 Indians obtained their colors. The 56 illustrations of buildings, the country¬ 
 side, dances, fiestas, costumes and handicraft add to the value of the book. 
 
 Roberts, W. Adolphe. The Caribbean: The Story of Our Sea of Destiny. 
 Indianapolis. Bobbs-Merrill Co. 1940. 313 p. 
 
 Detailed and colorful survey of Caribbean countries from Columbus to 1940. 
 Full treatment of the conquest, colonial period, independence, and later times 
 and personalities who figured in this history: Columbus, Balboa, Cortes, 
 Pizarro, Las Casas, and Bolivar. There is also much information on the rela¬ 
 tions of the American nations with European powers: England, Holland, 
 France. The development of plantations, introduction of sugar, bananas 
 and other crops, and beginnings of the slave trade are traced. Numerous 
 maps, showing voyages and colonizations, and 21 illustrations, including por¬ 
 traits of many famous men, add to the value of the book. 
 
 Romoli, Kathleen. Colombia: Gateway to South America. Garden City, 
 N. Y. Doubleday, Doran & Co. 1941. 364 p. 
 
 An unusually well-written, informative book in which the author has pre¬ 
 sented the past, present and future of one of the most important American 
 republics. The author has given not only the factual material of her subject 
 but has included a wealth of legend and tradition which add color and interest, 
 as for instance the chapter on “The Lake of El Dorado” and the legends of 
 The Gilded Man. In Chapter 31, “Even Neighbors Can Be Friends”, the 
 author discusses past /relations between Colombia and the United States and 
 makes some suggestions looking toward a better understanding in the future. 
 Fourteen photographs illustrate the book, including two particularly interest¬ 
 ing ones on the salt mines (p. 104). 
 
 Simpson, Lesley Byrd. Many Mexicos. New York. G. P. Putnam’s Sons. 
 
 1941. 336 p. 
 
 A good general book on Mexico in which the author humanizes its history 
 and highlights the men, events and institutions of the past which have left 
 their traces on the modern scene. From his intensive research the author 
 presents not only much new material but also a new viewpoint on many old 
 problems. There is also good material on many of Mexico’s great figures— 
 Cortes, Mendoza, Velasco, Hidalgo, JuJrez and others, as well as a good 
 chapter on education and letters. The author has given a balanced and objec¬ 
 tive picture of many of the country’s problems. 
 
 Steinbeck, John. The Forgotten Village. New York. Viking Press. 1941. 
 143 p. / 6 
 
 A book made from the film of the same name. A simple, brief text supple¬ 
 ments the 136 excellent photographs and tells the story of a Mexican village 
 and the struggles of the teacher and the doctor when they attempt to cure the 
 fever and purify the water against the witch doctor’s advice. 
 
51 
 
 Von Hagen, V. Wolfgang. Ecuador, the unknown. New York. Oxford 
 University Press. 1940. 296 p. 
 
 A well written description of the author’s two and a half years’ travels in 
 Ecuador and the Galapagos Islands. In addition to giving detailed informa¬ 
 tion on various regions and peoples of Ecuador, the book contains good chapters 
 on the Panama hat industry (ch. 5), cacao (ch. 9), balsa wood plantations 
 (ch. 8), the fair at Otavalo, a town in Ecuador, the fauna of the GalApagos 
 Islands, and the condors (ch. 6). There is a brief summary of the history of 
 Ecuador from the conquest through the colonial period, also a chapter on the 
 background of the boundary controversy between Peru and Ecuador (ch. 22). 
 
 Williams, Mary W. The People and Politics of Latin America. New York. 
 Ginn & Co. New edition. 1938. 888 p. 
 
 An authoritative, comprehensive survey of Latin America from the pre- 
 Columbian period through the Inter-American Conference at Buenos Aires in 
 1936. The conquest, colonial period and the wars of independence are treated 
 in detail. A chapter is devoted to each of the republics except the republics of 
 Central America which are included in one chapter. There are also chapters 
 on education, literature, art, music; on the economic activities of the Spanish 
 colonies; and on colonial society. Throughout the book emphasis has been put 
 on the people of Latin America and upon the constructive development of the 
 countries rather than upon the wars. The 65 illustrations picture many of the 
 persons who have contributed to the political, industrial and cultural progress 
 and throw light upon economic activities, architecture, art and customs. The 
 21 maps add to the usefulness of the book. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Beals, Carleton. Future of the Amazon (Survey Graphic, March 1941, 6 p., 
 illus.). 
 
 A description of the Amazon basin, which is larger than Europe; history of 
 its hinterland; information about the explorers of the region and the first 
 settlers; enumeration of present problems with suggestions for solving them. 
 General reading for background. The elementary teacher will find information 
 useful in planning her social studies program. 
 
 Bradley, Carolyn G. We Visited Guatemala (School Arts, November 1940, 
 p. 75-87. illus.). 
 
 Glimpses of everyday life in Guatemalan cities and villages. Describes the 
 cut and color of clothing worn by men, women and children. Numerous 
 photographs show wash-day, fiesta trip, worship, travel, musicians and their 
 instruments. There are also village scenes, an Indian home, reproductions 
 of tapestry and pottery. The page of illustrations showing a family engaged 
 in weaving has high merit for home life study in the elementary school. 
 
 Chapin, James P. Islands West of South America (Nat. Hist., June 1936, p. 
 31-55, illus.). 
 
 A map and 35 excellent photographs show the location of the rainless guano 
 islands of Peru, the Galapagos Islands, and the island of Juan Fernandez, in 
 relation to Chile and the west coast of South America. Juan Fernandez was 
 the home of Alexander Selkirk (“Robinson Crusoe”), and has present possi¬ 
 bilities for a naval base. 
 
 -. Through Southern Polynesia (Nat. Hist., April 1936, p. 287-308, illus.). 
 
 Material on Easter Island, which belongs to Chile and is a subject of scien¬ 
 tific interest. Account of the race to secure the first egg of the season laid 
 by a sooty tern, with a picture of an Easter Islander wearing about his head 
 a woven band decorated with the white breast feathers of this once sacred 
 bird. Other pictures show a stone hut at Orongo where islanders used to 
 watch the sooty terns; a male frigate bird, called a “robber baron”; and a 
 view of a crater which indicates that geologically, Easter Island is very young. 
 Useful in natural science. 
 
 Craige, J. H. Haitian Vignettes (Natl. Geog., March 1941, p. 149-152, illus.). 
 
 Material for selection by elementary teachers. Illustrates valuable teaching 
 aids at all levels above third grade. See Junior High School list. 
 
 D’Emery, Charles. Rio de Janeiro: Glamour under the Southern Cross. 
 (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, February 1939, p. 61-67, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. 
 
52 
 
 Dickens, Samuel N. Galeana: A Mexican Highland Community {Jour. Geog. 
 April 1935, p. 140-147). 
 
 Description of a community settled by people of Spanish descent in 1678, 
 which has no indigenous basis of Indian culture. Galeana differs in this respect 
 from older villages of the Central Plateau. Useful for type study showing the 
 adaptation of man and animals, as well as plants, to a specific environment. 
 
 Duncan, David D. Fighting Giants of the Humboldt {Natl. Geog., March 1941, 
 p. 373-400, illus.) 
 
 See Junior High School listing. Children of all ages will enjoy the illustra¬ 
 tions, and the map showing the location of the Humboldt current is simple 
 enough for elementary children and very clear. 
 
 Griffin, Charles C. The National Teachers College in Venezuela. {Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, April 1941, p. 199-204.) 
 
 How some Latin American teachers prepare for the profession. An account 
 of a very modern educational institution in Venezuela where emphasis is placed 
 on developing the independent powers of the teacher. Program of studies, 
 collegiate standing discussed, also cooperation with foreign scholars. Special 
 mention is made of the cultural mission from Chile and the bonds of sympathy 
 that have united Chile and Venezuela sinceThe days of Andres Bello. Photo¬ 
 graphs show the location of the college, a library scene and patio. 
 
 Holton, Priscilla. Two Gardens for Children in Mexico. {Jr. Red Cross News, 
 March 1938, p. 20-22, illus.) 
 
 Kindergarten and first grade children will be interested in the description of 
 “gardens for children” in Mexico. The teacher will be interested in the diffi¬ 
 culties the young Indian principal overcame to win the support of parents in 
 the village of Tonalfi. Before the “garden” came the children cracked clay and 
 moved the drying pottery into the sun. In Guadalajara a dump-heap was 
 transformed, and swings and flowerbeds now surround a small central building. 
 
 James, Preston E. The Expanding Settlements of Southern Brazil. {Geog. 
 Rev., October 1, 1940, p. 601-626). 
 
 The author states that study of settlement involves a knowledge not only 
 of the facts of the land but also of the physical qualities, the psychological 
 attitudes, the inherited traditions and taboos of the people, and countless 
 trivial accidents that play a part. He then undertakes to present against the 
 background of the land in a specific area in south Brazil, German, Italian and 
 Polish clusters of population created since independence. Six maps show surface 
 configuration of the land, natural vegetation, population distribution, land use 
 and railroads. 16 photographs show settlements, towns, land features, homes 
 and community gatherings. Interesting in the light of current history and as 
 general background on colonization, for the teacher of social studies. 
 
 Jarrett, Edith Moore. The Little Towns of Mexico. {Instructor, April 1940, 
 p. 52, illus.) 
 
 Short article by a teacher giving glimpses of life in less-known towns such as 
 Mazat.lan, Tepic, Guanajuato, Queretaro, Zacatecas. She enjoys papaya, 
 mangoes, fresh pineapple, fresh coconut milk out of a green shell, horse-drawn 
 carts, hibiscus flowers, patios, mariachis singing and strumming on homemade 
 guitars. 
 
 Kern, Frank D. Visiting Venezuela. {Scientific Monthly, February 1937, 
 p. 101-116, illus.) 
 
 The author is Professor of Botany and Dean of the Graduate School at 
 Pennsylvania State College. He was looking for botanical data, making a 
 study of plant diseases and collecting fungous parasites, when he jotted down 
 these general notes. Interesting observations on climate, social adaptations, 
 notes on Bolivar and the city of Caracas. Valuable for geographic information, 
 social studies in upper elementary and junior high. 
 
 Lassalle, Edmundo. The Spring Institute of Education, Mexico. {Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, October 1941, p. 586-589, illus.) 
 
 The account of an experiment initiated to bring together students and 
 teachers from the various states of Mexico to present to them a cultural program 
 of world scope. It aims to furnish students of professional and technical 
 schools with intensive training through lectures in new theories and ideas. 
 Successive Spring Institutes will be held in different State universities. There 
 
53 
 
 are photographs of Don Vasco de Quiroga, founder and guiding spirit of tho 
 Colegio de San Nicolds de Hidalgo and one of the colegio buildings. 
 
 Ledig, Elizabeth Lineback. Heigh-ho, Come to the Fair. (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, May 1933, p. 385-390, illus.) 
 
 See Junior High School list. 
 
 Lee, Melicent Humason. Street Scenes in Mexico. (Instructor, April 1936, 
 P- 30.) 
 
 Program material for classroom or auditorium. Details of a typical street 
 and market, with familiar street characters, are carefully presented for repro¬ 
 duction in tableau or play. Further help may be had from Plates VIII and IX 
 in this issue which pictures rcbozos (scarves), sombreros (hats), sarapes (worn 
 as overcoats), sandals, blankets, baskets, flowers, fruits, a burro, a parrot, 
 goose, pig, etc. 
 
 Long, E. John. Gautemala Interlude (Natl. Geog., October 1936, p. 429-460, 
 illus.). 
 
 Recommended especially for excellence and choice of accompanying photo¬ 
 graphs (23 in black and white and 13 in natural color) covering many aspects 
 of home and community life, history, scenery, industries, animals and plants. 
 Of special interest: women washing clothes in a hot spring and rinsing them 
 in the cool waters of Lake Amatitlan, arm’s length away; a ceiba tree at Palin 
 which has a spread of more than 180 feet; an unusual relief map erected in the 
 capital city, showing the topography of the entire republic in concrete. Beauti¬ 
 ful picture of a quetzal, the national bird, which gives its name to the dollar 
 coin. 
 
 Mexican pictures (Children’s Play Mate, June 1941, p. 30-31, illus.). 
 
 See Intermediate listing. 
 
 Moore, Robert W. Chile’s Land of Fire and Water. (Natl. Geog., July 1941, 
 p. 91-110, illus.) 
 
 See Junior High School listing. Pictures will interest elementary grade 
 children. Material suitable for retelling, especially the information on the 
 national flower. 
 
 --Rio Panorama. (Natl. Geog., September 1939, p. 283-324, illus.) 
 
 Content interest for elementary children. Pictures of interest at all levels. 
 See Junior High School listing. 
 
 Morris, Leavitt. In Fortin, It’s Orchids for the Picking. (Chr. Sci. Mon., 
 Weekly Mag. Section, September 20, 1940, p. 4, 12, illus. 
 
 May be used by Junior High teacher in study of city planning, gives view 
 of modern Mexican interest in progress. Describes the interest of a prosperous 
 citizen in beautifying the town in which he lived as an underprivileged child 
 when he develops it as a vacation resort. Fortin is on the east coast of Mexico 
 near Veracruz. 
 
 Newhall, Beatrice. The New Constitution of Bolivia (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1939, p. 100-106). 
 
 Good article for teachers of junior high school civics, and general information 
 for teachers at all levels. The Constitution reflects the growing social consci¬ 
 ousness of the times by giving special attention to economic and social aspects 
 of national life. 
 
 Nichols, Madaline W. The Argentine Gaucho (Bull. Pan Amer. Lnion, May 
 1941, p. 271-275, illus.). 
 
 History of a Latin American type popular with children. The original guacho, 
 a lawless hunter of wild cattle gathering hides for the contraband trade, came 
 into existence in the latter half of the eighteenth century. Because of his 
 superlative skill as a horseman he was drafted into the Argentine wars of 
 independence and became a hero and symbol of nationality. The wars over, 
 there was no room for the gaucho. He disappeared in fact but lives in legend, 
 and his name has been taken over by the whole cowboy class. Concise treat¬ 
 ment. Useful for senior high school reference material and valuable for elemen¬ 
 tary teacher as background. Excellent study of the way in which man makes 
 specific adjustments to different types of environment. 
 
 Pan American Union. Ameiican City Series. Washington, D. C. Illus. 
 
 Separate booklets on 26 cities: Asuncion, Barranquilla, Bogotd, Buenos Aires, 
 Caracas, Cuidad Trujillo, Guatemala City, Havana, La Paz, Lima, Managua, 
 Maracaibo, Mexico City, Montevideo, Panama, Quito, Rio de Janeiro, Rosario, 
 
54 
 
 San Jos6, San Salvador, Santiago (Chile), Santiago (Cuba), Sao Paulo, Teguci¬ 
 galpa, Valparaiso. Organized in much the same way as the American Natiou 
 Series as to size, picture distribution, print, etc.; but gives fuller treatment of 
 local areas, e. g., cities important as governmental centers or for industries. 
 50 each. 
 
 Platt, Robert S. Six Farms in the Central Andes (G -eog. Rev., April 1932, p. 
 245-259, illus.). 
 
 A highly specialized article for students of economics, but. so well organized 
 and presented that the teacher of Junior High School geography can get a feeling 
 of the extent of this region, an appreciation of the primitive communities near 
 the limit of subsistence, of primitive dwellings and processing; of the antiquity 
 of Lake Titicaca communities inhabited today; of the effects of altitude on life 
 as one descends from the high communities to the lower ones of the Cuzco 
 Basin, the Arequipa Basin, and the Rimac Valley. The coastal region is the 
 heart of modern Peru. The center of gravity slipped from the highlands to the 
 coast at the time of the Spanish conquest. Illustrations show irrigation gates, 
 ditch, irrigated land, desert pampa, cotton crop under irrigation, etc. Clear 
 picture of farmhouse made of adobe and grass thatch. Picture interest not 
 below Junior High school. 8 locational maps. 
 
 Redfield, Robert. Primitive Merchants of Guatemala (Quart. Jour. Inter - 
 Amer. Rel., October 1939, p. 42-56). 
 
 The way of life of the Indian as seen in his religious expression, his simple 
 methods of farming, his social grouping and his unique response to the market. 
 The age-old institution of trading is well described. 
 
 Shapiro, H. L. Mystery Island of the Pacific (Nat. Hist., May 1935, p. 365-377, 
 illus.). 
 
 Overview of the discovery of Easter Island and its subsequent history. The 
 meaning of the traditional egg races is discussed. Pictures include a view of 
 the island, some of the inhabitants, wood carving, a wooden tablet covered 
 with undeciphered script, some of the archaic images. Curriculum value for 
 elementary school: knowledge that Easter Island is an island possession of 
 Chile and in a strategic location for a possible naval base. 
 
 Shtppee, Robert. The “Great Wall of Peru” and Other Aerial Photographic 
 Studies by the Shippee-Johnson Peruvian Expedition (Geog. Rev., January 
 1932, p. 1-29). 
 
 Twenty-eight photographs and an outline map of the area photographed 
 help teachers to visualize the region and better understand Andean life. For 
 teachers of Junior High School. 
 
 South American Homes (House and Garden, May 1941, p. 27, illus.). 
 
 Brief general reference for teachers. Arts, crafts, decoration and mode of 
 living in Latin America are here classified as primitive, colonial, modern. 
 The influence of each period as reflected in current life is contrasted with similar 
 period in the United States. Several modern homes in the vicinity of Rio 
 de Janeiro are illustrated, showing architectural details and furnishings. 
 
 Taussig, William Charles. The Caribbean (Survey Graphic, March 1941, 
 5 p., illus.). 
 
 It has been said that the relation of the Caribbean to the history of man in 
 the western hemisphere corresponds in significance to that of the Mediterranean 
 in the old world. This article gives the reader a concept of the extent and 
 character of the lands of the Caribbean rim and raises questions concerning the 
 role of these lands in the present world crisis. Social studies material. 
 
 The Widest Avenue in the World (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, January 1938, p. 
 38-39, illus.). 
 
 Good photograph of the Avenida Nueve de Julio in Buenos Aires, the widest 
 street in the world (460 feet from side to side). The five traffic lanes are 
 separated by grass plots and lines of trees, and the avenue is further beautified 
 by fountains. A plan-drawing shows an underground parking space. 
 
 Ugarte B., Rogelio. Santiago through Four Centuries (Bull. Pan Amer. Union , 
 April 1941, p. 235-24,5). 
 
 In February 1941 the 400th anniversary of the founding of Santiago by 
 Pedro de Valdivia was celebrated. The author traces the history of the city 
 through the colonial and independence periods and describes the progressive 
 modern city*. There are 9 excellent photographs. 
 
55 
 
 Williams, Maynard Owen. Buenos Aires: Queen of the River of Silver (Natl. 
 Geog., November 1939, p. 561-600, illus.). 
 
 Content material, upper elementary grades. Pictures of interest for classes. 
 See Junior High School list. 
 
 Weibel, Leo. White Settlement in Costa Rica. (Geog. Rev., October 1939, 
 p. 529-560, illus.). 
 
 How Costa Rica, a tropical land, has been successfully colonized by a pre¬ 
 ponderantly white population. The author discusses land holding, the geo¬ 
 graphical distribution of whites, etc. The photographs show houses typical 
 of the tropical Caribbean area, the mission church in Crosi, a street scene and 
 a dairy farm at Turrialba, homesteads in the midst of coffee farms—intimate 
 pictures of human adaptation to environment. The author states that racial, 
 economic, and social solidarity has given the country its relatively peaceful 
 political development, its economic progress, and its intellectual life. 8 maps, 
 22 photographs. 
 
 Wilson, Charles Morrow. Panama: Keystone of Hemisphere Defense 
 (Travel, February 1941, p. 23-27, illus.). 
 
 Includes colorful material on life and the modern scene, some history. Rich 
 in factual material and curriculum suggestions for the elementary teacher. 
 Pictures include a pet coati and a sloth, as well as a dugout used by the San 
 Bias Indians. 
 
 KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Bull. Pan Amer. Union_ 
 
 Chr. Sci. Mon_ 
 
 Geog. Rev_ 
 
 Jour. Geog_ 
 
 Jr. Nat. Hist_ 
 
 Jr. Red Cross News_ 
 
 Jr. Schol_ 
 
 Natl. Geog_ 
 
 Nat. Hist_ 
 
 Quart. Jour. Inter-Amer. Rel 
 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. 
 Christian Science Monitor. 
 
 Geographical Review. 
 
 Journal of Geography. 
 
 Junior Natural History. 
 
 American Junior Red Cross News. 
 
 Junior Scholastic. 
 
 National Geographic Magazine. 
 
 Natural History. 
 
 The Quarterly Journal of Inter-American 
 Relations. 
 
 490718 0 - 42-5 
 

 56 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
57 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
58 
 
 TEACHERS ADDITIONS 
 
{ Children of the Other Americas } 
 
 DANCES, SONGS, AND 
 FESTIVALS 
 
 ( 59 ) 
 

/ 
 
 * 
 
 Table of Contents 
 
 Page 
 
 I. Introduction _ 63 
 
 II. References for the Primary Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 64 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 64 
 
 III. References for the Intermediate Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 65 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 66 
 
 IV. References for the Junior High School: 
 
 1. Books_ 67 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 67 
 
 V. References for the Teacher: 
 
 1. Books_ 68 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 70 
 
 Key to Abbreviations_ 75 
 
 (61) 
 

 
 I 
 
 
DANCES, SONGS, AND FESTIVALS 
 
 I. INTRODUCTION 
 
 Song and dance and celebration were not only amusements, they 
 were a vital part of the Indians’ religious worship. They believed 
 their gods were pleased when they sang and danced for them. Indian 
 children thought that their games and sports prepared them to become 
 worthy members of their communities. In many villages, to this 
 day, traditional dances form part of fiestas honoring the patron saint. 
 
 For the Spaniards, Portuguese, Frenchmen of colonial times, far 
 away from their homelands, weeks and months and even years without 
 mail, music was a necessary part of the daily and community life. 
 Their songs and festivals formed strong trellises on which they leaned 
 and which linked their present with their past. Slavery added an 
 African note in certain regions. 
 
 Out of the fusion of races emerged cultural patterns from which 
 evolved the folk songs, games and distinctive rhythms of today. 
 There are both similarities and striking contrasts between ways of 
 celebrating holidays in Latin America and the United States. The 
 reversal of the seasons in the southern hemisphere plays tricks with 
 the calendar: Christmas, for instance, falls in summer south of the 
 equator; St. John’s Day, a summer festival in Europe, as in North 
 America, became a winter one in the southern Americas, with the 
 bonfire, its distinguishing feature, serving as a pleasing transition. 
 
 The birth of the 20 republics gave rise to national holidays honoring 
 Independence and those who fought for it. Songs and ballads are 
 made to honor heroic actions today. 
 
 The heritage of the children of Latin America gives them an 
 abundance of the sparkling rythms, love of pageantry and sport that 
 all children share, and dances, carnivals, fiestas, fairs and other 
 colorful ways in which they celebrate are described in the stories listed 
 here. The pinata, a favorite way of entertaining children in the gay 
 patio of the Latin home, is finding a place in parties in the United 
 States. Taking part, vicariously or actually, in the celebrations of 
 other peoples is one of the best ways to appreciation, and for this reason 
 some references have been listed which give specific directions for 
 singing games, dance-steps and the making of costumes. Several 
 music books have been listed. Scores are included in some of the 
 descriptive articles. Radio and records will help the teacher master 
 rhythms. 
 
 ( 63 ) 
 
64 
 
 II. REFERENCES FOR THE PRIMARY GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Bannon, Laura. Manuela’s Birthday in Old Mexico. Chicago. Albert Whit¬ 
 man & Co. 1939. 46 p., illus. 
 
 The birthday party which little Manuela’s friends have for her forms the 
 basis of this simple story of life in Mexico. The attractive pictures in color 
 which illustrate the story add greatly to the value of the book and give an 
 excellent idea of the different Mexican dolls. 
 
 Barris, Anna Andrews. Red Tassels for Huki in Peru. Chicago. Albert 
 Whitman & Co. 1939. 62 p., illus. 
 
 In this story of life among the Indians of Peru, a fiesta and a dance are 
 described in sufficient detail for children to read and carry out. There is good 
 information on the habits of llamas and the customs of the people. The de¬ 
 scriptions of the interior of the home and the good pictures of the clothing of 
 the Indians would be useful in handicraft and art classes. 
 
 Durfee, Helen, and John McMorris. Mateo and Lolita. Boston. Hough¬ 
 ton, Mifflin & Co. 1939. 62 p., illus. 
 
 The trip to Xochimilco, the floating gardens of Mexico, could be made the 
 basis for a unit on these gardens where Mateo and Lolita go for a holiday. 
 Good information on the markets, handicrafts, and on general life in Mexico is 
 included. Simply told and illustrated with excellent photographs. Useful as 
 a supplementary reading book. 
 
 Eliot, Frances. Pablo’s Pipe. New York. E. P. Dutton & Co. 1936. 
 48 p., illus. 
 
 His skill at playing a pipe gains Pablo a place with a group of traveling 
 musicians in Mexico. Their gay adventures make an entertaining story and 
 with the money he earns Pablo is able to buy presents for all the family, includ¬ 
 ing a big hat for himself. Bright illustrations add charm to the book. 
 
 Simon, Charlie. Popo’s Miracle. New York. E. P. Dutton & Co. 1938. 
 223 p., illus. 
 
 There is good material on the preparations for a harvest fiesta as well as the 
 description of the fiesta itself, a dance .and the costumes worn in it. Many 
 village customs are described together with the everyday life of the Mexican 
 peasants and the legends of the burro of Amecameca and of San Miguel are 
 included. The story cenfers around Rafael, who cares for his baby brother, 
 and the pack of artist’s materials which the burro brought. A useful book for 
 general customs as well as for fiestas and art classes. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Goetz, Delia. May Day Surprise (Jr. Red. Cross News , May 1939, p. 1-3, illus.) 
 
 A little American boy living in Guatemala is invited to a May Day party 
 along with the rest of his class and is initiated into the mystery of the pinata, a 
 favorite form of entertainment for children in Mexico and Central America. 
 For the children, delightful reading about customs in other lands. For the 
 teacher, sufficiently detailed information to plan a school party featuring a 
 pinata (the suspended jar full of goodies and decorated with bright paper, which 
 must be broken by a blindfolded child with a stick). Christmas pinata is pic¬ 
 tured on the cover of the American Junior Red Cross News for December 1934. 
 
 -- A Singing Game from Guatemala ( Story Parade , April 1933, p. 25). 
 
 Music, words and directions for playing a simple singing game, in the gym¬ 
 nasium or out of doors. The circle about Dona Ana may be large or small, and 
 teacher may take her choice of Spanish or English words. Children interested 
 in the story of Panchita by the same author may learn a game Panchita knew. 
 
 Galarza, Ernesto. Mexican Jingles (Jr. Red. Cross R T ews, February 1941, p. 168, 
 illus.). 
 
 Two jingles in Spanish with English translation, one about a rattle, the 
 other about a drum and fiddle. Accompanied by colored pictures of Mexican 
 children with these instruments. For a rhythm band, story-telling, art. 
 
65 
 
 III. REFERENCES FOR THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Brown, Rose. Two Children of Brazil. New York. J. B. Lippincott Co. 
 1940. 229 p., illus. 
 
 A carnival and a description of the costumes worn, together with a birthday 
 party and specific directions for making the food and playing the games are 
 included in this book. In addition, there is much information on markets, 
 plants, insects and butterflies, as well as detailed information on coffee planta¬ 
 tions and the steps in growing coffee. A good reference for nature study, art 
 and social studies. 
 
 Burbank, Addison. The Cedar Deer. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 
 1940. 156 p., illus. 
 
 This book on Guatemala contains a good chapter on the “Flying Tree Dance.’' 
 There is detailed description of the preparations for the fiesta, the costumes worn 
 by the performers, and the dance itself, in which the dancers, having attached 
 themselves by a rope to the top of a tall pole, dive into space. Included also 
 is much information on Indian costumes and good historical material on the 
 Mayas and the conquest, as well as on present-day life. Good glossary of 
 Spanish and Indian words. Excellent illustrations, some in color. 
 
 Cannon, Marian. Children of the Fiery Mountain. New York. E. P. Dutton 
 & Co. 1940. 96 p., illus. 
 
 A Christmas fiesta on a coffee plantation adds interest to this well-told story 
 of everyday life in Guatemala. The directions for making a nac.imie.nto (model 
 of the birth-scene at Bethlehem) could be followed by the children. A volcanic 
 eruption adds to the action. A useful book in planning a fiesta for Christmas. 
 Good illustrations. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Letters from Guatemala. New World Neighbors Series. Boston. 
 D. C. Heath Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Includes a description of Christmas on a plantation followed by the celebra¬ 
 tion of Three Kings’ Day, when the Guatemalan children receive their presents. 
 Also a detailed account of a party where the children have a pinata , the decorated 
 clay jar filled with toys which is a characteristic part of children’s parties in 
 Guatemala. The Independence Day celebration and visits to banana and coffee 
 plantations are also described. Illustrated in color. 
 
 Purnell, Idella, and John Weatherwax. The Talking bird: An Aztec 
 Story book. New York. The Macmillan Co. 1930. 95 p., Illus. 
 
 Fairy tales and legends of the Aztecs which Paco’s grandfather told to him. 
 Each story is prefaced by an incident of modern times in Mexico and include 
 descriptions of market days, a fiesta, a Christmas celebration, a picnic, and 
 Independence Day. The description of the posadas in the Christmas play is 
 so detailed that children could carry out the customs in a Christmas play at 
 school. The striking black and white illustrations add much to the stories. 
 
 Richards, Irmagarde, and Elena Landazuri. Children of Mexico: Their 
 Land and Its Story. San Francisco. Harr Wagner Publishing Co. 1935. 
 323 p., illus. 
 
 The fiesta held on a hacienda (plantation) on grandfather’s birthday and the 
 day of San Isidro, saint of the farmers, is described in simple language. The 
 preparations for the fiesta are described and a charming legend of San Isidro 
 is told. The procession of the beasts of the hacienda is of particular interest 
 and making the animals for such a procession would make an excellent unit for 
 classes in handicraft. 
 
 Steen, Elizabeth K. Red Jungle Boy. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1937. 80 p., illus. 
 
 The games and a dance of the Caraja Indians of Brazil is included in this 
 well-written account of everyday life among this tribe. In addition there is 
 information on the Indians’ food, their dress, their fishing and hunting expedi¬ 
 tions and adventures in the jungle. Striking illustrations in color supplement 
 the text. 
 
66 
 
 Stoker, Catharine Ulmer. Little Daughter of Mexico. Dallas. Deaiy and 
 Lowe. 1937. 314 p., illus. 
 
 The Independence Day celebration and a birthday party, beginning with the 
 morning serenade ( Las Mananitas) and ending with the breaking of a pinata 
 (decorated pottery jar filled with sweets and toys). Christmas festivities are 
 also described, including the posadas which commemorate the journey of Joseph 
 and Mary from inn to inn at Bethlehem. Good information on the markets 
 and the handicrafts of the country are included, as is also the legend of the 
 Virgin of Guadalupe. 
 
 Tarshis, Elizabeth Kent. The Village that Learned to Read. Boston. 
 Houghton, Mifflin Co. 1941. 158 p., illus. 
 
 A delightful, well-written story which includes a fiesta in the village and 
 many amusing incidents centering on the devices the children use to get Pedro 
 to take an interest in school. Much interesting material on Mexican life is 
 included, and the 60 pen and ink sketches have life and gayety. 
 
 Thomas, Margaret Loring. Carmelita Sings. New York. Abingdon Press. 
 1935. 112 p., illus. 
 
 The story of a little girl of Bolivia who loves music more than anything else 
 and her adventures at a fiesta, when she runs away from home, goes to the 
 country, and attends a movie. There is also good material on the costumes, 
 handicrafts and the life of the people which would be useful to classes in social 
 studies and art. 
 
 Winslow, Anna. Out Little Chilean Cousin. Boston. L. C. Page & Co. 
 1928. 140 p., illus. 
 
 The dances, games, Christmas and Independence Day celebrations of Chile 
 are described in this book on life in Chile. It is also a good source for other 
 information on ranch life, the mining and lake regions the Araucanian Indians 
 and Chile’s national hero, O’Higgins. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Clark, Kenneth S. The Everybody Sing Book. Pamphlet. New York. 
 Pauli-Pioneer Music Corp. 1935. 
 
 Contains standard favorites in English; also “Cielito Lindo”, “La Cucaracha,” 
 etc. 
 
 Cugat, Xavier. The Other Americas. Pamphlet. New York. Edward B. 
 Marks Music Corp. 1938. 64 p., illus. 
 
 Songs the children can sing, accompanied by notes and cartoons containing 
 much information on national dances and music of various Latin-American 
 countries. 
 
 Don Demofilo. Riddles from Spanish America ( Story Parade , April 1939, p. 
 46-47). 
 
 Five amusing riddles with their answers in a story setting for little children. 
 
 Ledig, Eliazbeth Lineback. Carnival Day in the Andes {Jr. Red Cross News, 
 April 1938, p. 3-6, story, illus.). 
 
 Complete description of a festival and procession with floats featuring the 
 Indian traditions of Peru. Told from the point of view of two Indian village 
 children whose Spanish godmother is Beauty Queen of the carnival, the presenta¬ 
 tion as well as the content will be enjoyed by children. 
 
 A Letter from Mexico {Jr. Red Cross News, February 1941, p. 167, illus.). 
 
 A description of the Jarabe Tapatio (Ha-rah-be ta-pa-tee-o), the Mexican 
 national dance. Part of a letter written to friends in the United States by a little 
 American girl living with her parents in a mining camp in the State of San Luis 
 Potosi. Children can practice what they learn about the steps and plan cos¬ 
 tumes from the illustrations and description. One picture shows the girl in her 
 full-skirted china poblana (chee-nah poh-blah-nah) costume, named for the 
 Chinese girl of Puebla who first designed it; the other, her traditional partner 
 the charro (chah-roh), the dashing horseman in his tight braided trousers. 
 
67 
 
 IV. REFERENCES FOR THE JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Holton, Priscilla. Chuck Martinez. New York. Longmans, Green <f Co. 
 1940. 312 p., illus. 
 
 A dance described in Chapter VIII of this book might be used for a scuool 
 fiesta and the Mexican Independence is briefly described as well. An athletic 
 meet and a country fiesta is included along with a good deal of information on 
 everyday life of a group of Mexican schoolboys. 
 
 Malkus, Alida. The Dark Star of Itza. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co^ 
 1930. 217 p., illus. 
 
 A well-written account of a Mayan festival with colorful description of the 
 various costumes worn by the nobility, high priests, warriors and others. The 
 book gives authentic material on the rich Mayan civilization of preconquest 
 days and the everyday life of a lovely young Mayan princess and her friends. 
 Good source of information for costumes and art. 
 
 Peck, Anne Merriman. Young Mexico. New York. Robert McBride & Co. 
 1934. 270 p., illus. 
 
 Many of the fiestas peculiar to different regions are described. Some of 
 these could be carried out in schools in the United States. A good, detailed 
 survey of Mexican life in city and village, among upper class and peasants. 
 A useful book for planning a special unit on Mexico. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Christmas Observances in the Americas (Think , December 1938, 2 p., illus.). 
 
 Unique features of observance in Argentina, Brazil and Ecuador, Colombia, 
 Peru, Venezuela, Mexico and Cuba. In Latin America the days between 
 December 25th and January 6th are celebrated as one holiday season, beginning 
 with the birth of the Christ Child and ending with the coming of the Magi or 
 “Three Kings” on January 6th. This article describes church ceremonies, 
 festivities inside and outside the homes, the special foods, decorations and 
 customs of gift-giving associated w r ith the Christmas season. For reference 
 material; language arts, writing and dramatizing stories based on some of the 
 colorful customs; for social studies, tracing origins of customs, and interpreting 
 environmental differences. Some of the customs may be adapted to school 
 parties and programs. 
 
 Clark, Kenneth S. The Everybody Sing Book. Pamphlet. New York. 
 Pauli-Pioneer Music Corp. 1935. 
 
 Contains standard favorites in English; also “Cielito Lindo,” “La Cucaracha,” 
 etc. 
 
 Cugat, Xavier. The Other Americas. Pamphlet. New York. Edward B. 
 Marks Music Corp. 1938. 64 p., illus. 
 
 Notes on the national dances and music of the various Latin-American 
 countries, and cartoons which emphasize their special character, precede the 
 songs themselves. Characteristic dances such as the tango, ranchera, rumba, 
 maxixe, joropo, are covered. The music can be arranged for orchestration. 
 
 Duckworth, Thomas. Carnaval Carioca (Brazil Today , December 1940, p. 10, 
 illus.). 
 
 Description of Rio’s annual carnival celebrated the Sunday, Monday and 
 Tuesday before Ash Wednesdajq its early beginnings and history to the pres¬ 
 ent time. Fifteen illustrations. A distinctive feature of the Rio carnival are 
 sambas, song-and-dance compositions with timely allusions that spring up 
 for this occasion. May be compared with New Orleans’ Mardi Gras. Social 
 studies. 
 
 Galarza, Trnesto. Latin America Makes Music (Jr. Red Cross Jour., Decem¬ 
 ber 1940, p. 1C6-108, illus.). 
 
 The article discusses Latin American music in general and traces the devel¬ 
 opment of musical expression from the coming of the Spaniard to the present 
 time. Music became an integral part of daily life in remote colonial towns 
 and the Spanish or Portuguese forms were colored by Indian and Negro 
 rhythms so that Latin-American music reflects the mingled strains. Instru- 
 
V 
 
 68 
 
 merits, festivals and incidental customs are touched upon; also the work of 
 Villa-Lobos of Brazil, an outstanding leader in music education today. Illus¬ 
 trations show Aztec musicians of pre-Conquest times and a Peruvian flutist. 
 
 A payadores contest, in which one contender sings a stanza of a ballad he has 
 composed on the spot and his rival carries on the story, would make a novel 
 activity. Teachers will also find the article helpful for appreciation of radio 
 programs, and general approach to the people. 
 
 Hall, Robert King. Sport without Latitude {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, Febru¬ 
 ary 1938, p. 97-108, illus.). 
 
 General overview of sports in Latin America. The Latin Americans have 
 a love for sport that transcends any obstacle and futbol (soccer in the United 
 States) is the most popular game. Bull-fighting, introduced from Spain as a 
 sport of great color, pageantry and skill, has lost much of its glamor in the 
 New World and Latin Americans prefer faster sports. Racing, riding, roping, 
 pdlo are favorites among people always noted for horsemanship; water sports 
 are popular. From the Basque provinces of Spain comes jaialai (pronounced 
 high-aligh), a swift sort of “handball” played by four men using curved 
 baskets strapped to their wrists; from Britain and France, golf and tennis. 
 Illustrations show swimming pools, rodeo, jai alai court, the stadium at 
 Mexico City, beaches, race tracks, fishing, regatta, and the ancient Ball Court 
 at Chichen Itz £ where the Mayas played a game something like basketball. 
 Larsen, Helga. The Mexican Indian Flying Pole Dance {Natl. Geog., March 
 1937, p. 387-400, illus.). 
 
 Of those age-old rites which still survive among the Indians of remote villages 
 in Mexico, one of the most spectacular is the strange “Sky Dance” of the 
 “flying pole”. The dancers “dive” from a tiny platform high above the ground 
 where the dance takes place, “flying” to earth as ropes unwind. The cere¬ 
 mony is supposed to be intimately connected with the Indian calendar. The 
 voladores (flyers) wear bright red costumes and two bandannas crossed at the 
 back to give the effect of wings. 
 
 Moore, Robert W. Carioca Carnival {Natl. Geog., September 1939, p. 283- 
 324, color plates). 
 
 A section of 34 excellent natural color photographs which supplements Mr. 
 Moore’s article entitled “Rio Panorama”, p. 283-324. The photographs show 
 pre-Lenten street scenes with merry-makers of all ages in improvised costumes, 
 groups of Cariocas (people of Rio), fashionable residential sections, beach 
 scenes, views of the harbor and surrounding country. 
 
 V. REFERENCES FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Berrien, William. Some Considerations Regarding Comtemporary Latin 
 American Music in Concerning Latin American Culture, p. 151-177. New 
 York. Columbia University Press. 1940. 232 p. 
 
 A detailed, technical discussion of the various types of Latin American 
 music, the work of some of the composers—Carlos Chavez, Heitor Villa-Lobos, 
 Domingo Santa Cruz, Juan Carlos Paz and others— and the place of music in 
 Pan Americanism. 
 
 Burbank, Addison. Guatemala Profile. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 
 1939. 359 p., illus. 
 
 One of the festivals of the Guatemalan Indians, the Fiesta of Tzijola, is de¬ 
 scribed in detail in Chapter XXIII (p. 185-191) of this book. The costumes 
 of the people taking part in the festival, the formation of the procession, the 
 musical accompaniment of the chirimia (characteristic instrument) and drums 
 and never-ending noise of the exploding fireworks are presented in colorful 
 word pictures, as is also the author’s unsuccessful attempt to obtain an explana¬ 
 tion of the meaning of the celebration. 
 
 Courlander, Harold. Haiti Singing. Chapel Hill. The University of North 
 Carolina Press. 1939. 273 p., illus. 
 
 A well written, informative book on the music of the Haitians, the story of 
 their songs and what their music means to them. Creole words and the Eng¬ 
 lish translation of 185 folk-songs are included as w r ell as detailed descriptions 
 
69 
 
 of many dances and fiestas. The introductory chapters give an excellent 
 summary of the background of social traditions in Haiti. Twenty-six excellent 
 photographs and drawings supplement the text, including dancers, festivals 
 and many of the musical instruments. 
 
 Fergusson, Erna. Fiesta in Mexico. New York. Alfred A. Knopf. 1934. 
 267 p., illus. 
 
 Thirteen fiestas in as many different villages are described in this book. They 
 include among others, the dance of the Moors and Christians, the Flying Dance, 
 the Festival of the Dead and the Children’s Fiesta. The dances are described, 
 together with the costumes of the dancers, and the author includes many inci¬ 
 dents about the crowds and the preparations for the fiestas. Fourteen illus¬ 
 trations show dance masks, the deer dancer’s headpiece, pilgrims going to 
 Chalma, straw toys, and various other scenes in connection with festivals. 
 
 - Guatemala. New York. Alfred A. Knopf. 1937. 320 p., illus. 
 
 The fiesta of Santo Tom£s is described in Chapter IV and includes also good 
 descriptions of the costumes worn by the Indians. Chapter XX describes 
 some Indian dances and ancient rites, includes pictures of dancers in their 
 costumes as well as the legend of the dance “Los Gracejos.” In Chapter XXI, 
 the author describes many of the customs of Holy Week—the blessing of fruits 
 and grain and the dressing of Judas. 
 
 Garner, Bess Adams. Mexico: Notes in the Margin. Boston. Houghton, 
 Mifflin Co. 1937. 163 p., illus. 
 
 Gives an interesting description of Las Posadas, one of the Mexican Christmas 
 celebrations which extends over a nine-day period immediately preceding 
 Christmas. The words of the posada song are given but not the music. Also 
 includes material on the shepherd plays or coloqvios of Mexico. Illustrated 
 with 57 excellent photographs of people, places, costumes and handicrafts of 
 Mexico. 
 
 Gibson, Hugh. Rio. New York. Doubleday, Doran & Co., Inc. 1937 
 263 p., illus. 
 
 Chapter X gives an interesting, colorful account of carnival time in Rio. 
 The author tells how the music is selected each year, describes the celebrations 
 held in private houses and clubs and gives good details of many costumes and 
 dances. The chapter is illustrated by two good pictures of carnival scenes. 
 
 Hague, Eleanor. Latin American Music, Past and Present. Santa Ana, 
 California. The Fine Arts Press. 1934. 98 p., illus. 
 
 An excellent book summarizing Latin American music from before the con¬ 
 quest to the present time. Chapter I discusses the influence of geography on 
 music, the Indian cultures, their music, some of their dances and the musical 
 instruments they had at the time of the conquest. The next section takes up 
 the colonial period and the fusion of Spanish and Indian music, the work of the 
 priests in instructing the Indians in music and the dramatic representations 
 in connection with religious ceremonies. The folk-singers, the music of the 
 gaucho and payador and the cries of the street vendors makes an interesting 
 chapter as does the description of modern Indian music. The twenty-two 
 illustrations include many of dancers, festivals, and musical instruments. 
 Among them are the Yaqui dancers with deer-head masks, a festival in Bolivia, 
 an All Saints’ Day festival in Peru. 
 
 Hanson, Earl P. Chile: Land of Progress. New York. Reynal & Hitchcock. 
 1941. 128 p., illus. 
 
 Chapter IV (p. 71-91) describes in detail the cueca , a Chilean folk dance. 
 The origin of the folk songs is discussed as well as the musical instruments of 
 Chile. The rodeo and a fiesta are briefly discussed as well as Chilean culture 
 in general. 
 
 Herring, Hubert, and Herbert Weinstock, ed: Renascent Mexico. New 
 York. Covici Friede. 1935. 322 p. 
 
 Papers on the dance, music, and art read before the Mexican Seminar of the 
 Committee on Cultural Relations with Latin America are included in this 
 book (p. 179-233). Frances Toor discusses the Mexican folk dances and their 
 place in the life of the present-day Indian, then describes in detail several of 
 the popular dances of Mexico—the jarabe of both village and city, including the 
 words of the songs often sung at the dance, the huapango which is danced in the 
 state of Veracruz, the canacuas of Michoacan and the sandunga. With each of 
 
70 
 
 the dances above mentioned the author gives a great deal of detailed information 
 on the performance, the costume, origin of the dance; and the music. 
 
 Carlos Chdvez, well-known Mexican composer, discusses Mexican music, 
 tracing it from the Aztecs to the present and considering its possible develop¬ 
 ment in the future. Of particular interest is the description of the musical 
 instruments used by the Aztecs, the composition of songs and music for special 
 festivals, and some of the dances. 
 
 The fiesta as a work of art is discussed by Rene d’Harnoncourt, and detailed 
 and dramatic accounts of several fiestas in various parts of Mexico are given, 
 including descriptions of the costumes, the crowds, the processions, and many 
 of the interesting legends on which the festivals are based. 
 
 Kelsey, Vera, and Lilly de Jongh-Osborne. Four keys to Guatemala. New 
 York. Funk & Wagnalls Co. 1939. 332 pp., illus. 
 
 Ceremonies, festivals, pilgrimages, fairs, markets, and dances are described 
 in Chapters IV, VIII, and XX of this book. Ancient Indian ceremonial rites, 
 religious holidays, and seasonal festivals are also discussed. The Ceremony 
 of the Eight Monkeys, Fiesta de la Cruz, Holy Wheel, ceremonies of the corn, 
 pilgrimage to the Virgin of Candelaria are among these described. Many 
 dances are included, with details of their performance, costumes, and music. 
 The sports and recreations of Guatemala are described in Chapter XX. Photo¬ 
 graphs of dancers and musicians on p. 120-121. 
 
 McNeil, Blanch and Edna. First Foods of America. New York. Sutton- 
 house Ltd. 1936. 
 
 The book contains the words and music of a number of Mexican songs about 
 food. Among them are the song of the pumpkin, the cinnamon tree, the peach, 
 and el atole, a gruel made of corn. 
 
 Schwendener, Norma and Averil Tibbels. Legends and Dances of Old 
 Mexico. New York. A. S. Barnes & Co. 1934. Ill pp., illus. 
 
 The book describes in detail 12 dances of Mexico. Each dance has a brief 
 introduction giving its origin, a description of the costumes, detailed directions 
 for performing the dance as well as the music for the accompaniment. Legends 
 in connection with some of the dances are of particular interest, as for instance 
 the legend of the Dance of the Virgin and the Beasts. Another dance, called 
 The Little Indians, resembles the English maypole dance. The illustrations 
 show some of the dancers, and these would be helpful in making the costumes. 
 
 Spicer, Dorothy Gladys. The Book of Festivals. New York. The Woman’s 
 press. 1937. 429 pp. 
 
 Many of the festivals of Mexico are described in this book, together with the 
 posadas, the nine-day celebration just preceding Christmas, the Day of the 
 Three Kings, Saint John’s Day, the Day of the Dead, the celebration of our 
 Lady of Guadalupe, Mexico’s patron saint. Many other less known festivals 
 are also included. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Bairos, Peggy. Mexican Holiday (Pan-Pacific, April-June 1940, p. 35-37, 
 illus.). 
 
 Article written in popular style, describes a bull fight and the Festival of the 
 Dead. Listed particularly for classroom value of the very clear photographs 
 showing an ornate carved doorway, a street scene in Ixhauctyle, Mount Ixtacci- 
 huatl (the Sleeping Woman) and Mount Popocatepetl (the Smoking Mountain). 
 
 Barry, M. Elizabeth. How our South American Neighbors Celebiate Holidays 
 during September (School Management , September 1941, p. 8-9.). 
 
 Condensed information on the holidays which commemorate the struggle 
 for Independence of several Latin American republics, and on the social nature 
 of age-old markets. Useful as reference material in social studies. 
 
 Botsford, Florence Hudson. Songs of the Americas. New York. G. Schir- 
 mer, Inc. 1930. 106 pp. 
 
 Recommended for a few selections suitable for primary. “The Bull and the 
 Cowboy,” “The Peacock,” “The Poll-Parrot,” “To Jerez We Will Go” have 
 interest for action games. 
 
71 
 
 Brejvster, Mela Sedillo. Mexican and New Mexican Folkdances. Albu¬ 
 querque. University of New Mexico Press. 1938. 47 pp., drawings, musical 
 
 scores. 
 
 Attractively styled pamphlet assembling musical notations, dance directions 
 and patterns for the costumes used in a number of Mexican folkdances such as 
 the jarabe tapatio and sandunga, and New Mexican popular dances such as la 
 varsoviana and la vaquerita, together with material on the background of tradi¬ 
 tion and history. Calls attention to the existence of Spanish-American culture 
 within the borders of the United States; useful in social studies as transitional 
 material to study of Latin America. Prepared especially to meet the needs of 
 teachers interested in staging fiestas. 
 
 Buchanan, Fannie R. Musical Moments from Latin America. Pamphlet. 
 Extension Service, Iowa State College of Agriculture and Mechanic Arts. 
 
 This pamphlet, organized in seven lessons, was prepared for Iowa Home 
 project and 4-H Clubs but many other groups of various ages will find it useful. 
 Persuasively presented background material on twelve different songs with 
 dance steps and rhythmic accompaniment, suggestions for fiestas. Two of the 
 songs are given, the others have been published or recorded commercially. 
 The teacher will find it adaptable for class or club. 
 
 The Carnegie Institution of Washington. Maize Cultivation in Northwestern 
 Guatemala. Contributions to American Anthropology and History, vol. 6, 
 no. 33. Washington. 1940. 
 
 This study based on data collected in the field by Raymond Sladelman, 
 was made for the purpose of better understanding the role of maize in the 
 economy of pre-Columbian peoples of the Maya area, through observation of 
 its present day role in the economy and culture of the area. The section on 
 magico-religious rites connected with the cultivation of maize will deeply 
 interest the teacher for its interpretation of present-day festivals mentioned in 
 some of the children’s books. 
 
 The Chilean Cueca (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, November 1939, p. 654, photograph). 
 
 Charming photograph showing steps of the Chilean cueca , a dance popular 
 nearly a hundred years ago. 
 
 Christmas Observances in the Americas (Think, December 1938, 2 p., illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. Content interest and activity suggestions 
 apply also to elementary. 
 
 Clark, Kenneth S. The Everybody Sing Book. New York. Pauli-Pioneer 
 Music Corp. 1935. 
 
 Contains standard favorites in English, “Cielito Lindo,” “La Cucaracha,” 
 etc. 
 
 Cugat, Xavier. The Other Americas. Pamphlet. New York. Edward B. 
 Marks Music Corp. 1938. 64 p., illus. 
 
 See Junior High School listing of this useful reference. 
 
 Duckworth, Thomas. Carnaval Carioca (Brazil Today, December 1940, p. 10 
 illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. Pictures and content interest for elementary 
 grades. Festivals in other lands. 
 
 Edwards, Agustin R. The Ski Fields of Chile (Bull. Pan Amer. Union , 
 February 1938, p. 81-87, illus.). 
 
 Ski areas of Chile and suggestions as to equipment visitors will need, with 
 fine illustrations of El Tronador, Mt. Osorno, Farellones, ski fields near Santi¬ 
 ago and general mountain scenes. 
 
 Festivals of Friendship (Bull. Pan. Amer. Union, September 1941, p. 529-537, 
 illus.). 
 
 Pan American Day (April 14) 1941 was celebrated from Greenfield, Iowa to 
 Santiago de Chile—in Mexico City, Panama, La Paz, Quito, Montevideo, 
 Rio de Janeiro, and Itagassu, to mention some of the places in countries south. 
 Pageants, festivals, parties, contests, radio broadcasts, and dedication ceremonies 
 took place. Presidents, diplomats, and distinguished figures such as Gabriela 
 Mistral the Chilean poet, societies and clubs with cultural aims, schools and 
 businessmen took part. Interesting especially to teachers who are planning 
 festivals. 
 
 490718 0 - 42 -6 
 
72 
 
 Folk Dances of Spanish America (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, November 1939, 
 p. 652-658, illus.). 
 
 Dances that have developed in Argentina, Chile, Colombia, Cuba, Panama, 
 Peru, Mexico are explained. For example, cattle-raising people isolated in 
 the middle of the pampa, know the strategic and friendly virtues of the circle, 
 the ring, and the pericon, a rural dance accompanied by words as well as music 
 has been interpreted as a symbol of tribal spirit. It is native to the pampas 
 of both Argentina and Uruguay. The Chilean cueca, the Peruvian marinera, 
 the sanjuanito of Ecuador, the bambuco of Colombia, the tamborito of Panama, 
 the Cuban son, and the Mexican jarabe tapatio are likewise described. Bits of 
 music accompany the text, also interesting illustrations. Useful for a general 
 idea of the steps as well as for appreciation and interpretation. 
 
 Galarza, Ernesto. Latin America Makes Music (Jr. Red Cross Jour., Decem¬ 
 ber 1940, p. 106-108, illus.). 
 
 Excellent overview (see Junior High School listing) with content interest for 
 elementary grades. 
 
 Garvin, Helen. Fun and Festival from Latin America. Friendship Press. 
 150 5th Avenue, New York. 1935. 25^. 
 
 Pamphlet offering vivid glimpses of Latin-American festivals, of especial 
 value to the elementary teacher who wishes to dramatize customs. Sketches 
 events commemorated by various patriotic and religious holidays and customs 
 associated with each. Contains several songs with simple notation, two play¬ 
 lets, and recipes for typical dishes. Compact, comprehensive so far as it 
 attempts to go. 
 
 Grueninger, Walter F. Musical Introduction to Latin America (Parents’ Mag., 
 October 1941, 6 p.). 
 
 The author states that no fewer than 209 different Latin American musical 
 forms have been recorded and proceeds to recommend a number of records 
 which according to his experience children enjoy. Valuable information con¬ 
 cerning the music characteristic of several countries. 
 
 Hall, Robert King. Sport without Latitude (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, February 
 
 1938, p. 97-108, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. Content interest for elementary grades. 
 
 Heim, H. E. Pan American Day (Hispania, February 1941, p. 116-123). 
 
 A guide for teachers who desire to celebrate Pan American Day. Sugges¬ 
 tions for assembly programs, for classroom use, and for extracurricular activi¬ 
 ties in grades 6B through the Junior High School are given. Good bibliography 
 for books, periodicals, lantern slides, etc. 
 
 Hernandez, Francisco. Fiestas in Peru (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, November 
 
 1939, illus.). 
 
 Three festivals and the market of Huancayo, a Sunday fair that dates from 
 very early times, are described in this article, which will be useful for curri¬ 
 culum materials at all teaching levels. Illustrations showing costumes. The 
 Fiesta de Amancaes is the St. John’s Day celebration which takes its distinc¬ 
 tive name from the yellow flowers which cover the plain outside the city where 
 the celebration is held. Indian dances and music characterize this traditional 
 festival which has been officially proclaimed the “Day of the Indian.’' The 
 feast of the Cross (May 3rd) replaced the Inca “Aymuray” (harvest month) 
 celebration. The newly established festival of the Vintage is much like apple- 
 blossom festivals in apple-growing localities of the United States. Teachers 
 directing the construction of musical instruments will be interested in illus¬ 
 tration of Ecuadorean musician with pan-pipes made of reeds. Scenes from 
 the market at Huancayo could be reproduced in painting or diorama. 
 
 Merchant, Anyda. Midwinter’s Eve in Brazil (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, Feb¬ 
 ruary 1932, p. 103-104). 
 
 Account of Brazilian midwinter festival suitable for teacher to tell and class 
 to illustrate. St. John’s Eve, a midsummer festival in Europe, became a mid¬ 
 winter festival in Brazil. Its occurrence at the coldest part of the year in 
 Brazil is significant because fire is the outstanding feature in this celebration. 
 There is a folk tale associated with the feast which claims that St. Elizabeth 
 used a pole with a fire at its base to announce the birth of St. John to her 
 cousin the Virgin Mary. Now, before the feast day long poles with banners 
 
73 
 
 or figures of St. John at the top are set up in gardens and in front of houses 
 to indicate that there will be a celebration. The teacher will find this refer¬ 
 ence one that may be enlarged and extended. In Language Arts: Bible stories 
 of St. John; conversation, story telling, and story writing. Social studies: 
 Man continually makes adaptations to changing conditions. Art: painting 
 of bonfire scenes and street venders with their wares. 
 
 Labastille, Irma. Canciones Tfpicas. New York. Silver Burdett Co. 1941. 
 48 p., illus. 
 
 Contains the words and scores of 19 characteristic Latin American songs. 
 Valuable explanations concerning each one of them. Illustrations show typical 
 musical instruments. 
 
 - Under the Southern Stars: A Latin American Fiesta. New York. 
 
 Silver Burdett Co. 1941. 18 p. 
 
 Contains directions for costuming, music, dances to be used in connection 
 with the fiesta, also information as to sources of photographs. 
 
 Merida, Carlos. Pre-Hispanic Dance and Theatre ( Theatre Arts Monthly , 
 August 1938, p. 561-569, illus.). 
 
 An admirable article on the traditional dances of Mexico, most of which are 
 ritual and may be seen only on festal days. The Spanish influence is hardly 
 perceptible in some of them. Photographs of dancers, showing costumes and 
 masks; remarkable drawings by the author give an excellent idea of the rhythm 
 of some of the most unusual dances and the characteristic accessories worn bv 
 the performers. Merida believes that it will be possible to create a Mexican 
 theatre just as it was possible to create Mexican painting. 
 
 Moore. Robert W. Carioca Carnival (Natl. Geog., September 1939, p. 283-324, 
 color plates). 
 
 Thirty-four pictures on interest at all age levels, with content material as 
 noted in Junior High School listing. 
 
 National Anthems of the Countries of North, Central, and South America. Chi¬ 
 cago. Clayton F. Summy Co. 1935. 72 p.-$1.00. 
 
 Twenty-two anthems, arranged and edited for voice and piano by Ernesto 
 Murillo; for teacher at all levels. Each anthem is in accordance with the official 
 version as legally adopted and endorsed by its respective government, and the 
 music in each case has been so arranged that it may be played either as a piano 
 solo or as an accompaniment to the singing. Includes Canada’s. Pamphlet 
 containing English words for Latin American anthems, and published by the 
 same company, sells for 250. 
 
 Newhall, Beatrice. Eight Independence Days (Bull. Pan Ainer. Union , 
 September 1934, p. 672-674). 
 
 Eight of the American republics celebrate independence days in September: 
 Brazil, Chile, Mexico, and the five Central American republics—Costa Rica, 
 El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, and Nicaragua. This article sketches 
 briefly the conditions which led to the declarations of independence and the 
 manner in which liberty was achieved as well as the ceremonies which mark 
 observance of these holidays. Social studies material above fourth grade 
 level to be extended and developed by teacher. 
 
 Overbeck, Alicia O’Reardon. Bolivia, Land of Fiestas (Natl. Geog., November 
 1934, p. 645-660, illus.). 
 
 For teachers of junior high school (no reference to child life). For six years 
 the author made her home in a tin mining camb 12,000 feet above the sea and 
 observed the fiesta customs through which Indian laborers found beauty and 
 expression in that bleak environment. Costumes and customs recall ancient 
 pagan rites curiously combined with Christian ritual. The 15 illustrations 
 feature costumes and show community groups and the location of the mining 
 camp. An outline map completes the picture. 
 
 Pages from the Codex Borbonicus (Theatre Arts Monthly, August 1938, p. 622, 
 illus.). v 
 
 One of the two illustrations reproduced from the Codex Borbonicus in black 
 and white shows a children’s festival dance around a pole decorated with pen¬ 
 nants and offerings. This will be of special interest as there are a few action 
 pictures of Indian children. 
 
74 
 
 Pan American Union. Partial List of Latin American Music Obtainable in the 
 United States. Pan Amer. Union Music Series, No. 1, March 1941. 25^. 
 
 Mimeographed pamphlet compiled by Gilbert Chase, listing all types of 
 music—orchestra, band, chamber music, violin, piano; songs with piano accom¬ 
 paniment, and choruses are listed. 
 
 Popular Music in Brazil {Think, April 1940, p. 39). 
 
 Out of the fusion of Indian, Negro, Portuguese came the distinctive popular 
 music of Brazil: the Indian marked by strange melody and recitative chant, 
 the Negro by a highly developed sense of rhythm. The teacher will find this 
 article helpful in appreciation of Brazilian music and in understanding of the 
 Brazilian people. 
 
 Reynolds, Dorothy. Rockets, Flutes, and Marching Saints (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union. July 1941, illus.). 
 
 Recommended for detailed description of costumes and ceremonies celebrat¬ 
 ing the days set aside to honor patron saints. Little of the social significance 
 or aesthetic value to the participants is noted. 
 
 Sedgwick, Ruth. Christmas in Andacollo (Bull. Pan Amer. Union , Decem¬ 
 ber 1935, p. 910-916, illus.). 
 
 Account of the annual pilgrimage to honor the Virgin of Andacollo in northern 
 Chile, with description of the semitropical region. The legend of the Indian 
 woodcutter finding the statue of the Virgin is related; and the ceremonies associ¬ 
 ated with the sanctuary are described. 
 
 Smith, Carleton Sprague. The Song Makers ( Surcei / Graphic, March 1941, 
 p. 179-183, illus.). 
 
 The Chief of the Music Division of the New York Public Library gives a gen¬ 
 eral account not Only of Latin American music, but also of the fields of plastic 
 and graphic arts, the stage, movies, radio, and press. The result is a unified 
 feeling of the “here and now” of Latin America as expressed by Latin Americans 
 through the most spontaneous forms. Photographs show composers, painters, 
 and paintings. 
 
 Some Folk Songs and Stories of the Americas (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, February 
 1937, p. 133-200.). 
 
 A section in the Pan American Day Number for 1937. Each of the twenty 
 countries is represented by stories, music, or games. Material on primitive lore 
 of original inhabitants, influence of European colonization, present day customs, 
 folk wisdom common to all races and ages is all within the appreciation range of 
 elementary children. There are two pages of pronouncing vocabulary covering 
 proper names found in the stories and songs, a page of music for the popular 
 Mexican dance the jarabe tapatio and one for Las mananitas costciias, an early 
 morning serenade to greet one on his saint’s day. Five games from Cuba: 
 Tin Can, The Excited Burro, Police and Robbers, the Seven Burros, and Tennis, 
 may be played from the descriptions given. 
 
 Tercero, Jose. Christmas in Mexico (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, December 1931, 
 p. 1232-1236). 
 
 In Mexico the Christmas season begins the night of December 16th. For 
 nine days the efforts of the Virgin and St. Joseph to find shelter in Bethlehem are 
 commemorated by the Posadas, a celebration partly religious and partly non¬ 
 religious (posada is the word for inn). There is a page of music used in the 
 religious celebration, simple enough for the teacher without special musical 
 training and a dialogue between the pilgrims and innkeepers in fourteen stanzas. 
 The decoration of house and patio is described and typical festivities, including 
 the pinata, the suspended jar of goodies, hidden in paper, which a blind folded 
 child must break. Special puestos (stands) spring up overnight in a kind of 
 Christmas fair. Suggested: Christmas programs, building and decorating 
 puestos , decorating and breaking a pinata, and visits where possible to actual 
 festivities. The Posadas are celebrated very beautifully in various centers of 
 Mexican population in the United States, notably Kansas City. 
 
 Think magazine. Pan American Union Number, April 1940, illus. 
 
 This special number of Think, commemorating the Golden Anniversary 
 of the Pan American Union, contains the following articles: “Gaucho Dramas,” 
 “Popular Music in Brazil,” and “Brazilian Literature” which will give the 
 teacher some teaching material and interesting background. 
 
75 
 
 Tigre, Heitor Bastos. Carnival in Brazil {Bull.Pan Amer. Union, November 
 1939, p. 649-651). 
 
 A brief account of the origin and -development of the pre-Lenten carnival, 
 too condensed for children, but which the teacher can interpret and extend. 
 Originally aristocratic, the Rio carnival has gradually changed into a people’s 
 holiday, notable especially for the popular songs which are sung by the good- 
 humored costumed throngs. Music, but not words, for the carnival song “Rio, 
 the Marvelous City” is given. If only one reference can be obtained, this one 
 is recommended as a source of informational material. Story telling and lesson 
 planning for elementary teacher: Monius, the monarch of merry-making, as 
 subject for creative art. 
 
 Videla-Rivera>, C. J. A Few Words on Argentine Music {Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, October 1933, p. 795-800, illus.). 
 
 Historical background of Argentine dances of interest to the teacher of 
 dancing at all levels and to the teacher of social studies at junior high school 
 level. Illustrations show period costumes. Argentine dances reflect the sad¬ 
 ness and violence that constitute the background of the gaucho’s life. The 
 development of the dance parallels changing political and economic conditions. 
 The fandango , malambo, gato, guella, pencdn, cielito, zamba, ranchera, chacarera, 
 chacayalera and the tango are traced to their origin. The haunting tango re¬ 
 ceived admission to polite society only after the World War. 
 
 Williams, Maynard Owen. Buenos Aires: Queen of the River of Silver (A J atl. 
 Geog., November 1939, p. 561-601, illus.). 
 
 Includes material on the tango (p. 585-586) of interest for interpretation; 
 no description of dance is given. The author states that the style of the dance 
 was fashioned by gaucho boots, and did not win the approval of Argentine 
 society until the French had taken it up. 
 
 Zanzig, Augustus D. Music’s Good Neighborliness in the Americas ( Recreation, 
 April 1941, p. 3-10, illus.). 
 
 The article deals with a conference held in Washington in October 1939 at the* 
 invitation of Secretary Hull which brought together outstanding leaders in 
 music education and recreation to discuss inter-American relations in the field 
 of music. Some of the developments growing out of this conference are listed 
 and explained. Good suggestions for singing, dancing, and other activities. 
 
 -Singing America. Compiled, arranged and edited for the National 
 
 Recreation Assn. Boston. C. C. Birchard & Co. 
 
 Collection of 120 songs and choruses, published in a vocal edition (1940) and 
 with piano accompaniments (1941). Contains 14 folk songs of Argentina, 
 Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Cuba, Ecuador, Mexico, Peru, and Puerto Rico with 
 original texts and English translations, also a guide to Spanish pronunciation; 
 also 4 Canadian songs, 35 distinctively United States songs and nearly as many 
 songs which are taking root along with the people who have come to the New 
 World in recent years. For music classes, auditorium, chorus groups. 
 
 KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Bull. Pan Amer. Union_Bulletin of the Pan American Union 
 
 Jr. Red Cross Jour_Junior Red Cross Journal 
 
 Jr. Red Cross News_American Junior Red Cross News 
 
 Natl. Geog_National Geographic Magazine 
 

 
 76 
 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 :• 
 
 •> 
 
 , 
 
 . . S 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V • ; ; 
 
 
 fi * irt 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * t ■ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 77 
 
 
 TEACHERS ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
78 
 
 TEACHERS ADDITIONS 
 
{ Children of the Other Americas } 
 
 ARTS AND HANDICRAFTS 
 
 ( 79 ) 
 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 Page 
 
 I. Introduction _ 83 
 
 II. References for the Primary Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 83 
 
 III. References for the Intermediate Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 84 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 85 
 
 IV. References for the Junior High School: 
 
 1. Books_i_ 86 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 86 
 
 V. References for the Teacher: 
 
 1. Books_ 88 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 90 
 
 Key to Abbreviations__— 95 
 
 ( 81 ) 
 
/ 
 
ARTS AND HANDICRAFTS 
 
 I. INTRODUCTION 
 
 Many of our Latin American neighbors are known to us by their 
 colorful handicrafts. For hundreds of years, long before Columbus 
 touched shore in the New World, skilled craftsmen in the Americas 
 wrought beautiful things. The sure touch of the potter, the skilled 
 fingers of the weaver and the deft, patient hands of the carver have 
 left a record of their culture. Then as now the craftsman combined 
 beauty and utility. The exquisite work from loom and clay, from 
 metal and wood found in museums today were likely reserved for 
 ceremonial use. Scarcely less beautiful, however, were the things 
 made for everyday use. 
 
 Although the encroachment of a modern world is reflected in some 
 of the handicraft, there still are and will continue to be fine crafts from 
 the hands of the craftsmen who with infinite patience and skill work 
 for the joy of making a beautiful thing. 
 
 Some references to modern painting and to recent trends in Latin 
 American art as well as to a few pictures by Latin American artists 
 reproduced in magazines have been listed. Several art and handicraft 
 projects worked out in various schools in the United States have been 
 included. Art is an extension of daily life, and so far as possible 
 references were selected which not only describe the various handi¬ 
 crafts but tell something of the craftsman, his home, his tools and his 
 materials, which like the inspiration for his designs, come from his 
 surroundings. Children will delight in imitating the experiences of 
 the children in the stories. And in molding a pottery bowl, weaving 
 a belt or carving mask or tray they will increase their appreciation of 
 the craft and develop greater understanding of the children of Latin 
 America. 
 
 II. REFERENCES FOR THE PRIMARY GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Bannon, Laura. Manuela’s Birthday in Old Mexico. Chicago. Albert Whit¬ 
 man & Co. 1939. 46 p., illus. 
 
 The detailed description of how Manuela’s friends make a doll for her birth¬ 
 day will help children who read the book to make one for themselves. Attrac¬ 
 tive illustrations in color include different Mexican dolls which children would 
 enjoy making. Well told story, simple language. Excellent for doll project. 
 Barris, Anna Andrews. Bed Tassels for Huki in Peru. Chicago. Albert 
 Whitman & Co. 1939. 62 p., illus. 
 
 The description of the interior of a home and the good pictures of Indian 
 costumes in this story about a llama who ran away, would be useful in art 
 classes and handicraft. Good information on llamas, on customs; detailed 
 description of a dance, which children could read and follow. 
 
 ( 83 ) 
 
84 
 
 Durfee, Helen, and John McMorris. Mateo and Lolita. Boston. Hough¬ 
 ton, Mifflin Co. 1939. 62 p., illus. 
 
 Of particular interest to classes in handicraft would be the information on 
 spinning and pottery. Classes would also find interest in making a market 
 or the floating gardens at Xochimilco which are described. In addition to the 
 above, there is much good information on life in Mexico, told in simple language 
 and illustrated with excellent photographs. Useful as a supplementary reading 
 book. 
 
 Gill, Richard C., and Helen Hoke. Paco Goes to the Fair. New York. 
 Henry Holt & Co. 1940. 39 p., illus. 
 
 Story of a family of weavers in Ecuador. Paco gets into trouble when he 
 uses the wrong dye, but when he finds more which turns out to be a lovely 
 shade of red he sells the yarn and gets an unexpected trip to the fair. The 
 excellent views of house interiors as well as the pictures of spinning and 
 weaving could serve as a basis for projects in handicraft and art. 
 
 Morrow, Elizabeth. The Painted Pig. New York. The Macmillan Co. 
 1930. 32 p., illus. 
 
 Pedro wanted a painted pig and, tired of waiting for the toy maker to fill 
 his order, he tried to make one himself. The result wasn’t satisfactory and at 
 last when he had all but given up hope of ever owning a painted pig, the toy 
 maker surprised him with a beautiful one. A book for pleasure reading and 
 for arts and crafts. Illustrated in color. 
 
 III. REFERENCES FOR THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Bontemps, Arna, and Langston Hughes. Popo and Fifina. New York. 
 The Macmillan Co. 1932. 100 p., illus. 
 
 The everyday life of two children of Haiti. The incident of the little boy 
 who makes a beautiful carved tray would be of interest to children in handicraft 
 classes. 
 
 Burbank, Addison. The Cedar Deer. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 
 1940. 156 p., illus. 
 
 The story of a little Indian boy of Guatemala who carves a deer from wood 
 with such skill that it is worthy to be a gift for the President. The description 
 of the many different costumes of the Indian tribes, together with information 
 on the fiestas would be of particular interest to classes in handicraft. History, 
 legends, as well as information on present-day life make this a useful reference. 
 Some of the illustrations are in color. Glossary of Spanish, Indian words. 
 
 Cannon, Marian. Children of the Fiery Mountain. New York. E. P. Dutton 
 & Co. 1940. 96 p., illus. 
 
 A well-told story of everyday life on a coffee plantation in Guatemala. There 
 is good action, including a volcanic eruption. Useful for handicraft because 
 directions are given for making a nacimiento (model of the birth-scene at 
 Bethlehem). For a Christmas project. 
 
 Coatsworth, Elizabeth. The Boy With the Parrot. New York. The Mac¬ 
 millan Co. 1930. 101 p., illus. 
 
 Adventures of a village boy in Guatemala who starts out with a peddler’s 
 pack. In Antigua he tries his hand at making a whistle of clay, and delights 
 the toymaker with his skill. Told with understanding. Some history is 
 introduced. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Letters from Guatemala. New World Neighbors Series. Bos¬ 
 ton. D. C. Heath Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Letters which a young American boy visiting in Guatemala writes back to 
 his friend. Of particular interest in this section is his visit to the potter’s and 
 to a weaving village. He also tells of his visits on banana and coffee plantations, 
 and of life in a Guatemalan school and the Christmas and Independence Day 
 celebrations. Illustrated in color. 
 
 -Panchita: A Little Girl of Guatemala. New York. Ilarcourt, Brace 
 
 & Co. 1941. 180 p., illus. 
 
 Six-year old Panchita could not sit still to make pottery to sell at market, 
 as her family always had, until she saw in a store window in the City a golden - 
 
85 
 
 haired doll. Then she determined to make a tea set, the most difficult thing 
 of all, to earn money with which to buy “Little Princess.” How Panchita 
 made the tea set but nearly lost “Little Princess,” how her mother and father 
 and wise grandmother looked on her venture, all the details of life in the little 
 pink house are skillfully set forth. There is much information on pottery¬ 
 making, food, dress, farming and fiestas in Guatemala. The illustrations have 
 character. 
 
 Lee, Melicent Humason. Marcos, the Mountain Boy. Chicago. Albert 
 Whitman & Co. 1937. 79 p., illus. in color. 
 
 The experiences of young Marcos who leaves his mountain home to go to the 
 City. On the way he meets many people, all engaged in different occupations— 
 a basketmaker, a carver, a potter, and a weaver. Excellent illustrations in 
 color. Good for arts and crafts and for supplementary reading. 
 
 McConnell, Dorothy F., and Margaret E. Forsyth. Sugar is Sweet. New 
 York. Friendship Press. 1930. 122 p. 
 
 Well-told stories of Cuba, Haiti, Jamaica, and Santo Domingo. The 
 Singing Potter is particularly good. The book also contains good suggestions 
 for teachers in using the material in their classses. 
 
 Purnell, Idella. Pedro the Potter. New York. Thomas Nelson & Sons. 
 1933. 144 p., illus. 
 
 Story of life in a Mexican potter’s family. Pedro heads the family when his 
 father is unjustly accused of a crime and is forced to hide in the ravine. Pedro 
 finally goes to the city to assist a mural painter and himself paints a mural. 
 Use in connection with arts and crafts. 
 
 Smith, Susan. Tranquilina’s Paradise. Minton. 1930. 42 p., illus. 
 
 The story of the little toy angel carved of wood who leads the other toys to 
 Paradise. Their experiences there make interesting reading. Good for read¬ 
 ing for pleasure and as an inspiration for arts and handicraft classes. 
 
 Von Hagen, Victor Wolfgang. Riches of South America. New World 
 Neighbors Series. Boston. D. C. Heath & Co. 1941. 
 
 One of the New World Neighbors series containing material on tin, balsa 
 wood, chocolate, coffee, and* weaving Panama hats. The latter material 
 could be used in handicrafts and the material on commodities in connection 
 with social studies and nature study. 
 
 Weil, Ann. The Silver Fawn. Indianapolis. Bobbs-Merrill Co. 1939. 228 
 
 p., illus. 
 
 The story of a little Mexican boy who contributes his own little silver fawn 
 to the success of the silver shop which his American friend opens, told with 
 charm and understanding. There is good detailed information on the everyday 
 life and customs which could be used as a basis for units on Mexico, with 
 emphasis on handicrafts, art, and customs. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Mead, Edith. Inca Weaving (Story Parade, April 1939, p. 48-50, illus.). 
 
 Industrial arts activity. The directions are so clear that children will be 
 able to follow them without adult supervision, and in rural schools older chil¬ 
 dren could help the younger ones. Belts, or even bags, shawls, caps, in Inca 
 color and design may be woven, using ready-made looms from Woolworth’s 
 or a chalk or cheese box. Wool yarn is the material suggested, and the pat¬ 
 terns are pictured, with parts clearly labeled. 
 
 Oberhauser, Ann. An Argentine Cart {Jr. Arts and Activ., February 1941, 
 p. 13, illus.). 
 
 A pattern-page with complete instructions for making the type of high¬ 
 wheeled cart used in Argentina for travel over the pampas where wheels might 
 sink deep in the mud in the time of rains. For dioramas or sand tables depict¬ 
 ing life on the pampas, and for contrast with carts elsewhere. 
 
 - Costa Rican Oxcart {Jr. Arts and Activ., June 1941, p. 23, illus.). 
 
 A pattern for making a Costa Rican oxcart is laid out on the page much as a 
 dress pattern might be. The parts are all labeled, dimensions given, and direc¬ 
 tions for materials and assembling step by step are given in minute detail. 
 Children could follow the directions without adult supervision. The picture 
 of a finished cart shows the decoration which is a characteristic feature of Costa 
 
86 
 
 Rican carts. Each section of the country has a distinct style, and designs are 
 suggested for the children to work out. Useful in a transportation unit, for 
 community life in Costa Rica; for a diorama, for stage equipment. 
 
 Peru: Land of Weavers {Jr. Nat. Ilist., Apiil 1941, p. 4-7, illus.). 
 
 Contrasts clothing of Indians of Peru with that of North American Indians, 
 materials, preparations of yarns, looms, etc. In a land where weaving reached 
 its highest development, tailored clothing was unknown. Nothing was cut to 
 the shape of the body. The illustrations (7) include two designs taken from a 
 vase made centuries ago and modern scenes of llamas weavers at loom, and Peru¬ 
 vian textiles of ancient design. 
 
 IV. REFERENCES FOR THE JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Holton, Priscilla. Chuck Martinez. New York. Longmans, Green & Co. 
 1940. 312 p., illus. 
 
 Information on the everyday life of a group of Mexican schoolboys, including 
 < their athletics, a country fiesta, etc. How Chuck Martinez rescued his father, 
 who was kidnapped by bandits. Children interested in photography and art 
 would find much in common with Chuck who helps out the school’s budget by 
 his photographs, which he tints to order for the customers. 
 
 Lide, Alice Allison. Aztec Drums. New York. Longmans, Green & Co. 
 1938. 139 p., illus. 
 
 The story is laid in the home of an Aztec weaver who has just completed an 
 exquisite robe representing a lifetime of painstaking work which he will enter 
 in the Emperor’s contest. The robe is stolen and in trying to avenge the theft, 
 the weaver’s grandson is forced to flee the city. It is while he is hiding in the 
 jungle, homesick for the loom and the dyes of the weaver’s home, that he con¬ 
 ceives the idea of making a robe of feathers. His narrow escapes in gathering 
 the feathers create many tense moments in the story, and his return to his 
 grandfather’s house to make the robe give many interesting details of this 
 ancient art for which the Aztecs were famous. Good material for handicraft 
 and art classes. 
 
 Malkus, Alida Sims. The Dark Star of Itzd. New York. Harcourt, Brace 
 & Co. 1930. 217 p., illus. 
 
 The colorful description of the splendid cities of the Maya and the graphic 
 details of the individual costumes of the high priests, warriors, kings and prin¬ 
 cesses would lend themselves well to art work. The book is a well told Ac¬ 
 tionized story of the Mayan Indians with good background. 
 
 Peck, Anne Merriman. Young Mexico. New York. Robert McBride & Co. 
 1934. 270 p., illus. 
 
 Good, detailed survey of Mexican life in city and village, among upper class 
 and peasants, in tropical lowlands and cold highlands. Markets, fiestas, school, 
 work, history (in brief) are covered. Source material for art and handicrafts 
 in descriptions of markets, fiestas and occasional explicit descriptions of the 
 countryside. 
 
 Smith, Susan. Made in Mexico. New York. Alfred A. Knopf. 1930. 81 p., 
 illus. 
 
 Excellent material on the arts and crafts of Mexico, indicating the regions 
 in which each is made Also good chapters on Mexican kitchens, markets, 
 tovs and masks, all described in sufficient detail to be used in class units. In 
 addition to material on arts and crafts, the book includes several legends con¬ 
 cerning the Virgin of Guadalupe, the famous Talavera pottery of Puebla, also 
 the legend of Tehuantepec and of the China Pohlana. Good illustrations and 
 photographs of Mexican handicrafts. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 De Quiros, Cesareo Bernaldo. The Keeper of the Harness {Jr. Red Cross 
 Jour., February 1940, color plate). 
 
 Painting by the Argentine artist Cesareo Bernaldo de Quiros. For art 
 appreciation, social studies. 
 
87 
 
 De Quir6s Cesareo Bernaldo. Pioneer Gaucho Days (Natl. Geog ., October 
 1933, p. 453-160, 8 color plates). 
 
 Eight paintings of gaucho life depicting significant characters are here 
 reproduced. Red was the color worn by gaucho soldiery in the civil war and is 
 the dominant color used by the artist. Junior high school children will like 
 especially “The Master,” “The Justice of the Peace” and “The Chieftains.” 
 
 Galarza, Ernesto. Living Art in Latin America (Jr. Red Cross Jour., October 
 1940. p. 35-38, illus.b 
 
 Summarizes the major epochs of Indian, Hispanic and modern culture in 
 republics to the south, and shows how art has been part of life and death to the 
 people through all three ages. The sequence is treated as a play: In the first act, 
 indigenous people build temples, carve statues, mold pottery, weave and paint 
 murals of the gods they recognized. The second act is the retreat of these people, 
 their civilization wrecked by conquerors: the conquerors trying for three hundred 
 years to recreate in America the art of their homeland. The third act is the rise 
 of new artists who partake of both cultures and try to tell the whole story of 
 their people, and who do it so strikingly that the world listens. For concept and 
 concrete detail, this is an unusually valuable single introductory reference which 
 junior high school students can read for themselves. 
 
 Lemos, Pedro J. de. Colonial Days Lived Again (School Arts, November 1940, 
 p. 87-94, illus.). 
 
 The Director of the Museum of Fine Arts, Stanford University, describes in 
 architectural detail the “House in Antigua” which the Popenoes recreated and 
 which Louis Adamic made the subject of a reflective book. Photographs and 
 plan drawings give a good idea of the house as it was before and after recon¬ 
 struction, and a sense of the architecture of the Colonial period and the kind 
 of life it housed which will serve as an approach to the Colonial period in other 
 countries as well. Other articles by the same author originally published in 
 School Arts may be found together with this one in a new book Guatemala Art 
 Crafts described under Books. 
 
 Mead, Edith. Inca Weaving (Story Parade , April 1939, p. 48-50, illus.). 
 
 See Intermediate list. 
 
 Oetting, Jr., R. H. Panama Hats in Ecuador (Grace log, May-June 1934, p. 
 479-481, illus.). 
 
 “Panama” hats are actually woven where the palmetto fiber is grown, chiefly 
 in Ecuador, Colombia, and northern Peru. These finest woven of straw hats 
 were discovered by the forty-niners when they returned from the gold coast of 
 California via the sea route and overland across the isthmus. Machines have 
 not been able to duplicate the weaver’s craft, and the sensitive fibers are still 
 meshed by hand into hats whose fineness may be judged by the number of 
 rings. The average is from seven to ten; the finest, thirteen or slightly more. 
 The article describes the palmetto which is the source of the fibers, steps in 
 processing, weaving, bleaching, the workers and working conditions, cost of the 
 hats, and their distribution. 
 
 Searles, Ruth. Made in the Americas (Jr. Red Cross Jour., March 1941, p 
 212-214, illus.). 
 
 Handicrafts of various Latin American countries in relation to economic 
 problems caused by the war. Nicaragua specializes in embroidered goods and 
 articles made from reptile leather; Chile is noted for hand-wrought articles in 
 copper and silver, and distinctive woven bracelets and artificial flowers made 
 from brilliantly dyed horsehair. Costa Rica’s fancy woods, including coffee, 
 make desk sets, powder boxes, and fruit bowls. Cuban seeds make necklaces, 
 bracelets, rosaries. Photographs show textile, gourd, glass, gold, and silvor 
 articles. For appreciation of handicraft may suggest to the teacher experiments 
 with materials near at hand. 
 
 Spanish Colonial Leathercraft (School Arts, April 1941, p. 354, illus.). 
 
 With increasing emphasis on beauty in utilitarian articles, the grace and 
 beauty given to common things by the people of the colonial epoch has special 
 interest. The chair and chest illustrated show the art of carved and modeled 
 leather and the art of woodcarving. For arts and crafts, and for appreciation 
 
 490718 0 - 42 -7 
 
88 
 
 Suarez, Alfredo Galvez. Guatemala Indian Mask-maker (,School Arts, June 
 1941, frontispiece). 
 
 Reproduction of a water color painting of the Guatemalan artist Alfredo 
 GJlvez Suarez. Children will enjoy the absorption of the Indian mask-maker 
 in his work and the masks displayed in the picture. Interesting in connection 
 with interpretation of mask-wearing by primitive people. Suggests creative 
 activity in mask-making and in paper sculpture. 
 
 Texada, Leonardo. Cacao (Jr. Red Cross Jour., September 1940, front cover). 
 
 Interesting painting showing workers handling cacao pods, by Leonardo 
 Texada, of Ecuador. For art appreciation, suggestions for original creation; 
 as illustration of present tendency among painters in the Americas to choose 
 autochthonous themes. 
 
 V. REFERENCES FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Brenner, Anita. Idols Behind Altars. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1929. 359 p., illus. 
 
 The first part of this book surveys the history of Mexico, while Chapters 
 11-18, inclusive, are devoted to Mexican artists and their works: Merida, 
 Posada, Orozco, Siqueiros, Diego Rivera, Francisco Goitia, Jean Chariot are 
 among those included. An appendix contains notes on each of the 118 illus¬ 
 trations included in the book. Many of the notes give bibliographical mate¬ 
 rial on the artist, as well as information relating to the execution of the work 
 portrayed. 
 
 Burbank, Addison. Guatemala Profile. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 
 1939. 306 p., illus. 
 
 An artist’s account of his year’s residence in Guatemala and the entertain¬ 
 ing experiences he had painting Indians in busy market places, at crowded 
 fiestas, in out-of-the-way villages, at the loom, shaping clay, at work on the 
 great plantations. He interprets the country and people from the artist’s v 
 point of view and his book is filled with charming, lifelike pen-and-ink sketches. 
 There is also much information about life on the plantations and word pictures 
 which catch the color and movement at market and fiesta. A long glossary 
 of Indian and Spanish words adds to the value of the book. 
 
 Green, Philip Leonard. Our Latin American Neighbors. New York. Hastings 
 H ouse. 1941. 182 p. 
 
 In a condensation of but 15 pages (Chapter 14, p. 140-155), the author has 
 succeeded in giving a great deal of information on the autochthonous, colonial 
 and modern culture of Latin America. Of particular value is the discussion 
 of the literature and writers of the modern period. 
 
 Helm, MacKinley. Modern Mexican Painters. New York. Harper & Bros. 
 1941. 205 p. 
 
 An eminently readable account of contemporary Mexican painters. In 
 addition to giving Rivera, Orozco and Siqueiros their due, the book discusses 
 many other significant but less-known painters. Excellent discussion of 
 Mexican artists who express their environment in spiritual and realistic terms 
 rather than through the popular and quaint externals of cacti and sombreros. 
 Eighty black-and-white and two color plates illustrate the book, and decorative 
 chapter headings add to the attractiveness of format. 
 
 Kelsey, Vera, and Lilly de Jongh Osborne. Four Keys to Guatemala. New 
 York. Funk & Wagnalls. 1939. 332 p., illus. 
 
 The crafts and costumes of the Indians of Guatemala are described in detail 
 in Chapter 6 and 7. Baskets, gourds, mats, rope, ceramics, weaving, spinning, 
 and the regions famous for each are discussed. There is information on textiles, 
 on designs and symbols, on dyeing and the various sources from which the dyes 
 are obtained. Each article in the costumes of men, women, and children is 
 described. 
 
 Lemos, Pedro J. Guatemala Art Crafts. Worcester, Mass. The Davis Press. 
 1941. 40 p., illus. 
 
 The crafts of Guatemala are briefly summarized in this book by the Director 
 of the Stanford University Museum of Fine Arts. As a guide for visitors to 
 
89 
 
 Guatemala, the author has listed the principal towns and villages of the country 
 together with a very brief note about their history and the handicrafts for which 
 they are famous. Weaving, basketry, wood carving, pottery, masks are a few 
 of the many crafts included. More than 100 photographs (three in color) 
 and drawings show the country, the craftsmen and their work. Of particular 
 interest are the various types of looms used by the weavers and the designs 
 peculiar to certain regions. 
 
 Lothrop, Samuel Kirkland. Pottery of Costa Rica and Nicaragua, vol. 1. 
 New York. Museum of the American Indian Heye Foundation. 1926. 
 
 A detailed and technical discussion of the early pottery of Costa Rica and 
 Nicaragua, valuable as a reference book in art and design for the wealth of 
 illustrations, many of them in color, which show minute details of color, shape 
 and patterns of the objects. Many of these designs could be adapted for 
 jewelry, embroidery, and borders. 
 
 Means, Philip A. Peruvian Textiles. New York. The Metropolitan Museum 
 of Art. 1930. 19 p., illus. 
 
 A brief introductory survey of the materials used by the early Peruvian 
 weavers is followed by a short bibliography and chronology of early Peruvian 
 cultures. The body of the book is made up of 24 full-page plates showing 
 Peruvian textiles, which give excellent detail of their design. A descriptive 
 note for each plate tells what the textile pictured was used for, the material of 
 which it is made, its color, an explanation of the design and the dimensions of 
 the article. A useful reference book for classes in design. 
 
 Oglesby, Catharine. Modern Primitive Arts of Mexico, Guatemala and the 
 Southwest. New York. Whittlesey House. McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1939. 
 226 p., illus. 
 
 A survey of the popular arts of Mexico, Guatemala, and the Southwest. The 
 fashioning of pottery, weaving of baskets and fine textiles, the silverware and 
 colorful lacquer are described with interesting detail. The book is recom¬ 
 mended for the chapters pn Mexico and the Southwest, and for the many 
 excellent photographs showing the Indians at work, as well as black and white 
 line drawings of various designs. The book also contains an index, a bibli¬ 
 ography, and a calendar of ceremonies, fiestas, and markets. 
 
 Osborne, Lilly de Jongh. Guatemala Textiles. Middle American Research 
 Series, No. 6. New Orleans. The Tulane University of Louisiana. 1935. 
 110 p., illus. 
 
 An excellent book by a woman who has devoted years to the study of Guate¬ 
 malan textiles and to assembling an outstanding collection. Here the various 
 articles of clothing worn by the Indians of Guatemala and the way these are 
 made are described in detail. There is interesting material in the chapters on 
 dyes and their sources, the meaning of various designs and symbols, Indian 
 market customs and trade routes they follow in marketing their work. The 
 23 photographs and drawings show Indians wearing their local co&tume, differ¬ 
 ent steps in the weaving process, and finished articles of clothing. 
 
 Toor, Frances. Mexican Popular Arts. New York. Crown Publishers. 1939. 
 356 p., illus. 
 
 In this excellent survey of Mexican popular arts, the author has not only 
 described the objects but has also given a sympathetic picture of the craftsmen 
 in their homes and villages. There is a brief summary of the crafts before the 
 conquest and the influence of the Spaniards. Weaving, pottery of many 
 different kinds, reflecting varying locales; jewelry, lacquer work, tin gourds, 
 feather and straw work, and many other crafts are described in simple, non¬ 
 technical language. Musical instruments, toys, fireworks, and masks are also 
 included. Adding greatly to the value of the book are more than 90 excellent 
 illustrations, 7 of which are full-page, in color. The black and white photo¬ 
 graphs show distinctly the details of the designs. Several illustrations of 
 costumes are included. 
 
 Vaillant, George C. Artists and Craftsmen in Ancient Central America. 
 New York. The American Museum of Natural History. 1935. 102 p., illus. 
 
 Contains seven articles on the arts and crafts of ancient Central America 
 reprinted from Natural History. The first is a general article on the Aztecs 
 to give a picture of the physical and social background against which the arts 
 developed. Architecture, sculpture, art, crafts, ornaments, and pottery of 
 
90 
 
 ancient Central America are discussed, in the following articles. More than 
 125 excellent black-and-white drawings illustrate the publication and a biblio¬ 
 graphy adds to its value. 
 
 Aztecs of Mexico. Garden City, N. Y. Doubleday, Doran & Co., 
 Inc. 1941. 340 p., illus. 
 
 A good summary of the handicrafts and fine arts of the Aztecs is found in 
 Chapters 8 and 9. The utensils made for everyday use as well as those made 
 for religious rituals are described. The major portion of Chapter 8 is devoted 
 to description of weaving—textiles and baskets; fehtherwork—for clothing, 
 for ornaments and to depict landscapes and scenes from daily life; woodwork, 
 musical instruments. Copper and gold work and objects made from stone and 
 clay are well described. Twenty half-tone plates, p. 144-145, 160-161, show 
 many examples of the handicrafts described in the text. In Chapter 9 the 
 architecture and sculpture of the Aztecs are described. 
 
 Von Hagen, Victor Wolfgang. Ecuador the Unknown. New York. Oxford 
 University Press. 1940. 296 p., illus. 
 
 Many interesting facts about the Panama hat industry of Ecuador are 
 given in Chapter 5 (p. 41-53), as well as scenes along the highway leading to 
 the Panama hat fair in Cuenca. How the work is distributed and materials 
 given out to the weavers, the finishing process and the shipping are described. 
 There is material on the palm from which the Toquilla straw used in making 
 these hats is obtained, and preparation of the fibers from the palm leaves is 
 explained in detail. There are 4 excellent photographs (p. 32, 33, 48, 49). 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Arciniegas, German. The Little Horses of Raquira. (Bull. Pan Amer. Union , 
 March 1937, p. 246-253, illus.). 
 
 Charming article on the toys that may be seen in Chiquinquird,, Colombia and 
 especially of the little pottery horses from Raquira. Also displayed are tops of 
 tagua; orange-wood balls to catch on a stick; boxes lined with rabbit fur; dimin¬ 
 utive wire-stringed guitars on which children try the first measures of the bam- 
 buco; sets of miniature tagua dishes in which each dish is hardly a quarter of 
 an inch high and a multitude of others of expert creation. The eight illustrations 
 accompanying the article show toys of exquisite workmanship that will not 
 only give the teacher a deeper appreciation of the skilled artists who make them 
 
 . but will offer suggestions for story-telling and creative expression. 
 
 Art of the Twenty-one Republics (Think, April 1940, p. 14-17, illus.). 
 
 A brisk resume of the history of painting in the twenty-one American re¬ 
 publics. A painting by a contemporary artist of each of the countries is repro¬ 
 duced in black and white and accompanied by an account of his career. These 
 paintings are part of a collection owned by the International Business Machines 
 Corporation, exhibited at the Golden Gate International Exposition in San 
 Francisco and at the Corcoran Gallery in Washington during the fiftieth 
 anniversary celebration of the Pan American Union. 
 
 Bennett, Wendell. Weaving in the Land of the Incas (Nat. Hist., June 1935, 
 p. 65-72, illus.). 
 
 Description of clothing worn by men and women as recorded by writers at 
 the time of the conquest and as evidenced bv specimens found in tombs in the 
 dry desert region along the coast of Peru; fabrics used to make these garments 
 and the manner in which they were processed; the primitive loom; the weaving 
 process; tapestry technique, pattern weaving. Illustration and explanation 
 of the operation of a Peruvian loom, valuable for teacher at elementary level 
 interested in weaving, making looms, and knowing how early people wove their 
 fabrics. Other illustrations show tapestries, looms and spinning implements, 
 clothing, also a “mummy bundle.” 
 
 Burgos, Fausto. The Inca Loom. (Bull. Pan. Amer. Union, April 1927, 
 p. 353-356, illus.). 
 
 The seven illustrations are of unusual value to teachers of industrial arts at 
 all levels. The texts give their historic setting and present day significance. 
 An ancient vase preserved in a Lima museum depicts the same simple loom still 
 used by dwellers on the high Peruvian plateau. 
 
91 
 
 The Carnegie Institution of Washington. Textile Arts of the Guatemalan Natives 
 (News Service Bull., School Ed.), Feb. 3, 1935, p. 159-168, illus.). 
 
 Numerous excellent photographs, definitely selected to show detail of cos¬ 
 tumes and textile design. Two full-page color photographs show a group of 
 Indian women in the market place and a young woman showing her hand-woven 
 huipil (worn as an unbelted blouse). Dress of both men and women is de¬ 
 scribed. The map showing clearly the region of the ancient Maya and indi¬ 
 cating the extent of both the Old and the New Empire, is worth enlarging for 
 classroom use; the explanatory note is concise and clear. 
 
 Children’s art Exhibit of the Western Hemisphere (Progressive Ed., October 1941, 
 p. 316-317, illus.). 
 
 Reproduces five pictures painted by children in Mexico, Cuba, Canada and 
 the United States which suggest different experience of the child painters. From 
 the exhibit collection of the Progressive Education Association, 221 W. 57th St., 
 New York City; write directly for information about extent of collection and 
 availability for loan. 
 
 Columbus Day Diorama (School Arts, September 1941, p. 19-20). 
 
 Inviting directions for producing a scene from the story of Columbus, so 
 carefully illustrated that a novice in arts and crafts could carry out a project, 
 combining mural painting and stagecraft on a miniature scale. It is stated 
 that the “peep-show” of the nineties grew up into the diorama, with its capacity 
 for integrating almost all school subjects. An article entitled “The True Story 
 of Columbus” on p. 29 of the same issue is a handy source of dramatic material. 
 
 D’Harnoncourt, Rene. An Authentic Exposition of Mexican Art. (Modern 
 Mexico, September 1930, p. 25-28, illus.). 
 
 An account of the first comprehensive collection of contemporary art of 
 Mexico exhibited in the United States, shown first at the Art Center of New 
 York. Among the exhibits reproduced in the 14 illustrations are hand-woven 
 palm leaf baskets and toys woven of palm leaves; pottery animals; wood sculp¬ 
 ture; Mexican wood inlay; hard blown glass. For background and appre¬ 
 ciation of Mexican art. 
 
 -—- Pancho the Tov Maker (Mexican Folkways, vol. 4, no. 2, April-June, 
 
 1928, illus.). 
 
 An excellent article for insight into the philosophy of the Indian craftsmen 
 who never willingly make two articles alike, and who will refuse to sell their 
 wares on the way to market, because the festival atmosphere means more than 
 profit. The author comments on the similarity of some of Pancho’s effects, 
 independently arrived at, with blown-glass whimsies of Europe’s most sophisti¬ 
 cated art. The fact is that Pancho is prfoundlv versed in human wisdom and 
 has a nice appreciation of the ironies of life, as his humble sad clay pig in¬ 
 congruously decked with ornate flowers bears witness. 
 
 -- The Exposition of Mexican Art. (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, October 
 
 1930, p. 981-991, illus.) 
 
 Interesting bits of history for the student of art. Illustrations are of general 
 interest; primitive ceremonial masks, primitive pottery, and an oil on tin 
 painting by Diego Rivera. 
 
 De Quiros, Cesareo Bernaldo. The Keeper of the Harness (Jr. Red Cross 
 Jour., February 1940, color plate). 
 
 See Junion High School list. 
 
 - Pioneer Gaucho Daj 7 s (Natl. Geog., October 1933, p. 453-460, 8 color 
 
 plates). 
 
 See Junior High School list. For intermediate grades, with teacher’s guidance. 
 
 Dorado Ciiopitea, Carlos. Indoamerican Art (Bolivia, July-August 1941, p. 
 10-14, illus.). 
 
 Illuminating comments on the influence of the Mexican art Renaissance upon 
 Bolivian art. The author states that the necessity of communicating a message 
 for the unlettered people and the ideal of endowing with dignity the Indian 
 past and the Indian’s present contribution to culture was given social purpose 
 by the muralists of Mexico and South America. The work of the Mexican 
 masters, Diego Rivera and Jose Clemente Orozco and the accomplishments of 
 the Bolivian artists Cecilio Guzm&n de Rojas, Jorge de la Raza and Marina 
 Nunez del Prado are discussed. 
 
92 
 
 Galarza, Ernesto. Living Art in Latin America {Jr. Red Cross Jour., October 
 
 1940, p. 35-38, illus.). 
 
 Excellent introduction to the subject, interest for social studies as well as 
 art. See Junior High School listing. 
 
 Grupp, George W. The Churches of Bogota: Their Art and Architecture, 
 {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, February and March 1940). 
 
 James, Concha Romero. Spanish American Art {Handbook of Latin American 
 Studies, 1936-1940.). 
 
 The Handbook of Latin American Studies is a yearly selective guide to material 
 on Latin America published in all languages. A section on art is a regular 
 feature and is preceded by a general statement covering the important art 
 events of the year in Spanish America. The Handbook, formerly edited by 
 Lewis Hanke, is now under the direction of Miron Burgin of the Hispanic 
 Foundation, Library of Congress, Washington. 
 
 Latcham, Ricardo E. and Renjifo, Roberto. Indigenous and Creole Art of 
 Chile. {Bull. Pan. Amer. Union, September 1929, p. 897-912, illus.). 
 
 The article is divided into two parts as indicated in the title. Both ap¬ 
 proaches are historical. For the teacher interested in the history of art, the 
 development of forms, the result of intermingling cultures. “Creole Textile 
 Designs,” the second part, is of more general interest because of its tie-up 
 with clothing and weaving. For teachers and students of history. The 
 illustrations may suggest adaptations in fine and industrial arts. 
 
 Latin American Exhibitions of Fine and Applied Art {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 Jaunary 1940 illus.). 
 
 Nearly three, hundred and fifty works of art from eight Latin American 
 republics, besides Guatemalan Indian textiles, were seen in New York at the 
 Riverside Museum. 
 
 Lee, Leslie W. A Market Scene in Mexico {Instructor, April 1936, p. 44-45, 
 illus.). 
 
 For teachers of primary and intermediate children. There are nine patterns 
 which may be colored, cut out, and mounted and used in dioramas, puppet 
 theaters, etc. Color suggestions are given for costumes and buildings to make 
 a typical Mexican scene. 
 
 Lemos, Pedro J. de. Colonial Days Lived Again {School Arts, November 1940, 
 p. 87-94, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Pictures and content interest for upper ele¬ 
 mentary. 
 
 -*— Mexico: Arts and Crafts {School Arts., illus.). 
 
 Portfolio containing a brief guide to Mexican handicrafts indicating in what 
 cities and villages they may be found. Sixteen plates, some of them in color, 
 add to the value of this folder. 
 
 Looser, Gualterio. Araucanian Textiles {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, April 1927, 
 p. 357-366, illus.). 
 
 Picture of the Araucanian framed in an historical sketch of his art. An 
 Indian population exists near Temuco today where genuine Araucanian weav¬ 
 ing furnishes a livelihood for many families. History and art at higher levels. 
 
 Marina Nunez del Prado: Bolivian Sculptor {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, July 
 
 1941, p. 397-401, illus.). 
 
 Short bibliographical sketch of the young Bolivian sculptor and interpreta¬ 
 tions of some of her outstanding studies on exhibition in the United States. 
 Senorita Nunez del Prado has specialized in sculpture of Bolivian Indians of 
 the high Andes and her Aymard ritual dances combine rhythm and mass. 
 
 Means, Philip Ainsworth. Elena and Victoria Izcue and Their Art {Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, March 1936, illus.). 
 
 Two contemporary Peruvian artists who have perfected a process whereby 
 the ancient Inca methods of preparing and applying vegetable and mineral 
 colors are used in decorating textiles. They are credited with starting a renais¬ 
 sance of the aboriginal art of their country. 
 
 -. Pre-Columbian Andean Art. {Mag. of Art, September 1940, p. 510- 
 
 515, illus.). 
 
 Overview of Andean culture written for the student of art. The general 
 reader will gain an appreciation of the culture of pre-Columbian days that 
 existed in a vast area extending from northern Ecuador down through Peru 
 
93 
 
 and western Bolivia into northwestern Argentina and northern Chile. There 
 is an outline map of the area. The illustrations are photographs of museum 
 pieces—sculpture, portrait pot, feather tunic, embroidery—which the ele¬ 
 mentary teacher may find helpful for story-telling of legends and customs, 
 and for pottery shapes and decoration in handicraft. 
 
 • Pre-Columbian Andean Art. Part II. Pottery ( Mag . of Art, November 
 
 1940, p. 632-636, illus.). 
 
 The second of a series of four articles, in which each is a unit in itself; this 
 one uses pottery as the medium for interpreting pre-Columbian Andean 
 culture. Ignorant of the principle of the wheel, people were dependent on the 
 cunning of their own hands in making pottery. On a large deep bowl, the 
 original in the American Museum of Natural History, the personage shown 
 is thought to be Viracocha, the pre-Incaic Creator-God and Sky-God; another 
 bowl shows a winged warrior attendant of Viracocha. Both designs are large 
 and clear and suitable for reproducing. 
 
 -. Pre-Columbian Andean Art. Part III. Textiles {Mag. of Art, January 
 
 1941, p. 22-28, illus.). 
 
 Knowing only the simplest sorts of looms and other weaving implements 
 the Andeans produced cotton and woolen fabrics which command admiration 
 for technical intricacy and beauty. Rarer materials were occasionally used 
 such as maguey fiber, used for coarse fabrics, human hair, rabbit hair and 
 even bat hair employed in the finest. Nine photographs show techniques of 
 weaving used. There is information about headgear, clothing, ornaments 
 worn. The featherwork garment will appeal to children. 
 
 -. Pre-Columbian Andean Art. Part IV. Metals, Wood, Stone {Mag. of 
 
 Art, May 1941, p. 246-250, illus.). 
 
 The final article in the series deals with the materials used less frequently 
 by the Andeans in their art. Metals did not represent money, and gold and 
 silver were held to be more admirable than copper and bronze only because 
 of their beauty. Legends declare gold the sweat of the sun, and silver, sweat 
 of the moon, cast from them during the making of the world. The illustra¬ 
 tions, photographs of museum pieces, are large and clear and details are care¬ 
 fully explained in the text. Several, such as the mirrors, the spoons, the bronze 
 head for a staff inlaid with copper and silver, may be helpful for social studies 
 material at elementary level; also to stimulate interest in story telling and 
 writing. Text and illustrations have teaching value at all levels. 
 
 Montes de Oca, Josfi G. Mexican Colonial Fountains {Bull. Pan Amer. Union , 
 December 1937, illus.). 
 
 Of the smaller architectural works of art enjoyed by the present generation, 
 unquestionably the public fountains and those in the patios of the buildings 
 formerly residences of the nobility, captivate the imagination. Until the 
 middle of the 19th century the Mexican capital boasted sixty-one ornamental 
 fountains. 
 
 Pleasants, Frederick R. Pre-Columbian Art at the Fogg Museum {Mag. of 
 Art , February 1940, p. 84-91, illus.). 
 
 The writer discusses the painted manuscripts, chronicles of Spanish mis¬ 
 sionaries and military men, and accounts of 19th century explorers and travelers 
 which are the source of our knowledge of pre-Columbian peoples; together with 
 the findings of modern archaeologists. The author notes that the art-styles 
 of pre-Columbian America are as diverse as those of any other large area; 
 their origins are in some cases as far as 4,000 miles apart in space; and 1,500 
 years separates the earliest from the latest. Good illustrations of jadeite 
 figure and mask, pottery and onyx vases, etc., at Fogg Museum (Cambridge, 
 Mass.). Teacher may find on inquiry similar objects or reproductions in 
 museums close at hand. 
 
 Rehnstrand, Jane. When the Art Teacher Goes to Mexico {School Arts , 
 January 1938, illus.). 
 
 A beautifully illustrated article in which an art teacher makes suggestions 
 as to what to see and what to buy for school collections of Mexican arts and 
 crafts. The whole number is dedicated to Mexico and contains unusual 
 illustrations showing costumes, toys, pottery, types of Mexican vendors, 
 decorative motifs for furniture, dolls, etc. 
 
94 
 
 Rodriguez C., Rafael Lucas. Decorated Oxcarts of Costa Rica ( School Arts, 
 November 1940, p. 95-96, 7a, illus.). 
 
 This article will give the elementary teacher ideas for exhibit work and also 
 an appreciation of the beauty expressed in the common things of everyday life 
 by these people. Art teachers will find it useful through elementary grades 
 and junior high. There are two illustrations of decorated oxcarts in use, an 
 illustration of a toy oxcart and a number of designs showing types of oxcart 
 decorations. 
 
 Roquette-Pinto, E. Nanduti. An Indigenous Paraguayan Art. (Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, January 1928, p. 59-66, illus.). 
 
 The nanduti is a Paraguayan lace delicate in texture and fascinating in pat¬ 
 tern. The illustrations show a frame used in making nanduti and a number of 
 motifs. For specialized reading. 
 
 Smith, Robert C. Brazilian Art ( Handbook of Latin American Studies, 1937- 
 40.). 
 
 The Handbook of Latin American Studies is a yearly selective guide to material 
 on Brazil published in all languages. A section on art is a regular feature and is 
 preceded bv a general statement covering the important art events of the year 
 in Brazil. The Handbook, formerly edited by Lewis Hanke, is now under the 
 direction of Miron Burgin of the Hispanic Foundation, Library of Congress, 
 Washington. 
 
 - Brazilian Painting in New York (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, September 
 
 1939, illus.). 
 
 The World’s Fair brought to New York a comprehensive showing of Brazilian 
 art, ranging from conservative academic production to the most stalwart 
 examples of modern regional art. The work of Candido Portinari, leading 
 Brazilian mural painter is outstanding.- 
 
 -- Lasar Segall of Sao Paulo (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, May 1940, illus.). 
 
 Segall, Russian born, has grown with the Brazilian painters and has emerged 
 as one of the outstanding representatives of the Sao Paulo school of authentic 
 Brazilianism in art, music, and literature. 
 
 • -- The Colonial Churches of Brazil (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, January 1938, 
 
 illus.). 
 
 Brazil possesses colonial churches which for size and variety can be compared 
 only with the colonial buildings of Mexico. In style, however, they have nothing 
 to do with Spanish American architecture. 
 
 • -— Three Brazilian Landscapes by Frans Post (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 
 May 1939, p. 271-275, illus.). 
 
 The author states that Frans Fost, the Dutchman, was the earliest landscape 
 painter in the western hemisphere. He came to Brazil in 1637 with Maurice 
 of Nassau and remained there until 1644 when he returned to Holland. Frans 
 Post found in Brazil a type of scenery which save for its tropical qualities 
 resembled the Netherlands countryside, and he reproduced with utmost fidelity 
 “the lagoons, the marshes, the expressive skies of the interminable coastal 
 lowlands.” 
 
 Sombreros, Ponchos, and Serapes: A Mexican Scrapbook (Children's Play Mate, 
 June 1941, p. 32-35, illus.). 
 
 The pictures, patterns, and directions are clear. The teacher will find 
 costume suggestions in the material presented. Children from nine to eleven 
 can tollow r the directions but the interest level is from six to nine. Useful in a. 
 class where older children can assist younger ones in their constructive work. 
 
 Spanish Colonial Leathercraft (School Arts, April 1941, p. 354, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. 
 
 The Story of Mexican Art (Nat. Hist., September 1940, p. 112-118, illus.). 
 
 An interpretation of Aztec civilization through its art. Photographs of 
 museum pieces are used to interpret social life and customs. The Aztec 
 Indians surpassed all others in ceremonial pageantry. Adult reference material 
 for history and art. The photograph of the Tuxtla statuette which until 
 recently bore the oldest American date will be valuable for elementary social 
 studies, for time lines, calendars, and the study of man’s record keeping. 
 
 Suarez, Alfredo Galvez. Guatemala Indian Mask-Maker (School Arts, June 
 1941, frontispiece). 
 
 See Junior High School list. 
 
95 
 
 Texada, Leonardo. Cacao {Jr. Red Cross Jour., September 1940, front cover). 
 
 Painting by Leonardo Texada shows workers handling cacao pods. Inter¬ 
 mediate content interest; see Junior High School listing. 
 
 U. S. Department of Commerce. Specialties Division, U. S. Bureau of Foreign 
 and Domestic Commerce. World Trade in Toys. Washington. 1939. 
 
 Includes a section on Latin America; production and trade in toys of each 
 republic. While this bulletin is prepared for businessmen, it gives the teacher 
 authentic background information and a fresh view of a subject important to 
 children. 
 
 Valverde, Sebastian E. The Cathedral of Santo Domingo {Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, October 1937, illus.). 
 
 This ancient cathedral, a treasury of jewels and relics, is in itself a jewel and 
 a relic as well as a symbol. 
 
 Ward, Constance Allen. The Guatemalan Art Renaissance {Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, May 1941, p. 282-290, illus.). 
 
 Discusses a group of contemporary Guatemalan artists including the sculptor 
 Rafael Yela Gunther, director of the National Academy of Fine Arts; Julio 
 Urruela Vdsquez, noted especially for stained glass and reproductions of Maya 
 woodcarvings; Ovidio Rodas Corzo, co-author of a book on Mava-Quiche sym¬ 
 bols and customs. There are 11 reproductions of works of art. A useful 
 article for tying up the present with the past in Guatemalan art. The ele¬ 
 mentary teacher will be interested in the picture ~“A Zebu at El Zapote”; 
 “Banana Cutters’’ will appeal to junior high school teachers because of its 
 interest for boys. 
 
 White, Victoria. Mexican Scenes in Wall Plaques {Instructor, April 1936, p. 33, 
 illus.). 
 
 Instructions for making plaques in wood, with materials needed. Carefully 
 described, detailed directions. Three plaques illustrated show simple scenes. 
 Middle grades. 
 
 Wigton, Roberta K. A Mexican Tapestry {Instructor, April 1940, p. 30, illus.). 
 
 Directions are given for making a large wall hanging typical of Mexican life. 
 Materials, colors, scenes are suggested. Objectives for incorporating such an 
 activity into curriculum are stated. A finished wall hanging is illustrated. 
 For upper grades. 
 
 KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Bull. Pan Amer. Union 
 
 Jr. Arts and Activ_ 
 
 Jr. Nat. Hist_ 
 
 Jr. Red Cross Jour_ 
 
 Mag. of Art_ 
 
 Natl. Geog_ 
 
 Nat. Hist_ 
 
 News Service Bull_ 
 
 Progressive Ed_ 
 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. 
 Junior Arts and Activities. 
 
 Junior Natural History. 
 
 Junior Red Cross Journal. 
 
 Magazine of Art. 
 
 National Geographic Magazine. 
 Natural History. 
 
 New Service Bulletin, Carnegie Insti¬ 
 tution of Washington. 
 
 Progressive Education. 
 

 96 
 
 
 , 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 ‘ 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
97 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
»s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
{ Children oj the Other Americas } 
 
 FOODS, PLANTS, AND 
 MINERALS 
 
 ( 99 ) 
 
V 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 Page 
 
 I. Introduction_ 103 
 
 II. References for the Primary Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 103 
 
 III. References for the Intermediate Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 104 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets__ 105 
 
 IV. References for the Junior High School: 
 
 1. Books_ 107 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 107 
 
 V. References for the Teacher: 
 
 1. Books_*___ 109 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 110 
 
 Key to Abbreviations_ 115 
 
 ( 101 ) 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 1 
 
 
PLANTS, FOODS, AND MINERALS 
 
 I. INTRODUCTION 
 
 Civilization began when man found ways of storing food to provide 
 against seasonal shortages and so acquired a certain degree of leisure 
 and security. Both the Peruvian Indians and the Mayas had devel¬ 
 oped advanced systems of food production and control which gave 
 them the leisure to develop high cultures. Today in the Americas, 
 science and economic planning are changing agriculture, and these 
 changes affect the way the people live, as some of the following refer¬ 
 ences show. 
 
 Plants of tropical regions often furnish shelter as well as food and 
 not only the trunks of trees but their leaves are used in houses. Gar¬ 
 dens have been a source of pleasure, and flowers a religious offering, 
 since the days of the pre-Christian gods. Travelers may walk today 
 in the park of Moctezuma and in other gardens planted by famous 
 people long dead. The poorest Indian grows flowers and delights in 
 them. 
 
 Some of the plants of Latin America have medicinal properties. 
 Herbs and barks that the witch-doctors use in the jungle are brought 
 to modern laboratories and form the basis of many medicinal products. 
 Plants are the source of many commodities of commerce such as coffee, 
 tagua, rubber, waxes, etc. References describe plant sources and 
 processes through which the materials pass. Some of the references 
 show the people who harvest them at work. 
 
 Latin America is rich in minerals. The earliest Americans did not 
 use metals as money. The gold and silver which the Spaniard sought 
 was prized by the Indian only for beauty and malleability. Today, 
 in a machine-age world, other minerals of Latin America are more 
 important. Some of the references discuss the strategic mineral sub¬ 
 stances necessary for war. 
 
 II. REFERENCES FOR THE PRIMARY GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 % 
 
 Duarte, Margarida Estrela Bandeira. Legend of the Palm Tree. New 
 York. Grosset & Dunlap, Inc., 1940. 43 p., illus. 
 
 The story of the coconut palm, based on a Brazilian folk-tale. Describes 
 the many products derived from the palm in simple, interesting language. 
 Beautifully illustrated in color in picture-book format. Good for stimulating 
 art work and in making up products notebook. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Letters from Guatemala. New World Neighbors Series. Boston. 
 D. C. Heath Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Life on a banana plantation and a good bit of information on growing and 
 marketing bananas is included in one of the letters in this book. Another 
 
 ( 103 ) 
 
 490718 0 - 42 -8 
 
104 
 
 describes a visit to a coffee plantation. Also included are visits to an Indian 
 village to watch a weaver at work, to a potter, life at school and Christmas and 
 Independence Day celebrations. Illustrated in color. 
 
 Lanks, Herbert C. Nancy Goes to Mexico. Philadelphia. David McKay Co. 
 1939. 39 p., illus. 
 
 A story of Mexico told in the language of a child, with brief material on the 
 maguey plant and its many uses, as well as the many different products found 
 in the markets. The legend of the Virgin of Guadalupe, patron saint of Mexico, 
 is included. In addition to excellent photographs, there are charming pen and 
 ink sketches on margins. Useful as a supplementary reader. 
 
 Steen, Elizabeth K. Red Jungle Boy. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1937. 80 p., illus. 
 
 The book contains much interesting information on the jungles of Brazil, 
 as well as the food which this tribe of Caraja Indians eat. Many of the animals 
 of the region are introduced and their habits described. The games the Indians 
 play and one of their dances is described. The many striking illustrations 
 in color add to the charm and usefulness of the book. 
 
 III. REFERENCES FOR THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Brown, Rose. Two Children of Brazil. New York. J. B. Lippincott Co. 
 1940. 229 p., illus. 
 
 Much information on everyday life and special occasions. A detailed 
 description of a coffee plantation and the steps in growing coffee as well as a 
 chapter on the Botanical Garden, the story of the royal palm, the spice tree 
 and the tea bush, make this a useful reference book on the plants and foods of 
 Brazil. 
 
 Cannon, Marian. Children of the Fiery Mountain. New York. E. P. 
 Dutton & Co. 1940. 96 p., illus. v 
 
 Life on a coffee plantation in Guatemala is described in an interesting way, 
 giving a good picture of the everyday life of the people. Includes a description 
 of preparations for a Christmas fiesta. Good illustrations. 
 
 Eberle, Irmengarde. Spice on the Wind. New York. Holiday House. 
 1940. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Simple, well-written account of places where spices grow and people who 
 grow them. Gives good description of cultivation of plants and preparation of 
 fruit for market. The chapter on vanilla from Mexico will be useful in connec¬ 
 tion with a unit on that country. Attractively made-up book, illustrated in 
 color. 
 
 Lee Melicent Humason. At the Jungle’s Edge. New York. Thomas Y. 
 Crowell Co. 1938. 118 p., illus. 
 
 A good description of growing cacao and preparing it for market, together 
 with information on animals and birds of Costa Rica, and on the Central 
 American jungle. Well illustrated. A useful book for nature study, social 
 studies. 
 
 - Children of Banana Land. New York. Thomas Y. Crowell Co. 1936. 
 
 156 p., illus. 
 
 A story of Honduras, giving details of banana growing from the preparation 
 of the soil to harvesting the fruit. There is also a brief history of how bananas 
 came to America. Depicts the life of two children and their efforts in working 
 the farm. 
 
 --Volcanoes in the Sun. New York. Thomas Y. Crowell Co. 1937. 
 
 150 p., illus. 
 
 Good information on trees, plants and fruit of the country is included in this 
 story of life on a Guatemalan coffee plantation. Many of the Indian costumes 
 are described and some history is introduced. The glossary of Spanish and 
 Indian words adds value to the book. 
 
105 
 
 Rothery, Agnes. South America Roundabout. New York. Dodd, Mead & 
 Co. 1940. 242 p., illus. 
 
 The interesting material on the plants of the various countries discussed in 
 this book would make it useful in geography and in social studies. It is devoted 
 largely to the countries of South America but includes a chapter on Panama 
 and brief material on Cuba and Haiti. 
 
 Von Hagen, Victor Wolfgang. Riches of South America. New World 
 Neighbors Series. Boston. D. C. Heath & Co. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Contains material on tin, balsa wood, chocolate, coffee, and on the weaving 
 of Panama hats. The material on hats could be used in connection with handi¬ 
 crafts, and the material on commodities in social studies, also for nature study. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Firestone, Jr., Harvey S. The Romance and Drama of the Rubber Industry. 
 Pamphlet. Akron. Firestone Tire and Rubber Co., 1932. 127 p. 
 
 Collected radio talks, popular style, easy for children to read and follow. 
 Brief chapters (about two pages each) cover the discovery of rubber, naming 
 of rubber, days of wild rubber, the Brazilian rubber monopoly, the first rubber 
 plantation, Firestone in Mexico, the Ford rubber project in Brazil. Rubber 
 became known to Europe when Spanish explorers saw Indians in Mexico playing 
 games with bouncing balls, about 1521. No charge. 
 
 Golden Grains of the Americas (Jr. SchoL, Nov. 11, 1940, p. 6-7, 14, illus.). 
 
 A map shows the great wheat-growing regions of the Americas. Photographs 
 show grain elevators in Buenos Aires, farmers in the Argentine pampas bringing 
 in a wheat crop, a Diesel powered tractor. 
 
 Hobson, H. M. A Palm that Grows Buttons (Jr. Red Cross News, Mav 1941, 
 p. 230). 
 
 Brief but colorful description of the tagua palm and the environment (nota¬ 
 bly Ecuador) in which it is found. The “life history” of a button might be 
 illustrated in frieze or picture book form, showing how the giant seed pods 
 which may weigh twenty pounds fall from the trees; how squirrels, wild hogs 
 and monkeys “help”—they lick the sweet stickly covering from the sixty to 
 ninety nuts inside; how the nuts are floated on rafts to the ports; and how they 
 are sawed, cut and polished into buttons. 
 
 Laing, Edith M. Food of the Gods ( Nature , January 1941, p. 24, illus.). 
 
 A short but concise account of the origin, harvesting and preparation for 
 market of cacao (chocolate) the pleasing drink invented by the Aztecs and 
 modified by Spaniards, still a favorite among their descendants. The illustra¬ 
 tion is a Costa Rican stamp on which one of the long, melon-shaped fruit pods 
 is pictured. Social studies and home economics. 
 
 Ledig, Elizabeth Lineback. Barbecue in the Andes (Jr. Red Cross News, 
 February 1940, p. 11-13, story, illus.). 
 
 Contrast of simple daily fare in this charmingly told story with the festive 
 foods that celebrate the annual rounding-up of the sheep: corn-meal tamales, 
 stuffed with pork, peanuts and black olives; sweet tamales or umitas, filled with 
 spiced ground corn, brown sugar and raisins; chicha to drink, a cider-like bev¬ 
 erage of red corn and coconut. 
 
 Out of the Jungles Come Farms in Brazil (My Weekly Reader, April 7-11, 1941, 
 Ed. No. 5, p. 121-122, illus.). 
 
 How engineers and modern machines are changing swamp and jungle land 
 into land suitable for farms where tomatoes, lettuce, oranges, bananas, sugar¬ 
 cane can be grown. Gives young children a picture of the way in which man 
 prepares the earth for his own better use. There are two pictures showing 
 avenues of palms and a boy with his llama, and two shaded outline maps with 
 a key to information on products, etc. 
 
 Pan America in Review: Paraguay (World Youth, May 25, 1940, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 Discussion of yerba maU plant, so called from the custom of drinking the herb 
 (yerba) tea from a hollow gourd (matt), and the production of the drink. There 
 is a photograph of the gourd and the “little pump” or straw through which 
 the drinker sips. Valuable in a unit on food, and to illustrate how man has 
 made use of the plants in his environment. 
 
106 
 
 The Products of Brazil (Jr. Arts and Activ., March 1941, p. 19-22, illus.). 
 
 The production of coffee, rubber, and sugar cane is treated, and there are sug¬ 
 gestions for making a diorama based on the growing, processing, and marketing 
 of rubber. A finished diorama is illustrated and directions for making one 
 are accompanied by pictures of the parts. There is a short historic overview 
 of Brazil, and an outline map, accompanied by pictures of products such as 
 manganese, diamonds, gold, coal, corn, coffee, rubber, cacao, bananas, sugar 
 cane. 
 
 Ridgeway, Caroline H. Rubber, Wild and Tame (Jr. Red Cross News, Novem¬ 
 ber 1938, p. 11, illus.). 
 
 Overview of the cultivation and production of rubber. Discussion of heat 
 and moisture necessary for growth of tree, the manner in which the tree protects 
 itself from insects, how seeds were smuggled out of Brazil and rubber planta¬ 
 tions started in the Malay Peninsula. The illustration shows how the tree is 
 tapped for the latex. Social studies and natural science material. 
 
 Sugar Bowl (Jr. Schol., Dec. 2, 1910. p. 6-7, 14, illus.). 
 
 General overview of the production of sugar with special reference to Cuba, 
 which produces more sugar than any other country in the world. Nobody 
 knows when or where men first began to use sugar. It probably came originally 
 from India or some other part of southern Asia. Alexander the Great gathered 
 the “honey-bearing reed” along the banks of the Tigris River, and it was 
 introduced into the New World by the conquerors. It was brought to Santo 
 Domingo in 1494 and spread over the West Indies and to the mainland. There 
 are pictures of sugar beets and sugar cane. Reference material for social 
 studies. 
 
 Thomas, Margaret Boring. Christmas Fish (Jr. Red Cross News , December 
 1940, p. 94, story, illus.). 
 
 Two Mexican children catch fish for the Christmas dinner. Emphasis is on 
 the fishing adventure rather than the Christmas customs, though differences in 
 climate, food, and customs may be observed. The journey through the village 
 to the lake, the cutting of bamboo fishing poles, wrapping the fish in leaves and 
 weeds to keep them fresh, furnish scenes for painting or dramatization. A 
 diorama could lie made showing the route, and a utility bag like Benito’s might 
 be made for a Christmas gift. 
 
 The World’s Coffee Pot (Jr. Schol., Nov. 25, 1940. p. 6-7, 15, illus.). 
 
 Brazil is the greatest coffee producer in the world, but Argentina, Uruguay, 
 Chile and Paraguay are the only Latin American countries which are not coffee 
 growers. The United States is the greatest coffee-drinking country. The 
 legend of the origin of the drink is given, and the problem of over-production is 
 discussed. For social studies classes. (The teacher may wish to look up a 
 kodachrome of a blooming coffee tree published in the National Geographic, 
 April 1940.) 
 
 Tin, Tin, Tin: Bolivia’s Mountain Wealth (Jr. Schol., Dec. 16-21, p. 6-7, illus.) 
 
 Brief but very good overview of the story of tin, where it is found, how it is 
 found how processed, how it is used and its history in international trade. 
 Tin cans are made of thin sheets of steel with only a thin coating of tin; nearly 
 17 billion of them were made in the United States in 1939. Bolivia is the 
 second largest producer of tin in the world. Illustrations show the mine, build¬ 
 ings where rock is crushed, homes of miners, Indians sorting rock. 
 
 Von Hagen, Christine. Francisco’s Lucky Day (Jr. Red Cross News, Mar.- 
 Apr. 1941, story, illus.). 
 
 Story of a working day in a little boy’s life on a cacao hacienda in Ecuador, 
 where men cut the fruit from the trees and throw it to other men sitting on 
 the ground who split it open and scrape out the white jelly in which the seeds, 
 the real chocolate, are hidden. The seeds or beans are shoveled into sacks, the 
 sacks are thrown over the backs of mules, and the boys drive the mules to long 
 trays on wheels where the beans are spread out to dry. At one end are white 
 wet beans, at the other, crisp, dry, brown ones. Women and girls sit beside 
 the latter picking out the bad ones. In the story, Francisco goes with the sacks 
 of beans down the river to Guayaquil. 
 
107 
 
 IV. REFERENCES FOR THE JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Cill, Richard C. Manga. New York. Frederick A. Stokes Co. 1937. 
 
 268 p. 
 
 \V ell-written, swift moving story of adventure in the jungles of Ecuador 
 which could be used in connection with study of such products as gold and 
 rubber. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Neighbors to the South. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1941. 302 p. 
 
 Chapter 8 (p. 182-201) describes the major agricultural and mineral products 
 which the United States imports from Latin America, and at the same time 
 discusses new crops which may be grown there in the future. Includes material 
 on increasing production of rubber, cacao, quinine. 
 
 Wiese, Kurt. The Parrot Dealer. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 1932. 
 239 p., illus. 
 
 A great deal frf information about the plants, trees and products of the 
 country is introduced incidentally in this interestingly written book about life 
 in Brazil. The descriptions of the markets and the products they contain 
 would be useful to classes wishing to work up a unit on markets. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Blackiston, A. H. Treasure Chests of the Spanish Main. Fishery Banks of 
 Campeche and Yucatan {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, January 1939, p. 14-25, 
 illus.). 
 
 An article with historic interest and economic information, about the fish¬ 
 ery banks of Campeche and Yucatan. Along the eastern edge of the banks, 
 where the Caribbean and Gulf meet, schools of sardines have been reported 
 that were over fifty miles in length. For appreciation of marine life, natu¬ 
 ral resources and their conservation, occupational possibilities. 
 
 Brandes, Dr. E. W. Rubber on the Rebound—East to West ( Agric. in the 
 Americas. April 1941, p. 1-11, illus.). 
 
 Dr. Brandes, head pathologist in charge of the special rubber project at the 
 Bureau of Plant Industry, U. S. Department of Agriculture, discusses the so- 
 called “seed snatch” of the English planter Henry Wickham in 1876 which 
 resulted in the rise of rubber production on the other side of the world and its 
 decline in its native Brazil; the rubber research project now under way in the 
 western hemisphere to reverse the tide; synthetic rubber and its significance. 
 Excellent material of timely interest. 
 
 Burkland, EdCxAr. Meet the Tonka Bean {Agric. in the Americas , June 1941, 
 p. 7, 10, 11, illus.). 
 
 Excellent reference covering habitat, appearance, fruit of the sarrapia tree 
 {Dipteryx odoraia) whose fruit-seed is called the tonka “bean”; harvesting, 
 marketing, commercial value and problems of those concerned with the indus¬ 
 try. The tree is found in the level plains ( llanos ) of Venezuela, Colombia, 
 Brazil and the Guianas, but does not ordinarily grow in solid stands. Entire 
 families of native harvesters wander about, and the first to arrive at a forest 
 area where the trees are abundant build ranchos (huts) to shelter the party for 
 two or three months. Coumarine, extracted from the tonka bean, has many 
 uses. The woody fragrance of a burning cigarette, the scent of perfumed 
 soap, the flavor of an after-dinner liqueur, owe something to coumarine. Sci¬ 
 ence and social studies material which junior high school students will enjoy 
 reading for themselves. 
 
 Cochran, Doris M. Brazil Bound ( Nature , January 1940, p. 9-12, illus.). 
 
 Dr. Cochran, who is on the staff of the United States National Museum, 
 went to Brazil at the invitation of Dr. Adolpho Lutz, eminent pioneer in research 
 in tropical medicine and biology, whose failing eyesight made it impossible 
 to complete a monograph on Brazilian frogs. Dr. Lutz’ laboratory is located in 
 the Instituto Oswaldo Cruz in Rio, a Moorish building of startling beauty and 
 one of the great medical centers of the world. To the clinics of the Instituto 
 
108 
 
 Oswaldo Cruz come those afflicted with malaria, leprosy, elephantiasis, and 
 other scourges of the tropics which Dr. Oswaldo Cruz had battled in his lifetime. 
 
 Coffee Plastic {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, April 1939, p. 594-595, illus.). 
 
 The development of a plastic product from green coffee which may be used 
 for flooring, roofing, wall board, insulating material, acoustic material. Expla¬ 
 nation of the process, by-products. Overview of natural plastics, such as 
 pitch and rosin, used from time immemorial, and synthetic plastics developed 
 in chemical laboratories in the last hundred years; economic effect of important 
 new materials developed from by-products of surplus crops. The illustration 
 shows steps in the manufacture of coffee plastic. Valuable addition to a study 
 of coffee. 
 
 Curran, C. H. Insect Lore of the Aztecs {Nat. Hist., March 1936, p. 196-203, 
 illus.). 
 
 Source material on Aztec use of grasshoppers and other insects for food, on 
 therapeutic measures against poisonous insects such as the black widow spider, 
 on superstitions interwoven with Aztec natural science. The authority is 
 Sahagun, whose General History of the Things of New Spain was completed 
 in 1560. Twenty pictures reproduced from the monumental work of the 
 Spanish monk show the Aztecs’ use of the brush as the camera is used today. 
 Present-day interest through the fact that agricultural pests the Aztecs knew 
 are still a problem. 
 
 Firestone, Jr., Harvey S. The Romance and Drama of the Rubber Industry. 
 Pamphlet. Akron. Firestone Tire and Rubber Co., 1932. 127 p. 
 
 See Intermediate list. 
 
 Mason, Gregory. Native American Food {Nat. Hist., April 1936, p. 309-318, 
 illus.). t 
 
 Foods, drugs and tobacco indigenous to the Americas illustrated and dis¬ 
 cussed. The story of the discovery and rapid spread of the Irish potato is 
 interestingly told. The story of tobacco and early tobacco pipes is related. 
 Reference material for home economics and history classes. 
 
 Newhall, Beatrice. Chocolate in New Spain {Bull. Pan\Amer. Union, October 
 1936, p. 786, illus.). 
 
 Much historical information pertaining to the production and use of cocoa 
 before and during the colonial period. Indian legends pertaining to the origin 
 of the plant are given and information about festivals and ceremonies in honor 
 of the gods associated with agriculture, food, and trade. The cacao monetary 
 system of preconquest Mexico is explained. Reference material. 
 
 Pan America in Review: Paraguay {World Youth, May 25, 1940, illus.). 
 
 Yerha matt plant. See Intermediate list. 
 
 Pan American Union. Commodities of Commerce Series. Washington, Pam¬ 
 phlets, illus. 5^ each. 
 
 Separate illustrated pamphlets on Alpacas, Asphalt, Bananas, Cattle and 
 Pampas, Chicle, Coal and Iron, Coco, Cocoa (Chocolate), Coconuts, Coffee, 
 Copper, Nitrate Fields, Oils and Waxes, Quebracho, Quinine, Rubber, Sugar, 
 Tagua, Tanning Materials, Tin, Wool, Yerba Mate. These bulletins give 
 factual material about origin, processing, and distribution of each commodity. 
 Useful tables. Of special interest to children is the comprehensive 21-page 
 bulletin on Cocoa. This treats the historical background of the cocoa tree and 
 the products of the cocoa bean. A footnote states that the use of the word 
 cacao is now disappearing and that the accepted term of world trade is cocoa. 
 Illustrations show pruned trees, gathering cocoa pods, breaking of shells to 
 prepare the beans for drying and fermenting, sun-drying the beans, transporting 
 them. Pictures could be clipped and mounted for a permanent exhibit. 
 
 Pough, Frederick H. Gems for April {Nat. Hist., April 1941, p. 211, illus.). 
 
 The Assistant Curator of Geology and Mineralogy of the American Museum 
 of Natural History discusses diamonds: the derivation of the name, composition 
 of the stone, source of supply, and myths connected with the diamond. A para¬ 
 graph is devoted to Brazilian deposits and there is a photograph of the very 
 large “President Vargas” diamond. For language arts rather than for science. 
 
 Rutledge, Archibald. Romance of Peruvian Bark ( Classmate , Aug. 9, 1941, 
 illus.). 
 
 Relates several traditions concerning the origin of quinine. Peruvian Indians 
 called the tree from which this medicine is derived quinquina (bark of barks); 
 
109 
 
 the Spaniards named it cinchona after the Countess of Chinchdn, wife of a 
 viceroy of Peru who was cured of a fever by it in 1638. Account of its develop¬ 
 ment in medical use, attempts to raise the tree elsewhere. Reference material 
 that junior high school can use without direction. Illustration of tree and 
 bark. 
 
 Stirling, Marion. Jungle Housekeeping for a Geographic Expedition (Natl. 
 Geog., September 1941, p. 303-327, illus.). 
 
 Junior high school girls, and perhaps also boys, will delight in Mrs. Stirling’s 
 account. She describes the houses the expedition built "in the jungle of the 
 State of Veracruz (Mexico), something of the plants and animals that sur¬ 
 rounded them, the social customs of an archaeologist’s camp, their food, and 
 how it was prepared. The details of kitchen equipment and Mexican dishes 
 are so complete one may experiment. She describes the making of tortillas, 
 Mexican substitute for bread and spoon; gordas, “fat” corn cakes; dishes made 
 with rice, eggs, beef, pork, chicken; “hot” sauces. Her article follows one by 
 Dr. Matthew W. Stirling describing the archaeological activities of the 
 expedition. 
 
 Tin, Tin, Tin: Bolivia’s Mountain Wealth (Jr. Schol., Dec. 16-21, p. 6-7, illus.). 
 
 See Intermediate listing. 
 
 Walmsley, Jr., W. N. The Carnauba Palm and Its Wax (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union , January 1939, p. 31-42, illus.). 
 
 Social studies reference material. Floor wax, electric insulators, photographic 
 films, soap, carbon paper are some of the products made from the wax of the 
 carnauba palm, which has so many uses Humboldt called this the “tree of life.” 
 The illustrations show the growing trees, a primitive press for extracting wax, 
 and some scenes in factories. 
 
 White, C. Langdon, and Edwin J. Fascue. The Green Gold of Yucatdn (Jour. 
 Geog., April 1939, p. 151-155, illus.). 
 
 The henequen of Yucatan produces most of the fiber for the twine that binds 
 the portion of the world’s grain harvested with the mechanical reaper, and is 
 to the region what sugar is to Cuba and coffee to Brazil. Good photograph of 
 the henequen plant. The cultivation and processing are described. 
 
 V. REFERENCES FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Goodspeed, T. Harper. Plant Hunters in the Andes. New York. Farrar & 
 Rinehart, Inc. 1941. 429 p., illus. 
 
 This book is an account of two plant-hunting expeditions sent out by the 
 University of California Botanical Garden. Although different members of 
 the expedition touched various points in South America, the major work was 
 confined to an intensive two years’ search in Peru and Chile for certain species 
 of Nicotiana. Actually, however, the expedition collected specimens of all the 
 various plants encountered. These included plants found in desert, jungle, 
 warm coastal plain, and high up in the Andes. The 125 photographs give 
 excellent detail of the plants described and also include many photographs of 
 people, communities, animals, and art. How the expedition preserved speci¬ 
 mens and prepared them for shipping or carrying would be of particular interest 
 to classes in nature study. 
 
 Hanson, E. P. Chile: Land of Progress. New York. Reynal & Hitchcock, 
 Inc. 1941. 201 p. 
 
 The production of copper, nitrate, gold, iron, coal, manganese, sulphur, and 
 other minerals in Chile are briefly summarized in Chapter 6 of this book. The 
 last part of the chapter also reviews the manufacturing and industrial life of the 
 country. 
 
 Matschat, Cecile Hilse. Mexican Plants for American Gardens. Boston. 
 Houghton, Mifflin Co. 1935. 268 p., illus. 
 
 Much interesting material beginning with the Aztec gardens and brought 
 dowm to the gardens of modern Mexico. The Aztec flower festivals are de¬ 
 scribed in Chapter 2, as well as the appearance and uses of various flowers, 
 plants, and herbs, particularly those used for dyes, medicines, and flavorings. 
 Chapters on the colonial gardens include interesting material on the floating 
 
110 
 
 gardens near Mexico City, the famous Borda gardens at Cuernavaca, as well as 
 the ruins of many others. Other chapters relate the explorations of noted 
 botanists, give legends in connection with various plants, and much material 
 on the desert cacti, wild flowers, bulbs, and shrubs. Thirty-six illustrations 
 supplement the text and an appendix lists the common plants of Mexico and 
 gives a brief descriptive note. 
 
 McNeil, Blanche and Edna. First Foods of America. New York. Sutton- 
 house, Ltd. 1936. 
 
 Interesting material on the origin of many Mexican foods, such as beans, 
 chili, corn, modernized Aztec foods such as tamales, tortillas, etc., as well as 
 suggested menus for Mexican meals. Of special value to cooking classes are the 
 numerous recipes for almost every kind of food. Included in these are the 
 bun ados eaten at Christmas time, and the delicious pecan candies, carmelizcd 
 milk and candied pumpkin. Several songs about Mexican food are found in the 
 book, together with the music. A valuable book, useful in preparing for a 
 Mexican party in school or home. 
 
 Romoli, Kathleen. Colombia: Gateway to South America. Garden City, N. Y. 
 Doubleday, Doran & Co. 1941. 364 p. 
 
 Oil production and coffee growing of Colombia are discussed in detail in 
 Chapters 15 and 16 of this well-written book. In addition to data on yield and 
 working of the oil wells, there is interesting material on the discovery of oil. 
 The chapter on coffee gives an excellent description of a coffee plantation. 
 
 Verrill, A, Hyatt. Foods America Gave the World. Boston. L. C. Page 
 & Co. 1937. 289 p. 
 
 Interesting and detailed information on foods native to America, including 
 occasional legends about their origin and good descriptions of their preparation 
 for market and for consumption. Chapters are devoted to corn, potatoes and 
 other foods of the same family, chocolate, verba mate, pumpkins, beans, 
 peanuts, coconuts, nuts, pineapples and other fruits. There is a separate 
 chapter on little known fruits as well as a chapter on foods used in Latin 
 America which should be introduced more widely in the United States. An 
 appendix contains a comprehensive list of American food plants classified as 
 beverage, cereal, fruits, nuts, or roots. A second appendix contains a list of 
 food animals. The 23 illustrations show plants described, aiso designs patterned 
 on these plants found on ancient pottery. 
 
 Von Hagen, Victor ^Wolfgang. Ecuador the Unknown. New York. Oxford 
 University Press. 1940. 269 p., illus. 
 
 The balsa trees which produce “wood that is lighter than air” are described 
 in Chapter 8 (p. 77-83). The various uses of the wood in the airplane and other 
 industries is described, as well as a trip into the balsa growing region of Ecuador, 
 including information on the planting of a balsa plantation and a photograph of 
 a clump of young balsa trees. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Benedict. Francis G., and Morris Steggerde. The Food of the Present-Day 
 Maya Indians of Yucatan. Contributions to American Archaeology, vol. 3, 
 No. 18. The Carnegie Institution of Washington. 1937. 
 
 V T hile this is a highly specialized study, it gives the teacher clear-cut detail 
 on daily living. The food of the Maya in colonial times, as determined from 
 literature, is discussed along with present foods and methods of preparation. 
 Helpful comparisons are made: for instance, the authors found that the Maya 
 eat little fruit compared with white people in the northern United States. 
 
 Blackiston, A. H. Treasure Chests of the Spanish Main: Fishery Banks of 
 Campeche and Yucatan (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, January 1939, p. 14-25, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. The elementary teacher will value the informa¬ 
 tion for her lesson planning. 
 
 Brandes, Dr. E. W. Rubber on the Rebound—East to West (Agric. in the 
 Americas, April 1941, p. 1-11, illus.). 
 
 Timely material on economic cooperation between the Americas. 
 
 / 
 
Ill 
 
 Bratton, Sam T. El Pacaval: A Coffee Finca in Guatamala {Jour. Geog., 
 February 1939, p. 45-50, ilius.). 
 
 Description of a finca (plantation), its organization and management, a 
 description of the growing of coffee, the harvesting and marketing. Suitable 
 for junior high school social studies. 
 
 Bressman, E. N. Inter-American Cooperation in Agriculture {World Affairs 
 September 1941, p. 171-176). 
 
 Includes material on agricultural products grown in the American tropics 
 which are complementary to those of the United States, and information on 
 the use of each. Rubber, abacd (Manila hemp, Panama), cinchona tree (source 
 of quinine), rotemone-bearing crops, valuable for insecticidal purposes (a 
 $100,000,000 business); vegetable oils; babassu (Brazil), cohune (Central 
 America), ben (benzolive tree, Haiti); castor oil, citicica, and tung products. 
 Forest products, tropical fruits, tropical vegetables are named and uses given. 
 Highly useful to teacher for science, commerce, elementary social studies. 
 
 Burkland, Edgar. Meet the Tonka Bean {Agric. in the Americas, June 1941, 
 p. 7, 10, 11, ilius.). 
 
 Content interest for elementary level (see Junior High School list); science, 
 social studies information, and material to stimulate creative writing or painting 
 (life of the families who harvest the beans). 
 
 Cameron, C. R. Mate: An Important Brazilian Product {Jour. Geog., February 
 1930, p. 54-70, ilius.). 
 
 Detailed information on planting, harvesting, and preparing matt for market; 
 a map showing the area commercially important in mate production in Brazil. 
 Pictures show harvesting matt in a cultivated forest, i. e. a natural grove with 
 underbrush kept down, often under pasture; toasting the leaves; breaking 
 twigs from branches; weighing a sheaf; mate on the way to the drying structure 
 {barbacud), and a wagon train conveying sacked matt to a shipping point. 
 There is a table giving principal chemical constituents of green and black tea, 
 coffee and mate in grams per thousand. Teacher can readily sift material of 
 permanent value in history, science, rejecting statistics no longer applicable. 
 
 The Carnegie Institution of Washington. Maize Cultivation in Northwestern 
 Guatemala. Contributions to American Anthropology and History, vol. 
 6, no. 33. Washington. 1940. 
 
 This study, based on data collected in the field by Raymond Sladelman, was 
 made for the purpose of better understanding the role of maize in the economy 
 of pre-Columbian peoples of the Maya area, through observation of its present- 
 day role in the economy and culture of the area. Both method and findings 
 will interest the teacher, and the section on magico-religious rites connected 
 with the cultivation of maize will background accounts of present-day corn 
 festivals mentioned in some of the children’s books. 
 
 Cochran, Doris M. Brazil Bound {Nature, January 1940, p. 9-12, ilius.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Content interest for upper elementary grades. 
 
 Coffee Plastic {Bull Pan Amer. Union , April 1939, p. 594-595, ilius.). 
 
 Will add valuable information and new interest to a study of coffee at either 
 elementary or secondary level. See Junior High School list. 
 
 Curran, C. H. Insect Lore of the Aztecs {Nat. Hist., March 1936, p. 196-203, 
 ilius.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Content interest for upper elementary grades, 
 which may be related to current problems. 
 
 Da Silva, Silvino. Unexploitcd Products of the Amazon Region {Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, December 1936, p. 932-935, ilius.). 
 
 There has been more extensive development of the Amazon region since 
 this article was written, but the information on the products is staple. Uses 
 of products listed are given and photographs show barbassu nuts (about the 
 size of a lemon, in bunches of 400 or more); a field of young manioc plants 
 (tapioca is the form in which it is generally known in the United States); and 
 Brazil nuts in outer shell. Could be assigned to junior high school children as 
 supplementary reference for science and social studies. They may be interested 
 to look for these products in foods, medicines, etc. available in their own 
 community, especially tapioca, Brazil nuts, ucuhuba wax (candles, soap), 
 
112 
 
 murmuru tallow (margarine, soap), patand oil (cooking oil, etc.). It is current 
 practice to list on the wrapper of commercial products the materials that go 
 into the composition of the content. 
 
 Dicken, Samuel N. Corn and Wheat in Mexico’s Changing Economy {.Jour. 
 Geog., March 1939, p. 99-109, illus.). 
 
 Account of the silent but significant rivalry that is developing in Mexico 
 between a very old crop, corn, and a comparatively new one, wheat, which 
 may mean fewer tortillas and more white bread. Two maps show areas of corn 
 production and wheat production in 1935. Changing methods of agriculture 
 and milling are significant evidence of the influence of the United States and 
 Europe on the cultural pattern. 
 
 Foster, Tdah S. Marketing under the Southern Cross ( Amcr. For. Sere. Jour., 
 August 1941, p. 450-452, illus.). 
 
 Housekeeper’s description of a market, different from traveler’s. The wife 
 of the Consul General at Sao Paulo shops for a special dinner, and tells of open¬ 
 ing, closing arrangements of the market, shopping customs, use of the varied 
 produce on display. Vegetables not common in the United States, but occasion¬ 
 ally found in specialty shops of the large cities are described: chuchu, a pale 
 green vegetable shaped like a pear, that grows on a vine; abobrinha, thin skinned, 
 like our summer squash; the margarida and card, varieties of potato; also 
 native fruits such as the maracuja, cambucy, goiabas, mamoes , carambolas, 
 dedo and magd bananas; meat; fish such as the polvo, ronballo; varieties of 
 orchids. For identification or for contrast with local products. Good picture 
 of “carregadores,” small boys who carry the shopper’s basket while she selects 
 what she will have, and carry home her purchases. For teachers of junior high 
 school. 
 
 Gill, Richard C. Curari, the Flying Death {Nat. Hist., November 1935, p. 279, 
 illus.). 
 
 Compact information to answer children’s questions about the use of poisoned 
 darts: in popular style. Curari is the poison employed on darts shot from blow- 
 guns by natives of the jungles at the headwaters of the Amazon, and may prove 
 of value to civilized medical science. Notes on the history of the use of poison, 
 on the locale where this investigation was made—the eastern slope of the Andes 
 of Ecuador, pictures of this locale, and an illustration of a branch of the Strych- 
 nos toxifera from whose bark the brown extract derives. 
 
 -- Herbs and Simples, Jungle Style (Nat. hist., Januar}?- 1938, p. 29-33). 
 
 An introduction to the pharmacopoeia of the Amazon region from the personal 
 experience approach, recommended for a point of view that is interesting and 
 different. The student of natural science will fihd a list of the plants most 
 sought for by the jungle-wise witch doctor. Plants listed are used by Indians 
 for astringents, carminatives, poultices, depilatories, hair-oils, shampoos, etc. 
 Achiote, the paprika of commerce, is widely used as a face paint and lip-rouge 
 and as a counter-irritant for humans and animals. 
 
 Green, Philip Leonard. Cuba: Caribbean Outpost {Agric. in the Americas , 
 April 1941). 
 
 Includes discussion of sugar, its place in Cuban economy and the weakness 
 of this “single crop” economy; the policy of diversified agriculture wdiich many 
 Cuban leaders urge. Good general view. 
 
 MacGow'an, H. P. Latin America as a Source of Strategic Materials {Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, February 1941, p. 94-108, illus.). 
 
 Brief discussion of materials of strategic importance found in Latin America. 
 Tin, manganese, rubber, antimony, mica, chromium, tungsten, mercury, 
 cinchona bark, quartz crystals (used for radio and certain scientific instruments), 
 nickel, manila fiber or abacd,, charcoal made from coconut shells, silk, hides 
 wool, tanning materials, platinum, kapok, aluminum, graphite, asbestos, cork, 
 iodine, vanadium, molybdenum, nitrates, zirconium ore, magnesium, cobalt, 
 beryllium, are listed as having strategic importance in varying degrees. Avail¬ 
 able figures on production and imports are given; sources of these materials and 
 results of certain experiments in production such as the abacd experiment in 
 Central America and Colombia. The brief descriptions will give the teacher 
 basic material for lesson planning or reference. 
 
113 
 
 --The Trade Agreement with Argentina (Foreiqn Commerce Weekly, Oct. 
 
 25, 1941, p. 8-9, 40). 
 
 Discussion of recent trade treaty signed with Argentina. Contains a list 
 covering several columns of products and commodities involved in commerce 
 between the two nations. 
 
 Mason, Gregory. Native American Food (Nat. Hist., April 1936, p. 309-318, 
 illus.). 
 
 Material for lesson planning for elementary teacher. See Junior High School 
 list. 
 
 Newhall, Beatrice. Chocolate in New Spain (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, October 
 1936, p. 786, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. The information pertaining to the plant and 
 its fruit and carefully selected illustrations of tree, pods and seeds helpful for 
 the elementary teacher. The Aztec symbol pictured which denotes 20 baskets 
 of ground cacao is useful for study of the ways in which man has kept records 
 through the ages. 
 
 Overbeck, Alicia O’Reardon. Tin, the Cinderella Metal (Natl. Geog., Novem¬ 
 ber 1940, p. 659-684, illus.). 
 
 Excellent overview of the significance of tin in our civilization, its distribution, 
 production and use. There are good pictures of the various processes in its 
 mining and manufacturing. More than half of the photographs have a Bo¬ 
 livian locale. The author states that she lived for six years in a tin'mining 
 camp high in the Andes, and her description of Bolivia’s part in the romance 
 of tin is detailed and comprehensive. 
 
 Pan American Union. Commodities of Commerce Series. Washington. 
 Pamphlets. Illus. 5<fc each. 
 
 For elementary teacher’s lesson planning. See Junior High School list. 
 
 Pough, Frederick H. Gems for April (Nat. Hist., April 1941, p. 211, illus.). 
 
 Content interest for elementary grades. See Junior High School list. 
 
 Rich, John L. The Nitrate District of Tarapaca, Chile: An Aerial Traverse 
 (Geog. Rev., January 1941, p. 1-22, illus.). 
 
 The 22 pictures show typical aspects of the nitrate industry and the kind of 
 region where nitrate is found. The aerial photographs and map of the nitrate 
 district of Tarapaca will be worthwhile for the teacher in any extended study 
 of nitrate though technical terms are used in speaking of physiographic features 
 of the area and extraction and processing of the nitrate. 
 
 Rio Reports (Brazil Today, June-Aug. 1941. p. 12-13). 
 
 Short paragraphs on manganese, lead, mica, asphalt, graphite, marble, gold. 
 To supplement other material on these minerals. 
 
 Sheppard, George. The Salt Industry in Ecuador (Geog. Rev., July 1932, p.403- 
 410, illus.). 
 
 The mining process used at the time this-article was written was one used 
 centuries ago. Specialized geological article; science, social studies reference 
 for teacher of junior high school or high school. Four photographs of salt 
 workings. Children living near salt areas in the United States might wish 
 to correspond with children living near salt areas in Ecuador; a map shows 
 distribution of salt deposits and adjacent centers. 
 
 Stirling, Marion. Jungle Housekeeping for a Geographic Expedition (Natl. 
 Geog., September 1941, p. 303-327, illus.). 
 
 Content interest for all levels. See Junior High School list. 
 
 United Fruit Company. Educational Department. The Story of the Banana. 
 Boston. 1936. 56 p., illus. 
 
 All phases of the banana are discussed: history, cultivation, shipping, value 
 as a food. No charge. 
 
 United States Tariff Commission. Latin America as a Source of Strategic and 
 Other Essential Materials. Report no. 144, second series. Washington. 1941. 
 
 A list of strategic and critical materials as defined by the Army and Navy 
 Munitions Board. The Tariff Commission has assembled and organized 
 extensive information on the sources of these materials and general economic 
 information concerning them. Part I deals with Mineral Products. Part II 
 is entitled “Agricultural, Pastoral and Forest Products.” While this is a 
 
114 
 
 specialized report, the encyclopedic nature of much of the material makes this 
 pamphlet a valuable addition to a school library. Teachers of all levels and 
 children above elementary school level will find it convenient to consult. 
 Antimony ore, bauxite, chrome ore, copper, iodine, manganese ore, tungsten, 
 zinc, etc.; cacao beans, cinchona bark, copra, jute, cpiebracho wood, are all 
 treated. Tables, graphs. For sale by Supt. of Documents, Washington, 
 D. C., 50 
 
 Vergara y Vergara., Jose Maria. A Cup of Chocolate (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, August 1931, p. 823-825). 
 
 For “flavor” in a unit study. 
 
 Von Hagen, Christine. Francisco’s Lucky Day (Jr. Red Cross News, Mar.— 
 Apr. 1941, story, illus.). 
 
 Primary children would enjoy hearing this story told by the teacher. See 
 Intermediate list. 
 
 Von Hagen, Wolfgang. The Ant that Carries a Parasol (Nat. Hist., January 
 1939, p. 27-32, illus.). 
 
 Parasol ants are among the insects eaten by man. The author notes that in 
 Honduras the Indians snap off the head, legs, and wings and toast them on stones. 
 They have a pungent oily taste somewhat resembling crisped bacon. The 
 author notes another use: when the soldier ants of this colony bite, they hold 
 on so tightly that they can be used to suture wounds. The cut is held together 
 and live ants placed near the wound. The ants bite deep, clamping the two 
 edges of skin together as in a vise, and do not relax their hold even when de¬ 
 capitated. If it were aseptic, the method could be valuable in emergency. 
 
 Wagg, 3rd, Alfred. How the Tropical Half Lives (Chr. Set. Mon., Oct. 18, 
 1941, Weekly Mag. Sec., illus.). 
 
 Short article stressing importance of automatic refrigeration in tropical 
 homes. Reasons for abundance or lack of certain staple foods in tropical diet. 
 Good picture of a giant tree in tropical forest setting. 
 
 Walmsley, Jr., W. N. The Carnauba Palm and its Wax (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union , January 1939, p. 31-42, illus.). 
 
 Social studies reference material for teacher in upper elementary grades. See 
 Junior High School list. 
 
 White, C. Langdon, and Edwin J. Fascue. The Green Gold of Yucatan 
 (Jour. Geog., April 1939, p. 151-155, illus.). 
 
 Content material on henequin. See Junior High School list. 
 
 Willcuts, Virginia.' A Sixth Grade Movie Project on the Study of Tin (Jour. 
 Geog., October 1930, p. 306-310). 
 
 General information about tin at level of a particular sixth grade. The 
 article includes a general survey of the world’s supply of tin; approximately a 
 page of information applies specifically to Bolivia. Material on the appear¬ 
 ance of tin when it comes from the earth (crystals with brilliant luster), articles 
 made of tin, uses of tin, location of deposits over the earth, types of processing. 
 Teacher should note changes in type of labor, machinery, transportation 
 methods; but facts about the mineral and the organization of material will 
 be helpful. 
 
 Wilson, Charles Morrow. Our Future in Central America (Travel, Sep¬ 
 tember 1941, p. 7-11, illus.). 
 
 Deals with the importance to the people of the United States of the new 
 agricultural development in Central America, discussing food and mineral 
 resources and listing commodities which the LTnited States is obliged to import 
 and which Central America can supply. 
 
 Wright, Charles Will. Tin in Inter-American Relations (Inter-Amer. Quar¬ 
 terly, January 1940, p. 68-78). 
 
 General material on the tin belt of Bolivia with current material on present 
 production and values, and working conditions; map showing location of 
 mines, including world’s largest tin mine, useful for social studies in junior 
 high school. 
 
115 
 
 KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Agric. in the Americas. 
 Amer. For. Serv. Jour. 
 Bull. Pan Amer. Union 
 
 Chr. Sci. Mon_ 
 
 Geog. Rev_ 
 
 Inter-Amer. Quarterly. 
 
 Jour. Geog_ 
 
 Jr. Arts and Activ_ 
 
 Jr. Red Cross News_ 
 
 Jr. Schol_ 
 
 Natl. Geog_ 
 
 Nat. Hist_ 
 
 Agriculture in the Americas. 
 American Foreign Service Journal. 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. 
 Christian Science Monitor. 
 Geographical Review. 
 
 Inter-American Quarterly. 
 
 Journal of Geography. 
 
 Junior Arts and Activities. 
 
 American Junior Red Cross News. 
 Junior Scholastic. 
 
 National Geographic Magazine. 
 Natural History. 
 
 x 
 
116 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
117 
 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
y 
 
 { Children of the Other Americas } 
 
 THEIR ANIMAL WORLD 
 
 490718 0 - 42 -9 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 Page 
 
 I. Introduction _ 123 
 
 II. References for the Primary Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 123 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 125 
 
 III. References for the Intermediate Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 125 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 126 
 
 IV. References for the Junior High School: 
 
 1. Books_ 127 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 128 
 
 V. References for the Teacher: 
 
 1. Books_ 130 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 131 
 
 Key to Abbreviations_ 132 
 
 ( 121 ) 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
THEIR ANIMAL WORLD 
 
 I. INTRODUCTION 
 
 The interest of children in animals is universal and the children 
 of Latin America, in common with those of the United States, have 
 pets that share their love and care. Many of the domesticated animals 
 were introduced into the Americas by European colonists. 
 
 The Indians of the Americas had never seen horse or cow until the 
 sixteenth century, but long before Pizarro, llamas were used by the 
 ancient Peruvians as beasts of burden and for their milk and wool 
 and hides. How long ago llamas were tamed no one knows, but for 
 hundreds of years they have been friends and close companions of the 
 Andean people. Lake Titicaca, forming a portion of the boundary 
 between Peru and Bolivia is in the heart of llama-land. Here in 
 sheltered valleys high in the Andes mountains where baby llamas feed 
 on little herbs and mothers browse the nourishing icho grass, where 
 children live in little pink and blue houses the scenes of many llama 
 stories have been laid. 
 
 Far away and down in the Amazon jungle, the largest of American 
 cats, the tawny jaguar, stalks his prey. The jaguar skin, a symbol 
 of bravery, appears in many Mayan adventure tales. 
 
 The coak, the furry little animal that curls up like a cat, is one of 
 the most active and hardy of the forest animals, but is easily tamed 
 and makes an excellent pet. 
 
 The great majority of animals indigenous to South America live in 
 the great equatorial forest. It is here that monkeys are found and 
 toucans, parrots, snakes, lizards, beetles, and butterflies abound. 
 
 In the earliest years of human history man was very much at the 
 mercy of his animal neighbors. Today it is only the insects that 
 contest his supremacy, especially in the rainy tropics, where they 
 practically condition his way of life. Against many insects man must 
 continue to wage a costly warfare while on the other hand wild game 
 has decreased to such an extent that international treaties have been 
 made to protect migratory birds and fish. 
 
 The references that follow will suggest to teacher and pupil alike 
 another aspect of the world in which the children of Latin America 
 live. 
 
 II. REFERENCES FOR THE PRIMARY GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Armer, Laura Adams. The Forest Pool. New York. Longmans, Green & 
 Co. 1938. 40 p., illus. 
 
 A simple story of two little Mexican boys, an iguana and a parrot. There is 
 a brief mention of Moctezuma and his cloak of hummingbird feathers, as well 
 as life in the ancient city of the hummingbirds. Also a legend of the iguanas. 
 Beautifully illustrated in colors. Picture book format. 
 
 ( 123 ) 
 
124 
 
 Barris, Anna Andrews. Red tassels for Huki in Peru. Chicago. Albert P. 
 Whitman & Co. 1939. 62 p., illus. 
 
 Good information on the habits of llamas and customs of the people. What 
 happens to Huki when he runs away and a lion tries to capture him. Good 
 material also on homes, clothing, a dance. 
 
 Beim. Lorraine Jerrold. The Burro that Had a Name. New York. Har- 
 court, Brace & Co. 1939. Illus. 
 
 Brief, simple story of a little Mexican boy who wanted a burro and insisted 
 that the burro have a name, a fact which helps him find him when he is lost. 
 Picture book format. Might be used to stimulate art work. 
 
 Bennett, Virginia. Marla Mello and Her Monkey. New York. Grosset & 
 Dunlap, Inc. Illus. 
 
 Charming story of little Brazilian girl and her monkey. She lives in a house 
 on stilts and her father gathers rubber. Good handling of environment, 
 description of way of life. 
 
 Bodrero, James. Bomba. New York. Random House. 1939. 31 p., illus. 
 
 The life of a baby burro and his training. His experiences when he is stolen 
 by bandits, put in prison, escapes to the United States and is bought as a pet 
 for a little boy and girl make a humorous story of picture book type. Amusing 
 illustrations. 
 
 Desmond, Alice Curtis. The Lucky Llama. New York. The Macmillan Co. 
 1939. 63 p., illus. 
 
 A simple, informative story giving many of the customs of the country and 
 a good picture of village life. Gives Kalu’s experiences in the home of the 
 Indian who rescues him from a fierce condor. Includes legend of why white 
 llama never works. Colorful word pictures useful in motivating art work. 
 
 Gill. Richard C. Kalu the Llama. New York. Henry Holt & Co. 1939. 
 
 An amusing story of a pet llama in Ecuador who thought it would be more 
 fun to be a horse, and his adventures when he wanders away from the herd. 
 Excellent illustrations. 
 
 Jackson, Charlotte E. Tito, the Pig of Guatemala. New York. Dodd, Mead 
 & Co. 1940. 73 p., illus. 
 
 A Guatemalan boy takes his pet pig to market. The trouble begins when 
 the pig eats the father’s identification card and he is thrown into jail. Much 
 excitement follows, but through the pig’s antics the father is finally freed. A 
 humorous story with much of interest on the customs of the country. Bright, 
 colorful illustrations. 
 
 Lee, Melicent Humason. At the Jungle’s Edge. New York. Thomas Y. 
 Crowell Co. 1938. 118 p., illus. 
 
 Information on animals and birds of Costa Rica, good description of the Cen¬ 
 tral American jungle and of cacao. Well illustrated. A useful book for nature 
 study, social studies. 
 
 Malkus, Alida Sims. The Silver Llama. Philadelphia. John C. Winston Co. 
 1939. 108 p., illus. 
 
 Well told story of Peru in general and of the habits and training of llamas in 
 particular. What happens when the “Silver Llama” has to make his way in 
 the world. The legends of the white llama (which traditionally doesn’t work) 
 is included as well as a story of the Spanish invasion. The Silver Llama brings 
 good luck when he helps find the golden basin filled with jewels. Beautifully 
 illustrated in color, showing dress of Peruvian Indians. For general information 
 as well as study of llama. History, art. 
 
 Purnell, Idella. The Merry Frogs. New York. Suttonhouse Ltd. 1936. 
 Illus. 
 
 Interesting legends of the Aztecs and Mayas, simply told. Includes legends 
 on Indians, plants and animals. Well illustrated. 
 
 Steen, Elizabeth K. Red Jungle Boy. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1937. 80 p., illus. 
 
 A well-written account of the everyday life of the Carajd Indians in Brazil. 
 Their adventures on fishing and hunting expeditions and much information 
 about jungle life and the habits of the animals is told in an interesting way. 
 In addition there is material on the Indians’ food, their dress, games and a dance. 
 Striking illustrations in color add to the value of the book. 
 
125 
 
 Woodard, Stacy and Horace. The Adventures of Chico. New York. Stack- 
 pole Sons. 1938. Illus. 
 
 A book based on the movie of the same name. Has excellent pictures and 
 interesting material on Mexican birds and animals simply told. Good for 
 nature study and supplementary reading. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Goetz, Delia. The Ox that Got into Mischief ( Jr . Red Cross News, February 
 1940, p. 1-3, illus.). 
 
 A story of olden times in Guatemala popular with children living there today. 
 Buev Lim6n, the ox who wandered around by himself and ate the green leaves 
 and young ears of corn in Don Pedro’s field, is a convincing character. Chil¬ 
 dren will enjoy the feeling of mystery and suspense until Don Pedro and his 
 sons solve the mystery of Buey Limdn’s entrance into their fields. Reference 
 to the night bird of Guatemala called the puhuy. For story telling, dramatiza¬ 
 tion, art. 
 
 Jungle Gossip (Jr. Red Cross News, November 1939, picture). 
 
 Front cover: colored picture of a monkey and parrot, with great appeal for 
 children. 
 
 III. REFERENCES FOR THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Brown, Rose. Two Children of Brazil. New York. J. B. Lippincott Co. 
 1940. 229 p., illus. 
 
 A good book for general background on Brazil, with detailed information on 
 the many insects and the wide variety of butterflies found .in Brazil which would 
 make it useful in nature study and of particular interest to children who collect 
 butterflies. 
 
 Coatsworth, Elizabeth. The Boy with the Parrot: A Story of Guatemala. 
 New York. The Macmillan Co. 1930. 101 p., illus. < 
 
 A young boy from a village on Lake Atitl&n starts out with a peddler’s pack 
 to go to the capital, and has many adventures along the way. The parrot he 
 buys makes a diverting companion. Told "with understanding of the country. 
 
 Ditmars, Raymond L. The Book of Zoography. New York. J. B. Lippincott. 
 1934. Illus. 
 
 Contains good illustrations and splendid maps showing locations where 
 various animals live. Chapter each on Central and South American animals, 
 including those little known or found only in the Americas as well as the better 
 known animals like the guanaco vicuna , llama. 
 
 Lee, Melicent Humason. At the Jungle’s Edge. New York. Thomas Y. 
 Crowell Co. 1938. 118 p., illus. 
 
 A good description of growing cacao and preparing it for market, together with 
 information on animals and birds of Costa Rica, and on the Central American 
 jungle. Well illustrated. A useful book for nature study, social studies. 
 
 Malkus, A lida Sims. The Silver Llama. 
 
 See Primary list. 
 
 Purnell, Idella, and John Wea.therwax. The Talking Bird: An Aztec Story 
 Book. New York. The Macmillan Co. 1930. 95 p., illus. 
 
 Fairy tales and legends of the Aztecs which Paco’s grandfather told him. 
 
 Quiroga, Horacio. South American Jungle Legends. Tr. by Arthur Liv¬ 
 ingston. New York. Dodd, Mead Co. 1922. Illus. 
 
 Amusing stories and legends of the jungle animals translated into English 
 from the Spanish. 
 
 Sawyer, Ruth. The Least One. New York. Viking Press. 1941. 88 p., 
 
 illus. 
 
 A charming story of little Paco who wanted more than anything else to own 
 Chiquitico, a baby burro “the color of soft gray clouds” and “the least one” of 
 the family of burros in his father’s pack train. Day after day Paco and his pet 
 play under the sky until the morning when Chiquitico has a pack strapped on 
 
126 
 
 his back and the little boy is apprenticed to a sandal-maker. When the burro 
 does not return that night, and for many days more, Paco is inconsolable. 
 Children will delight with him when he at last finds his pet. Told with sym¬ 
 pathy and understanding and illustrated with amusing pictures in color. 
 
 Thomas, Margaret Loring. The Burro’s Money Bag. New York. Abingdon 
 Press. 1931. 123 p., illus. 
 
 How a little boy earns money to buy a burro for a pet and to help him in his 
 work, selling gardenias at the train, and his distress when the burro is lost, make 
 a charming story. The book gives a good picture of everyday life among the 
 Mexican peasants. 
 
 -- Paulo in the Chilean Desert. New York. Bobbs-Merrill Co. 1934. 
 
 190 p., illus. 
 
 The detailed description of a chinchilla hunt is included in this story of a 
 young boy who learns to fend for himself, and whose home is in the Chilean 
 desert. 
 
 Waldeck, Jo Besse M. Little Jungle Village. New York. Viking Press. 1940. 
 176 p., illus. 
 
 Description of the animals which the two little Arawak Indian children en¬ 
 counter in their adventures of starting a jungle village are included in this book. 
 In addition there is well-presented information on the plants and trees of the 
 jungle and the life of the Indians. 
 
 Waldeck, Theodore. The White Panther. New York. Viking Press. 1941. 
 193 p., illus. 
 
 The imaginary story of a white panther cub and his training to fend for 
 himself. The book gives much incidental information on birds and animals 
 of the jungle and their habits. There is mention of the bell-bird, toucan, para¬ 
 keet, canary and organ bird. The white panther’s encounters with other ani¬ 
 mals of the jungle—monkeys, jaguar, crocodile, wild hogs and ocelot—produce 
 many tense situations in the story. 
 
 Woodard, Stacy and Horace. The Adventures of Chico. 
 
 See Primary list. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Ants under Parasols {Jr. Nat. Hist., November 1940, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 Story of the “parasol parade” of these strange ants, their underground 
 gardening. Leaves chewed into pellets and left to decay form a bed of rich 
 leaf mold, from which springs a fungus growth like hundreds of tiny mushrooms. 
 These grayish, spongy masses of fungus are the food of the parasol ant. Three 
 photographs by V. Wolfgang von Hagen include an excellent close-up of the 
 fungus gardens. Attractive format, large print. 
 
 Casares, Jorge. In Praise of the Ovenbird {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, Septem¬ 
 ber 1936, p. 721-723, illus.). 
 
 Delightful description of the favorite bird of the Argentine people, not too 
 difficult for children in the fifth grade to read. The Indians admired the bird 
 who would construct a dwelling better suited to need than their own, and never 
 hunted the ovenbird. The gauchos made legends about it. For pioneers it 
 was a companion in the pampa solitude. Natural science, social studies, 
 language arts. 
 
 Chapman, Frank M. My Monkey Neighbors on Barro Colorado {Nat. Hist., 
 September 1937, p< 471-479, illus.). 
 
 Barro Colorado (the name means “red mud”) is a natural preserve, an island 
 created when Gatun Lake was formed, used as a laboratory for investigations 
 of tropical life. A series of pictures called “A Monkey Highway” shows how 
 monkeys forced to leap a 25-foot gap did their stunt. 
 
 Condor, The {Jr. Arts and Activ., January 1941, p. 18, illus.). 
 
 Concise information about the largest of flying birds, the condor. Sketches 
 show a large one poised on a crag, a smaller one in flight, nest and eggs. Useful 
 for nature notebook. 
 
 Farran, Don. Tico-Tico {Child Life, March 1941, story, 3 p., illus.). 
 
 Didi lived on a fazenda (plantation) in Brazil where the green wall of the 
 jungle pushed against the cultivated land, and orchids bloomed in the crotches 
 of trees, high up where wild parrots had carried seed. In the pasture where 
 
127 
 
 zebu oxen with humps on their necks. Didi wanted to go to Rio de Janeiro 
 but was afraid Virabosta, the bird of prey, would get her sparrow Tico-Tico. 
 The cook’s nephew saved Tico-Tico by bringing Juiz dePaz (Justiceof the Peace) 
 a big bird who will always try to separate two birds that fight. The real name 
 of Juiz de Paz is Jacamfn. For some reason Spanish names are substituted for 
 the Portuguese, as “Juan” for “Joao.” 
 
 Ledig, Elizabeth Lineback. Barbecue in the Andes (Jr. Red Cross Neivs, 
 February 1940, p. 11-13, story, illus.). 
 
 Charming story with incidental material concerning domestic animals of the 
 Andes. Descriptions of sheep ranch, method by which the sheep are annually 
 graded, cleansed of ticks, counted and separated according to age and sex. 
 
 Malkus. Alida. Eleven Thousand Llamas ( Story Parade, April 1939, p. 30-40, 
 illus.). 
 
 Short story, adventure of Indian boy and his llama. When the llama crops a 
 bunch of grass growing from beneath a rock, the boy finds gold that might have 
 been buried by his ancestors. Provides approach to the history of the Incas 
 before the Spanish conquest and gives glimpses of present-day life and customs 
 of herdsmen in the Andes. 
 
 Vega, Luis Rosado. The Story of the Puhuy Bird (Jr. Red Cross A J ews, April 
 1937, p. 227-228, story, illus.). 
 
 A myth telling how the puhuy , a bird common to Mavaland, lost its coat and 
 now only comes out at night to look for the one who cheated him. The story 
 has possibilities for dramatization, for the making of colorful costumes and stage 
 settings, for the making of pictorial maps and for stimulating interest in birds 
 and in myths. (The inside cover illustrates the scene where the Indian god 
 chooses the peacock for the king of birds while the puhuy, who gave his feathers 
 to the peacock, is seen in the background.) 
 
 Von Hagen, Victor Wolfgang. Strange Creatures of the Old New World. 
 (Chr. Sci. Mon., Oct. 9 Dec. 25, 1941, illus.). 
 
 Series of 12 articles beginning October 9, 1941, and continuing on successive 
 Thursdays. An introductory article followed by more specialized articles 
 featuring animals like the giant tortoise of the Galapagos Islands, the sloth, 
 anteater, umbrella ant. Well illustrated. Forms a good unit on animals, for 
 upper elementary grades. 
 
 Watson, Capt. Edward H., U. S. N. The Captain’s Monkeys (Amer. For. 
 Serv. Jour., December 1936, p. 661, story, illus.). 
 
 Amusing sea story, from the U. S. Naval Institute Proceedings. The plot will 
 appeal to the sense of fair play of 5th and 6th grade children. Reading for 
 pleasure. 
 
 IV: REFERENCES FOR THE JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Ditmars, Raymond L. The Book of Zoography. New York. J. B. Lippincott 
 Co. 1940. 229 p., illus. 
 
 See Intermediate list. 
 
 Gill, Richard C. Manga. New York. Frederick A. Stokes Co. 1937. 268 p. 
 
 Well written, swift moving story of adventure in the jungles of Ecuador. 
 Describes customs of the Indians, a young American’s association with them 
 and the friendship which develops. Good information on birds and animals. 
 
 Waldeck, Theodore. The White Panther. 
 
 See Intermediate list. 
 
 Wiese, Kurt. The Parrot Dealer, New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 1932. 
 239 p., illus. 
 
 Good, detailed description of a shark fishing expedition, a jaguar hunt, trip 
 with a mule train, capturing an anteater, wild pigs and a toucan, as well as 
 material on parrots. Interesting material about the country and people, well 
 presented. Useful in nature study. 
 
128 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Bentley, Alfred M. Cruise of the Kinkajou (Natl. Geog.. September 1941 
 p. 339-366). 
 
 A cruise to the desert islands which dot the Pacific off the coast of Lower 
 California, Mexico; project of the Colorado Museum of Natural History. 
 Much information on the variety and habits of birds, sharks, marlin, giant 
 manta ray, etc. The elephant seal is so called from its flexible proboscis which 
 attains a maximum length of 16 inches and apparently serves no useful purpose. 
 See also “Birds and Beasts of Mexico’s Desert Islands” listed below. 
 
 Birds and Beasts of Mexico’s Desert Islands (Natl. Geog., September 1941, p. 
 353-360). 
 
 Twelve natural color photographs show marlin, blue-footed booby family, 
 elephant seals, etc. Accompany article by Alfred M. Bailey listed above. 
 
 Casares, Jorge. In Praise of the Ovenbird (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, September 
 1936, p. 721-723, illus.). 
 
 See Intermediate listing. 
 
 Chapman, Frank M. Jose. Two Months from the Life of a Barro Colorado 
 Coati (Nat. Hist., April 1935, p. 299-308, illus.). 
 
 A scientist’s observations of a pet coati (close relative of North America’s 
 raccoon), delightfully told. How Dr. Chapman won the coati’s confidence; 
 how picric acid stains identified the small Jose. 
 
 —- Jos6. 1936 (Nat. Hist., September 1936, p. 126-134, illus.). 
 
 Further adventures of the coati which won a place on the American Museum’s 
 expedition at Barro Colorado. A center spread shows Jos6 in six poses, and 
 there are two more pictures of the scientist’s pet. 
 
 -- Jos6. 1937 (Nat. Hist., September 1937, p. 525, illus.). 
 
 Final chapter in the life of a little animal intelligent enough to seek the care 
 and protection of man between periodic forays into the jungle to look for a mate. 
 
 Cochran, Doris M. Brazil Bound (Nature, January 1940, p. 9-12, illus.). 
 
 Dr. Cochran, who is on the staff of the United States National Museum, 
 went to Brazil at the invitation of Dr. Adolpho Lutz, eminent pioneer in tropical 
 medicine and biology, whose failing eyesight made it impossible to complete a 
 monograph on Brazilian frogs. She tells about catching tropical frogs and 
 gives interesting glimpses of things Brazilian along the way, especially fauna and 
 flora. There is a description of the remarkable crater-like nest of the giant 
 tree-toad (Hylafaber) and a full-page illustration which shows it. Dr. Cochran’s 
 contacts with Brazilian scientists add to the value of this reference. 
 
 Curran, C. H. Insect Lore of the aztecs (Nat. Hist., March 1936, p. 196-203, 
 illus.). 
 
 The average Aztec of four centuries ago knew a great deal about insects. 
 For most of those that were poisonous they had remedies, and many of the 
 others they used as food. Grasshoppers formed an important part of diet, 
 and honey-making insects received attention. The General History of the Things 
 of New Spain completed by Sahagun in 1560 is authority for the Aztecs’ interest 
 in natural history, and this article reproduces 20 native drawings taken from 
 that work. Very good source material. 
 
 Duncan, David D. Fighting Giants of the Humboldt (Natl. Geog., March 1941, 
 p. 373-400, illus.). 
 
 Account of an expedition to the Pacific Coast of South America authorized 
 by the American Museum of Natural History and headed by Michael Lerner 
 of New York. The vocabulary is somewhat technical but not too difficult. Of 
 special interest: the swordfish, the giant squid, feared by all natives because of 
 its teeth-encrusted tentacles and the blinding inky fluid it shoots from a sac 
 in its body; the “burro redcaps” which carry home the fishermen’s catch un¬ 
 accompanied; the “avian sanitation corps” of vultures. Good pictures, in¬ 
 cluding two pictures of clouds of cormorants, with some explanation of the 
 guano industry. 
 
 Earle, Olive. Insect Factories (Nat. Hist., January 1940, p. 44-45, illus.). 
 
 A very short, concise account of the cochineal insect from which the Aztec 
 and Peruvian Indians obtained a scarlet dye, and an illustration showing a 
 cochineal insect and a type of cactus on which it lives and thrives. In this 
 article there is also information about lac insects. 
 
129 
 
 Fisher, Arthur. Concerning Crocodiles ( Nature, March 1941, p. 155-158, 
 illus.). 
 
 Adventure adds to the interest of the informative material concerning 
 crocodiles, which arc known as caiin&n in South America except in Brazil, 
 where they are called jacarb. Accompanied by a negro who can simulate the 
 call of the jacare, the author goes on a night hunt in the delta region of the 
 lower Amazon and “bags a big one”—but it is devoured by 'piranhas , the tiny, 
 swarming, man-eating fish. Photographs show crocodiles, an alligator for 
 comparison, piranhas. 
 
 - Maraio: Paradise of Bird Life and Lesson in Protection ( Nature , 
 
 January 1939, p. 35-38, illus.). 
 
 The little known island of Marajo, as large as Denmark and lying directly 
 in the mouth of the Amazon River, seems to the author “an ornithological 
 Eden.” Idyllic description of thousands of brilliantly colored birds winging 
 to the fishing grounds; white herons, scarlet ibises, rare egrets, hawk-headed 
 parrots, red and blue macaws. Five illustrations. 
 
 - The South American Lung Fish ( Nature , June-July 1940, p. 365, illus.). 
 
 When the dry season comes to the swamps of the Amazon Basin the lung fish 
 burrows into the mud, and its cellular air-bladder functions as a lung. When 
 the rains return the lung again becomes an air-bladder, the fish swims away. 
 Of interest when studying amphibians. 
 
 Mann, William M. Ivionkey Folk (Natl. Geog., May 1938, p. 615-655, illus.). 
 
 The Director of the National Zoological Park, Washington, D. C. writes 
 engagingly of monkeys and their life. Much information concerning varieties 
 of monkeys, their native habitats, life in captivity; photographs and paintings 
 from life, by Elie Cheverlange, reproduced in color, have great appeal. The 
 author remarks that lions and tigers are “superb snobs”: the monkey’s interested 
 response to visitors accounts in large part for his popularity at the zoo. 
 
 Pough, Richard H. Massacred for Millinery (Bird Lore , Sept.-Oct., 1940, 
 p. 395-404, illus.). 
 
 Includes description of the hunting of giant Andean condors with high- 
 powered rifles. The hunters climb to heights that will command the caves in 
 the cliff to which the condors retreat at night, and shoot them as they soar. 
 Downy white young birds, unable to fly for many months after hatching, wait 
 helplessly for food. 
 
 Stroock, Sylvan I. The Story of Vicuna, the World’s Finest Fabric. Pamphlet. 
 S. Stroock & Co., Inc., 404 Fifth Avenue, New York. 1937. 23 p., illus. 
 
 25^ for three copies. 
 
 Concise and comprehensive account of the vicuna and its habitat and of the 
 intricate processes required to manufacture the fleece into cloth. Historic 
 and legendary accounts of settlements in the Andine region where the animal 
 is found, methods of hunting used by the Indians, and the conservation measures 
 taken by the Peruvian government. Useful for social studies. 
 
 Thomas, Estelle Webb. Amigo (Story Parade, April 1939, p. 26-29, illus.). 
 
 A humorous story in rhyme about young Rodrigo and his burro, Amigo, who 
 are on their way to a fiesta on St. John’s Day. Illustrations by Ellis Credle 
 will appeal to children. They show Rodrigo and his donkey, his friends, their 
 sombreros, a petate (sleeping mat), a coconut tree, cactus plants. Recreational 
 reading. 
 
 Von Hagen, Wolfgang. The Flamingoes of the GaMpagos Islands (Nat. Hist., 
 February 1937, p. 137-139, illus.). 
 
 Describes the fantastic birds in their nesting colony at hatching time, amid 
 the desolate beauty of tiny Jervis Island. Photographs show the birds and 
 conical mounds containing the eggs, in the natural environment. Natural 
 science. 
 
 -In Search of the Quetzal ( Chr . Sci. Mon., Weekly Mag. Section, July 
 
 19, 1941, illus.). 
 
 The author unites recent scientific investigation of the quetzal bird of Gua¬ 
 temala with popular myth and clears up some misconceptions. A quetzal is 
 alive in captivity at the Zoological Park, St. Louis, Mo. There is a description 
 of the plumage and habits of the bird, an illustration in color showing the 
 quetzal, and a colored picture of a Maya priest’s headdress in a Milwaukee 
 
130 
 
 Museum exhibit. For natural science and history at junior high school interest 
 and reading level. 
 
 Fisher, Arthur. Strange Creatures of the Old New World ( Chr . Sci . Mon,. 
 Oct. 9-Dec. 25, illus.). 
 
 Series of 12 articles. See Intermediate list. 
 
 Watson, Capt. Edward H., U. S. N. The Captain’s Monkeys (Amer. For. 
 Serv. Jour., December 1936, p. 661, story, illus.). 
 
 See Intermediate list. 
 
 Wilson, Carl L. The Parasol Ant: America’s First Farmer ( Nature , March 
 1941, illus.). 
 
 The life and ways of the parasol ant which is an agricultural pest throughout 
 the American tropics. Much information, delightful style. The parasol ants 
 destroy the leaves of citrus plants, coffee plants, and banana trees. They do 
 not eat the leaves but manufacture food substance using them. 
 
 V. REFERENCES FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Cutright, Paul Russell. The Great Naturalists Explore South America. 
 New York. The Macmillan Co. 1940. 340 p., illus. 
 
 The book begins with a brief summary of the experiences of the great natural¬ 
 ists who explored South America. The rest of the book contains detailed and 
 authenticated information on animals, birds, butterflies, reptiles, insects, and 
 fish of South America. There is information on the habits of the animals as 
 Avell as on their environment, all told in an interesting and dramatic way, 
 much of which could be read by older children. There are individual chapters 
 on the following: vampire bat, armadillos, sloths, anteater, puma, jaguar, coati, 
 X^eccaries, tapir, guanaco, manatee, monkeys, rhea, condor, hoatzin, toucans, 
 hummingbirds, cock-of-the-rock, turtles, crocodiles, giant reptiles, dangerous 
 fish, insects, butterflies and bird migrants. The 39 excellent photographs add 
 greatly to the value of the text. The book also contains a comprehensive 
 bibliography of literature on natural history. 
 
 Gibson, Hugh. Rio. New York. Doubleday, Doran & Co. 1937. 263 p., illus. 
 
 Chapter 12, Jungle Ways in Town, makes brief mention of animals such 
 as the armadillo, sloth, and monkey which are found near the towns, as well as 
 particularly interesting material describing birds and their habits, butterflies, 
 moths, and insects. Chapter 13 is devoted to fishing in Brazil. The informa¬ 
 tion in both chapters is presented in a way to-hold the interest of the general 
 reader. 
 
 Romoli, Kathleen. Colombia: Gateway to .South America. Garden City, 
 N. Y. Doubleday, Doran & Co. 1941. 364 p., illus. 
 
 In an entertaining chapter entitled “Animals I Have Not Known” (Chapter 
 33), the author gives a great deal of information on the animals of Colombia. 
 The docile river cow, the playful raccoons, monkeys that “fit into your hand” 
 and the monos blancos (white monkeys), as well as fierce wild hogs and jaguars, 
 the carnivorous iambucha ants are all described in the chapter. 
 
 Sanderson, Ivan T. Caribbean Treasure. New York. Viking Press. 1939. 
 202 p., illus. 
 
 The experiences of the author in his travels through the jungles of Trinidad, 
 Haiti and Dutch Guiana. Much interesting information is included on the 
 habits of the animals and insects which he encounters. Among them are ant- 
 eaters, vampires, jaguars, sloth, porcupine, opossum and many others. There 
 are many episodes which could be adapted for younger children. The 32 
 illustrations picturing the animals described increase the worth of the book, 
 which would be valuable for nature study. 
 
 Verrill, A. Hyatt. Strange Animals and Their Stories. Boston. L. C. Page 
 & Co. 1939. 235 p., illus. 
 
 Included among the strange animals described in the book are many found 
 in Latin America. There is interesting material on the appearance and habits 
 of the porcupine, sloth (the topsyturvy creature), peccaries (wild pigs), kinkajou 
 or honey bear, llamas, guanaco, vicuna, vampire bats and an amusing legend 
 on the origin of the armadillo (p. 6). The 19 illustrations show the animals 
 described. 
 
131 
 
 Von Hagen, V. Wolfgang. Ecuador the Unknown. New York. Oxford 
 University Press. 1940. 296 p., illus. 
 
 In Chapter 13 the life-cycle of the enormous tortoises of the Galapagos 
 Islands from the time the egg is buried in the sand to the development of the 
 full-grown tortoise of about 500 pounds. Of particular interest is the descrip¬ 
 tion of the tiny, newly hatched two-ounce tortoise, the food he eats and the 
 growth of his shell. Two good photographs of the GaMpagos tortoise appear 
 on page 113. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Adams, John B. Hunting in Mato-Grosso (Travel in Brazil , vol. 1, no. 2, 1941, 
 illus.). 
 
 Recommended for pictures of a giant anteater with his 2 ft. toothless snout 
 a small but bloodthirsty piranha fish, an armadillo, a tapir, a giant stork with 
 a 10 ft. wmgspread, and pictures of the Brazilian tiger. 
 
 Birds and Beasts of Mexico’s Desert Islands (Natl. Geog., September 1941, p. 353- 
 360. 
 
 Twelve natural color photographs. See Junior High School list. 
 
 Chapman, Frank M. Jose: Two Months from the Life of a Barro Colorado 
 Coati (Nat. Hist., April 1935, p. 299-308, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list for three delightful articles on this jungle pet. 
 General interest for elementary children. 
 
 Cochran, Doris. Brazil Bound (Nature, January 1940, p. 9-12, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Valuable reference for content for elementary 
 grades. 
 
 Curran, C. H. Insect Lore of the Aztecs (Nat. Hist., March 1936, p. 196-203, (llus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. May be related to study of current agricultural 
 pests. 
 
 Duncan, David D. Fighting Giants of the Humboldt (Natl. Geog., March 1941, 
 p. 373-400, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Content interest, illustrations and map, suit¬ 
 able for upper elementary grades.—The relation of the squid to monsters of 
 mythology is brought out in an article “Scylla Was a Squid” by W. Ley, pub¬ 
 lished in Natural History, June 1941, which the teacher of literature may wish 
 to consult. 
 
 Earle, Olive. Insect Factories (Nat. Hist., January 1940, p. 44-45, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Content interest for younger children. 
 
 Evans, William and Edna. Underwater Butterflies (Nature, January 1941, 
 p. 25-28, illus.). 
 
 Nine photographs of tropical fish accompany the text, which is brief but in¬ 
 structive. The title suggests the brilliant coloring of the fish life found around 
 rocks and coral beds. Useful in units on marine life in tropics and as back¬ 
 ground for teachers maintaining an aquarium as a teaching aid or planning 
 trips to municipal aquarium. 
 
 Fisher, Arthur. Concerning Crocodiles (Nature, March 1941, p. 155—158, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Content interest for upper elementary grades. 
 
 -Marajo: Paradise of Bird Life and Lesson in Protection (Nature, Jan¬ 
 uary 1939, p. 35-38, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Content interest for upper elementary grades. 
 
 -- The South Ameiican Lung Fish (Nature, June-July 1940, p. 365, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Content interest for upper elementary grades. 
 
 Mann, William M. Monkey Folk (Natl. Geog., May 1938, p. 615-655, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Content interest and pictures for ail age levels. 
 
 Murphy, Robert Cushman. Dark Skies (Nat. Hist., March 1938, p. 165-178, 
 illus.). 
 
 A scientist’s vovage in a 38-foot boat along the rainy Pacific shores of Colom¬ 
 bia, the least-known continental seacoast in the world. Gives history of the 
 coast, causes and significance of tropical rains, life and habits of sea birds, etc. 
 Is accompanied by a map. Natural science curriculum material. 
 
 Pearson, Gilbert T. Pan American Convention on Nature Protection (Bird 
 
 Lore, Nov.-Dec. 1940, p. 555-556). \ 
 
 Two hundred eighty species, representing 33 families of land birds, migrate 
 each winter from the United States to countries south. At the Eighth Inter- 
 
132 
 
 national Conference of American States held in Lima in 1938 a resolution wa3 
 unanimously adopted declaring that all American countries should unite in 
 efforts to preserve “in their natural habitat representatives of all species and 
 races of their native flora and fauna,” and in 1940 the Pan American Con¬ 
 vention on Nature Protection met in Washington. This article describes 
 plans, committee organization, etc. 
 
 Pough, Richard H. Massacred for Millinery {Bird Lore, Sept.-Oct. 1940, 
 p. 395-404, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. 
 
 Simpich, Frederick. Life on the Argentine Pampa (Natl. Geog., October 1933, 
 p. 449-492, illus.). 
 
 A delightful picture of a baby armadillo four days old, a miniature of its 
 mother (p. 488) will be particularly valuable to the teacher. 
 
 Slevin, Joseph R. An Equatorial Wonderland (A Tat. Hist., December 1935, 
 p. 375-382, illus.). 
 
 The GaUpagos: a country of great volcanoes, giant tortoises and flightless 
 birds. Excellent illustrations of iguanas, penguins, albatross seal. 
 
 Stroock, Sylvan I. Llamas and Llamaland. Pamphlet. S. Stroock & Co., 
 Inc., 404 Fifth Avenue, New York. 1937. Illus. 3 copies, 250. 
 
 The story of the llama, the region to which it is indigenous, the products of 
 its fleece, its indispensability to Inca culture; other members of the llama 
 family. Social studies and natural science reference material for junior high 
 school. Factual material on animal and its habitat for elementary grades. 
 
 - The Story of Vicuna, the World’s Finest Fabric. Pamphlet. New 
 
 York. S. Stroock & Co., Inc. 1937. Illus. 3 copies, 25£. 
 
 See Junior High School listing. The vocabulary is simpler than in the 
 pamphlet listed above. There is picture- and content interest for elementary 
 children, especially the material on the animal and the country it inhabits. 
 
 Vogt, William. Wings over Waves (A'a£. Hist., April 1936, p. 319-344, illus.). 
 
 This is a review of Dr. Robert Cushman Murphy’s monumental Oceanic 
 Birds of South America and reproduces 11 of Francis L. Jaques’ color illustra¬ 
 tions. The full page picture of Peruvian penguins and information concerning 
 these birds who range along that part of the coast which is in contact with the 
 Humboldt current, will be of special interest to the elementary teacher. 
 
 Von Hagen, Wolfgang. The Ant that Carries a Parasol {Nat. Hist., January 
 1939, p. 27-32, illus.). 
 
 Observations of the complete life cycle of parasol ants of Honduras, their 
 nests, organizations, manner of securing food, work habits, defense. Reptiles, 
 birds, and man eat these ants. The Indians snap off the head, legs, and wings 
 and toast them on a stone. The soldier ants of this colony hold on so tightly 
 that the only way to remove them is to crush the ant. The Indians take 
 advantage of this tenacity and use the soldier ant to suture wounds. The ant 
 bites deep clamping the two edges of the skin together. 
 
 —-The Flamingoes of the GaUpagos Islands {Nat. Hist., February 1937, 
 
 p. 137-139, illus.). 
 
 Content interest for upper elementary grades. (See Junior High School list.) 
 Picture interest at all levels. Natural science. 
 
 - In Quest of the Quetzal {Chr. Sci. Mon., Weeklv Mag. Section, July 
 
 19, 1941). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Lesson planning material for elementary grades. 
 
 KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Amer. For. Serv. Jour- 
 Bull. Pan Amer. Union 
 
 Chr. Sci. Mon_ 
 
 Jr. Arts and Activ_ 
 
 Jr. Nat. Hist_ 
 
 Jr. Red Cross News_ 
 
 Natl. Geog_ 
 
 Nat. Hist_ 
 
 American Foreign Service Journal. 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. 
 Christian Science Monitor. 
 
 Junior Arts and Activities. 
 
 Junior Natural History. 
 
 American Junior Red Cross News. 
 National Geographic Magazine. 
 Natural History. 
 
133 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 

 
 
 
 134 
 
 
 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
{ Children of the Other Americas } 
 
 ANCIENT CIVILIZATIONS 
 
 AND 
 
 MODERN REPUBLICS 
 
 (135) 
 
 490718 0 - 42 - 10 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 , Page 
 
 Introduction_ 139 
 
 Part I. Children of Long Ago: 
 
 References for the Intermediate Grades: 
 
 1. Books_ 141 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 142 
 
 References for the Junior High School: 
 
 1. Books_ 143 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 145 
 
 References for the Teacher: 
 
 1. Books_ 147 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 148 
 
 Part II. Heroes of War and Peace: 
 
 References for the Intermediate Grades: 
 
 1. Books__ 153 
 
 References for the Junior High School: 
 
 1. Books_ 153 
 
 2. Periodicals_ 154 
 
 References for the Teacher: 
 
 L Books_ 154 
 
 2. Periodicals_ 156 
 
 Key to Abbreviations_ 158 
 
 (137) 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * » 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANCIENT CIVILIZATIONS AND MODERN REPUBLICS 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 Many chapters in the story of the Americas have been written 
 about the life and deeds of their great men and women. Centuries 
 before Columbus set sail for the New World some of them lived in this 
 hemisphere. Men like Tenoch, who guided the Aztec people to the 
 Valley of Mexico; Manco Capac, founder of the Inca kingdom; and 
 Netzahualcoyotl, the poet king. Their splendid cities, fine highways, 
 and beautiful arts dazzled the intrepid Spanish conquerors who reached 
 these shores four and a half centuries ago. Remnants of their work 
 are still found in the Americas today, mute hut convincing evidence 
 of their imagination and skill. 
 
 Following closely on the heels of Columbus came others who blazed 
 new trails in unknown lands and fought bravely on the battlefield. A 
 few of their names are familiar—Cortes, Balboa, and Bolivar. Scarcely 
 known to us, but no less courageous, were the men and women who 
 served their country and mankind on other fronts. In the classroom, 
 the laboratory and hospital, from pulpit and in the press, Sarmiento, 
 Finlay, Las Casas, Sor Juana Ines de la Cruz, and others earned their 
 place on the role of the nation/s great. Like the United States, Latin 
 America has its Lincolns, its Buffalo Bills, and its Horatio Algers, and 
 its men like Christoplie, Artigas and O’Higgins occupy a prominent 
 place among the nation builders. 
 
 If we want to build friendship and understanding with the people 
 of the other American nations, we must also know these men and 
 women who lived-before them and who have been a force in shaping 
 the destiny of their country. 
 
 As the following list indicates, few writers for children have turned 
 to this field for their themes. Likewise, the adult material is concen¬ 
 trated almost entirely on a few characters. 
 
 ( 139 ) 
 

 
 ■ 
 
 -» 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Part I. CHILDREN OF LONG AGO 
 
 REFERENCES FOR THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Borton, Elizabeth. Our Little Aztec Cousin of Long Ago. Boston. L. C. 
 Page & Co. 1934. 83 p., illus. 
 
 The story of a little Aztec boy whose unintentional disobedience causes him 
 to be sold into slavery. His devotion and loyalty to his master, the merchant, 
 and his keen observation on their trip into the interior brings about the appre¬ 
 hension of one of Montezuma’s traitors. A great deal of information on Aztec 
 life is included in this book—the schools, homes, their merchants and colorful 
 markets and the many products found in them. Good material for social 
 studies. 
 
 Burbank, Addison. The Cedar Deer. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 
 1940. 156 p., illus. 
 
 Good historical material on the Mayas and the conquest, together with some 
 of their legends, is included in this book. There is also some information on 
 the ceremonies still practiced by the Indians of Guatemala, as well as their 
 place in the life of the country. The book takes its name from the deer which 
 the little boy carves from wood as a present for the President. Good illustra¬ 
 tions, some in color. 
 
 Coatsworth, Elizabeth. The Boy With the Parrot. New York. The Mac¬ 
 millan Co. 1930. 101 p., illus. 
 
 Brief, but authentic historical material is introduced in this story of a Guate¬ 
 malan peddler boy and his adventures when he goes to the capital. Told with 
 understanding of the country and the people. 
 
 Finger, Charles J. Tales From Silver Lands. New York. Doubleday, Page 
 & Co. 1924. 225 p., illus. 
 
 Legends and stories of Latin American people and animals simply but 
 graphically told. The stories have rich, varied background and good folklore 
 quality. To be enjoyed and re-read. 
 
 Hodges, C. W. Columbus Sails. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 1939. 
 217 p., illus. 
 
 A series of stories told by a monk, a sailor, a pilot, and an Indian, depicting 
 Columbus’ trials in getting help for his voyages, the discovery of America, the 
 planting of the first colony and its failure. Good 4 information, vividly presented; 
 for Latin American background. 
 
 Lang, Andrew, ed. The Conquest of Montezuma’s Empire. New York. Long¬ 
 mans, Green & Co. 1928. 235 p., illus. 
 
 This simply written account of Cortes’ conquest of Mexico gives a good 
 picture of the Aztecs and their civilization, as well as the oustanding events in 
 the conquest. The wealth of Montezuma’s empire, the gifts sent to Cortes, the 
 description of the capital and its impression on the Spaniards are all well de¬ 
 scribed. The painters who recorded events in pictures and the details of their 
 messages furnish good information which children could use in working out a 
 like record of some of the events in their own school life. 
 
 Malkus, Alida. Along the Inca Highway. New World Neighbors Series. 
 Boston. D. C. Heath & Co. 1931. 56 p., illus. 
 
 Describes an airplane trip from Panama to Peru and follows with a brief 
 summary of the Spanish conquest and short sketches of Pizarro, Bolivar and 
 San Martin. Good illustrations in color. 
 
 (141) 
 
142 
 
 Purnell, Idella. The Merry Frogs. New York. Suttonhouse, Ltd. 1936. 
 109 p., illus. 
 
 Well-written legends of the Aztecs and the Mayan Indians, most of them 
 about their birds and animals. These include such legends as how the bat 
 saved the world, the deer’s sandals which he borrowed from the rabbit, the 
 three birds and a little black dog, the old man of Teutli and the rabbit who 
 loved him, the snake in the water, the foolish coyote, and others. The stories 
 are told with sympathy and charm and children will enjoy re-reading them. 
 Each legend is illustrated. 
 
 Purnell, Idella, and John Weatherwax. The Talking Bird: An Aztec Story 
 Book. New York. The Macmillan Co. 1930. 95 p., illus. 
 
 A collection of Aztec legends told with charm. Why the parrot has a crooked 
 bill, curled up toes and rasping voice; the story of the Eagle Prince; the bird of 
 love, or the dove; the jump-over-the-wall bird are all included. In addition 
 there are other stories of the queen and the giant, the moon princess and the 
 eagle and the snake. Striking illustrations in black and white add to the book’s 
 appeal for children. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Baldwin, Louise E. White Bird on the Water (short story). Story Parade 
 Yellow Book (anthology), p. 228-239. John C. Winston Co. 1939. Illus. 
 
 Beautifiully written story of the encounter of a Mayan merchant and his son 
 Chan with Christopher Columbus and his youngest son, near the coast of 
 Honduras in 1502. Gives a good idea of Mayan life and customs on shore as 
 well as description of the merchant’s voyage. The mode of transportation was 
 a long sea-going canoe hollowed from a single mahogany log, provisioned with 
 water and maize paste; the cargo included bales of fine cotton cloth in richly 
 colored designs, pottery, baskets, copper, salt and rubber-tipped drumsticks, to 
 be exchanged for cacao, obsidian stone used for knives, gold, jade, pearls, emer¬ 
 alds and brilliant feathers. Activities suggested: modeling of commodities, 
 beehives, canoes; dramatization of the meeting of Chan and his merchant father 
 with Columbus and his son. 
 
 Beard, Mansur. The Big Ears {Jr. Red Cross News, February 1940, p. 8-10, 
 story, illus.). 
 
 A story of the Inca Empire with much incidental information. The legend 
 of the founding of Cuzco; the Inca way of life, government, social institutions 
 are described. The title comes from the rulers’ custom of wearing golden ear 
 plugs, which gave them the name. 
 
 Galvan, Luis. Columbus Memorial Cruciform Beacon to Mark Resting Place 
 of Discoverer (World Youth , March 2, 1940, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 This is a short but well written article for children. The memorial is described 
 with enough detail to satisfy the curiosity of the young reader. There is a 
 good photograph of the model, the thousand-foot white cross to be erected in 
 Santo Domingo in memory of Columbus. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. For Bravery {Jr. Red Cross News, April 1941, p. 199, illus.). 
 
 This is the story of Lochinte, a little Mayan girl who received a cloak of 
 feathers from, her father as a reward for bravery when she dated the darkness of 
 a deep ravine and the cries of the puhuv, the night bird, to get herbs for her sick 
 mother. Even the Painter-of-History recorded her bravery. Feather work and 
 other handicraft of the Mayans. Stylized illustrations by Ariel Baynes include 
 Xochiquetzai, goddess of flowers; cover design, Chan, Maya god of rain and 
 fertilitju Art, language, social studies. Reading at elementary level for ap¬ 
 preciation of the home life of a Mayan child of long ago. 
 
 -The Aztec People. Pamphlet. Published by the World Federation of 
 
 Education Assns. with the cooperation of the National Committee of Latin 
 American Studies in the Elementary and Secondary Schools. (15c each, 10^ in 
 lots of 20 or more.) Address World Federation of Education Assns., 1201 16th 
 Street, NW., Washington, D. C. 
 
 Brief summary of the history of the Aztec people from their early settlement 
 in the Valley of Mexico to the eve of their conquest by Cort6s. Their merchants 
 w r arriors, banners, religion, education and recreation are all included. Striking 
 illustrations in color of Aztec rain god, warrior and priest. 
 
143 
 
 Kett, Charlotte. In the Footsteps of Columbus (Jr. Red Cross News, October 
 1936, p. 35-38, illus.). 
 
 Contains historical detail of the preparations and plans that preceded 
 Columbus’ voyage of discovery. Material of value to a social studies class 
 studying the effects of inventions and discoveries. Fifth and sixth grade 
 level. Map. 
 
 Malkus, Alida. Eleven Thousand Llamas. Story Parade Yellow Book (an¬ 
 thology) p. 102-115. Philadelphia. John C. Winston Co. 1939. 
 
 Short story, adventure of an Indian boy and his llama. When the llama 
 crops a bunch of grass growing from beneath a rock, the boy finds gold that 
 might have been buried by his ancestors. Provides approach to the history of 
 the Incas before the Spaniard came. 
 
 Mysterious Easter Island (Jr. Red Cross News, April 1939. p. 16, illus.). 
 
 The legendary origin of Easter Island, of the huge stone statues found on it, 
 its discovery and naming, and volcanic forces that make and submerge islands. 
 Easter Island is a possession of Chile and a potential naval base; of curriculum 
 interest for this reason and when studying the earliest inhabitants of America 
 and where they came from. 
 
 The Indians of La Guajira. Translated by Edward Huberman (Story Parade , 
 April 1939, p. 21-24, illus.). 
 
 Adapted from Rin Rin, a Colombian children’s magazine. A story of Indians 
 whose ancestors Columbus saw on the Caribbean shores of Colombia. The 
 story tells how the Indians of La Guajira dive for pearls, weave hammocks and 
 colorful belts, and export salt; well chosen illustrations of a pearl diver and an 
 Indian horseman. 
 
 REFERENCES FOR THE JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Banks, Helen Ward. The’Story of Mexico. New York. Frederick A. Stokes 
 Co. 435 p., illus. 
 
 More than half of this book on Mexico is devoted to the conquest of the 
 Aztecs. There is an excellent summary of the Aztec culture: the people, 
 their customs, trade, the warriors and the priests, the merchants, markets, and 
 festivals. 
 
 Craine, E. J. Conquistador. New York. Duffield & Green. 1931. 288 p. 
 
 A story based on the adventures of Pedro Cieza de Leon when he sailed with 
 Don Pedro de Heredia who went to enforce the king’s laws in Peru following 
 the conquest. There are good details of the customs of that period as well as 
 a brief, concise survey of colonial history of the country berween Panama and 
 northern Chile. Good for supplementary reading and background on Latin 
 AmcricR 
 
 -The Victor. New York. , Duffield & Green. 1933. 254 p. 
 
 An excellent story of Peru shortly after the Spanish conquest. Good de¬ 
 scription of life and customs of the upper class Incas, based on the writings 
 of Garcilaso de la Vega, son of an Inca princess and a Spanish conquerer. 
 Shows the wealth, progress, and education of these Indians and points up the 
 rift between the Spaniards themselves after the conquest. Swift action, 
 interesting characters. A useful book for supplementary reading in Latin 
 American history. 
 
 Desmond, Alice Curtis. For Cross and King. New York. Dodd, Mead & Co. 
 1941. 297 p. 
 
 The story centers on young Diego de Almagro, twelve-year-old son of Pizarro’s 
 partner, and life in Peru in the middle and last half of the sixteenth century. 
 Pizarro’s treachery, the break between the partners, the death of Diego’s 
 father, and the boy’s imprisonment, escape, and finally his elevation to governor¬ 
 ship of* Peru are all well told in a swiftly moving story with authentic back¬ 
 ground. 
 
 - Soldier of the Sun. New York. Dodd, Mead & Co. 1939. 243 p. 
 
 A story of Peru in the days of the Incas. Excellent information on the cus¬ 
 toms of the Indians, the civil war between two half brothers who ruled Peru at the 
 
144 
 
 time of Pizarro’s invasion and conquest. The story is vividly told with swift 
 action. Good to supplement material on history and geography of Latin 
 America. 
 
 Fernald, Helen C., and Edwin M. Slocombe. The Scarlet Fringe. New 
 York. Longmans, Green & Co. 1932. 236 p. 
 
 Well-written story of the Incas at the time of their conquest. Many of the 
 Inca customs are depicted and there is a good description of the harvest feast, 
 with details of the crowd and their costumes, as well as of the spring festival 
 and the tilling of the fields and terraces. The description of a quipu bv which 
 the Incas sent secret messages (p. 176) is given in sufficient detail so that 
 children might work one out and send messages to another group in school. 
 Mystery, intrigue, a secret cave, and an encounter with a thief in the Sacred 
 Temple all add interest as well as background. 
 
 Finger, Charles J. Courageous Companions. New York. Longmans, Green 
 & Co. 1929. 304 p., illus. 
 
 A story based on the historical documents of Magellan’s voygae. The 
 adventures, hardships, and achievements of the English boy who shipped on 
 the first trip around the world. Glimpses of the Indians of South America, 
 the Patagonians, and the Ladrones Island. Good'adventure, vividly told and 
 valuable for information on Latin American history and geography. 
 
 Ivnoop, Faith Yingling. Quest of the Cavaliers. New York. Longmans, 
 Green & Co. 1940. 202 p., illus. 
 
 In addition to a well-written biography of Herdando de Soto, this book 
 briefly reviews conditions in Spain under Ferdinand and Isabella and gives a 
 colorful account of many of the other conquerors. Included among them are 
 Cortes and his conquest of Mexico, Pizarro in Peru, Balboa’s epic march across 
 Panama and his discovery of the Pacific, the cruel Pedrarias, De Soto’s foster 
 father, and finally De Soto’s expedition into what is now the United States 
 and his death and burial in the waters of the Mississippi. Effective pen and 
 ink sketches illustrate the book. Excellent as a supplementary book in 
 history. 
 
 Lide, Alice Alison. Aztec Drums. New York. Longmans, Green & Co. 
 1938. 139 p. illus. 
 
 The adventures of Xochitl, son of the Aztec weaver, when he tries to avenge 
 the theft of his grandfather’s beautiful robe, woven for the Emperor’s contest. 
 Much detailed information on the life of the ancient Aztecs is given, as well as 
 considerable jungle lore, for it is there the young Aztec hides from the treacher¬ 
 ous thief. How he conceives the idea of the beautiful robe of feathers, his return 
 to his home to make it and how he saves the capital city of the Aztecs and finally 
 presents the most beautiful of all robes to Montezuma makes an interesting 
 story, well told. Illustrated with pen and ink sketches and contains a good 
 glossary of Indian names. 
 
 - Princess of Yucatdn. New York. Longmans, Green & Co. 1939. 187 p., 
 
 illus. , 
 
 The story of a young girl, once a Mayan princess, who is enslaved by the Aztecs 
 and sent to live in a camp near the Sacred City, Chich6n Itzd. During the day 
 she toils in the stone quarries and at night her grandfather secretly teaches her 
 the traditions of her people—their songs and stories, and, most difficult of all, 
 how to read the hieroglyphic writing of her people. It is through this knowledge 
 that she is able to escape from the Aztecs and, after a long perilous trip through 
 the Old Mayan Empire, to recover a vast store of gold and jewels, return with it 
 to Chich6n Itz£ and buy the freedom of her people. A good adventure story as 
 well as interesting information on many Mayan and Aztec customs. Useful 
 as supplementary reading on preconquest period. 
 
 Malkus, Alida Sims. A Fifth for the King. New York. Harper Bros. 1931. 
 250 p. 
 
 A story of the conquestof Yucatan and the discovery of the Amazon centering 
 on the adventures of a young Spanish boy and his friendship with a young 
 Indian. There is adventure of the high seas, shipwreck, and finally the settle¬ 
 ment made at Yucatan. Well-written material for entertainment as well as 
 for background. 
 
145 
 
 Malkus, A«lida Sims. The Dark Star of Itzd. New York. Harcourt, Brace 
 & Co. 1930. 217 p., illus. 
 
 A well-told story of the Mayan Indians, with authentic background. Contains 
 colorful descriptions of their splendid cities and graphic details of the individual 
 costumes of the high priets, warriors, kings and princesses and others of noble 
 blood. A Mayan festival is well described and the story follows through to the 
 dissension among the Mayans and the coming of the Toltecs. A maiden is 
 sacrificed to the Rain God but is rescued. Good illustrations. Useful as material 
 on the Mayan civilization and also as source of information for costumes and 
 art. 
 
 Purnell, Idella. The Lost Princess of Yucatan. New York. Henry Holt 
 & Co. 1931. 188 p. 
 
 A modern story w r ith a Yucatan setting based on the friendship of a girl from 
 the United States and an Indian girl who turns out to be of the Mayan nobility. 
 Many of the Mayan customs and traditions are included. Mystery and 
 intrigue add to the pace of the story, which children who like good adventure 
 will enjoy. 
 
 Smith, Henry Justin. Senor Zero. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 1931. 
 377 p. 
 
 Well-written fiction about the young cabin boy who sailed on Columbus’ 
 first voyage. Later he goes with Alonso Ojeda when he makes his first trip to 
 South America. Still later he is captured by the Carib Indians and lives with 
 them for several years. The story gives good information on the period, particu¬ 
 larly on the various Indians of the Caribbean region. Useful for supplementary 
 material on Latin American history. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Curran, C. H. Insect Lore of the Aztecs (Nat. Hist., March 1936, p. 196-203 
 illus.). 
 
 Source material on Aztec use of grasshoppers and other insects for food, on 
 therapeutic measures against poisonous insects such as the black widow spider, 
 on superstitions interwoven with Aztec natural science. The authority is 
 Sahagun, whose General History of the Things of New Spain was completed in 
 1560. Twenty pictures reproduced from the monumental work of the Spanish 
 monk show^ the Aztec use of the brush as the camera is used today in recording 
 customs. 
 
 Goetz. Delia. The Aztec People. Published by the World Federation of 
 Education Assns. with the cooperation of Natl. Comm, of Latin American 
 Studies in the Elementary and Secondary Schools. Washington. 1941. 
 Illus. 
 
 See Intermediate listing. 
 
 Herring, Hubert. Peru: The Land of the Incas (Jr. Red Cross Jour., October 
 1938, p. 35-37, illus.). 
 
 Tells how Pizarro with his conquistadores took advantage of internal disorders 
 to conquer the country. Modern Peru is built on the foundation of Inca 
 Peru as modified by the Spaniards, and her people, government and economic 
 life must be understood against that background. Twice the size of Texas, 
 with seven million people, Peru is a nation “flung over the bristling back of 
 the high cordillera of the Andes.” It is, incidentally, the home of the potato, 
 a food frozen and stored against need. 
 
 Lemos, Pedro J. de. Colonial Days Lived Again (School Arts, November 1940, 
 p. 87-94, illus.). 
 
 The author is Director of the Museum of Fine Arts, Stanford University, 
 and is interested in the restoration of the beautiful structures in old Antigua, 
 the vice-regal capital of Guatemala destroyed by earthquake. He lived for a 
 short time in the “House in Antigua” which is the subject of a book by Louis 
 Adamic, and relates in a practical way how the Popenoes restored it. The 
 article includes a considerable amount of general information, and is recom¬ 
 mended for appreciation of life and customs of colonial times. 
 
146 
 
 MacMaster, Amy. The Three R’s in Ancient Maya (Jr. Red Cross Jour,, 
 October 1939, p. 49-50, illus.). 
 
 Account of the reading, arithmetic, astronomy and history that Mayan 
 children, sons and daughters of the ruling class, had to learn. There was 
 writing made up partly of pictures and partly of symbols for sounds, a picture 
 system of doing arithmetic, and most important, perhaps, the calendar arts. 
 For diversion the Mayas played a game somewhat like basketball, which 
 ended with the spectators fleeing, hotly pursued by the winner and his friends. 
 The winner had a legal right to the jewels and clothes of the spectators—but it 
 was up to him to get them. Picture value for symbols ancf figures from Mayan 
 astronomy; history, social studies, mathematics. 
 
 Marden, Luis. On the Cortes Trail (Natl. Geog., September 1940, p. 335-375, 
 illus.). 
 
 A vivid and detailed account of a trip over the route that Cortes followed, 
 mapped from documents and histories. Interwoven is the historical account 
 of the Conqueror’s march, in informal style. Excellent pictures include repro¬ 
 ductions of drawings from a Mexican codex as well as photographs of what the 
 author saw along the way 400 years later. 
 
 Newhall, Beatrice. Indian Life in Stamps of the Pan American Countries 
 (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, June 1939, p. 322-336, illus.). 
 
 Stamps depicting different phases of Indian life are reproduced and their 
 historical significance related. Bolivia, Brazil, the Dominican Republic, 
 Ecuador. El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Mexico, Nicaragua, Panama, and 
 Peru are among the countries that have issued stamps featuring phases of Indian 
 life. These stamps show monuments of the ancient Americans, discovery and 
 colonization of the New World, ancient civilizations of the Andes, sixteenth 
 century Indians and Indian life and customs. Valuable to the elementary 
 teacher for the authentic information on the earliest Americans and the phila¬ 
 telic medium through which it is conveyed. 
 
 Sarmiento, Luis A. The Unknown Age .in Colombia (Nat. Hist., June 1941, 
 p. 14-18, illus.). 
 
 A Colombian educator describes a two-dav trip from Bogota to the ruins of 
 San Agustin. Francisco Jose de Caldas, a patriot and scholar, friend of Alexan¬ 
 der von Humboldt, was the first to be interested in these ruins. He was killed 
 b}' the Spaniards a century and a half ago, and interest lapsed until a German 
 ethnologist revived it twenty-five years ago. Fierce looking pairs of catlike 
 teeth are characteristic of many of the stone gods of San Agustin, but the site 
 has not been fully explored and the people who occupied it are still a mystery. 
 
 Stirling, Matthew W. Discovering the New World’s Oldest Dated Work of 
 Man (Natl. Geog., August 1939, p. 183-218, illus.). 
 
 Absorbing story of the Mayan monument inscribed 291 B. C. which was 
 unearthed near a huge stone head by the Geographic-Smithsonian expedition 
 in Mexico. Includes account of the Tuxtla statuette dated 98 B. C. which is 
 now in the National Museum at Washington. Calendar, early American 
 dates, elementary astronomy. 
 
 The True Story of Columbus. (School Arts, September 1941, p. 29.) 
 
 Statements concerning each of the four voyages of Columbus are given. 
 The author wishes to eradicate through historical research the fabricated story 
 of Columbus dying in prison chains. Directions for making a diorama based 
 on scenes from the story of Columbus appear on p. 19-20. 
 
 Ugarte, B., Rogelio. Santiago through Four Centuries (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, April 1941, p. 235-245). 
 
 In February 1941 the 400th anniversary of the founding of Santiago, Chile, by 
 Pedro de Valdivia was celebrated. This article traces the history of the city 
 from its founding through colonial times and the struggle for independence. 
 Good material on customs of the past. Nine photographs of the modern city. 
 
 Vaillant, George C. The Death Throes of the Aztec Nation (Nat. Hist., 
 March 1937, p. 185-195, illus.). 
 
 A story of one of the great military campaigns of history, reflecting a curious 
 note of modernity, with the lively drawings of Aztec draughtsmen taking the 
 place of news photographs. The pictures, made some years after the Con- 
 
147 
 
 quest, show Cortes and his army on the way to the capital, his meeting with 
 dignitaries from Tlaxcala, and various events leading to the downfall of the 
 Aztecs. 
 
 REFERENCES FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Adamson, Hans Christian. Land of New World Neighbors. New York. 
 McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1931. 593 p. 
 
 A book which parallels each of the 26 broadcasts of the New Horizon series 
 presented by the Columbia Broadcasting Company. Beginning with the dis¬ 
 covery of America, the book covers the main events in the history of the Western 
 Hemisphere, with separate chapters on the liberators of Argentina, Paraguay, 
 and Uruguay. The material contains much interesting, colorful information 
 but takes the countries only to their independence rather than down to date. 
 The book is indexed, but contains neither a map nor any illustrations, both of 
 which would have greatly increased its value. 
 
 Anderson, C. L. G. Life and Letters of Vasco Nunez de Balboa. New York. 
 Fleming II. Revell Co. 1941. 308 p., illus. 
 
 In addition to a biography of Balboa, the book contains a great deal of infor¬ 
 mation on the explorations and conquests of the time, including accounts of the 
 quest for the South Sea, Cortes in Mexico, the arrival of Pedrarias in Panama 
 and his treachery to Balboa. Twenty-six photographs and two maps illustrate 
 the book. 
 
 Green, Philip Leonard. Our Latin American Neighbors. New York. Hast¬ 
 ings House. 1941. 128 p. 
 
 Chapters II and III (p. 9-39) discuss the various theories of the origins of 
 man in America, the different types of aboriginal races which inhabited the 
 New World at the time of the discovery and the distinctive characteristics of the 
 tribes. In Chapter IV (p. 39-49), the author discusses the racial strains of the 
 men who conquered the New World and the way they influenced the civilization 
 found here. The Negro’s contribution to civilization is covered in Chapter V 
 (p. 50-52), while Chapters VI and VII (p. 53-73) include interesting information 
 on the races which make up the present population of the American republics. 
 
 Kelsey, Vera, and Lilly de Jongh Osborne. Four Keys to Guatemala. 
 New York. Funk & Wagnalls Co. 1939. 332 p., illus. 
 
 Seven chapters of this book—Chapter II through IX (p. 5-123) are devoted 
 to the Indians of Guatemala, from the pre-Mayas to the present tribes. There 
 is interesting and accurate information on their traditions, their home life, 
 ceremonies, festivals, pilgrimages, and costumes. Thirty-two excellent photo¬ 
 graphs of Indian life, arts, and crafts illustrate this section. 
 
 Niles, Blair. Peruvian Pageant: A Journey in Time. Indianapolis. Bobbs- 
 Merrill & Co. 1937. 309 p., illus. 
 
 A well written book in which the author takes the reader on “a journey in 
 in time” to meet the personalities and events of ancient Peru and follows on 
 through this country’s history, combining her own travel journal, to the present. 
 Twenty-eight excellent photographs illustrate the book, and an index and map 
 add to the reader’s convenience. 
 
 Prescott, W. H. The Conquest of Mexico. New York. E. P. Dutton & Co. 
 1931. Vol. I, 436 p. Vol. II, 404 p. 
 
 These two volumes constitute a detailed account not only of the conquest 
 but of the civilization of the Aztecs. Much of this material could be adapted 
 for junior high school grades. The discovery and early part of the conquest 
 makes up Volume I, while Volume II takes up the latter period and follows 
 through to the end of Cortes’ career. Of particular interest to children would 
 be Chapter I of Book 4, Volume I, which describes in detail the ancient Aztec 
 capital, the palaces and museums and Montezuma’s household. 
 
 - The Conquest of Peru. New York. E. P. Dutton & Co. 1933. 
 
 648 p. 
 
 A standard work on the conquest of Peru, including an excellent section 
 on the civilization of the Incas before the conquest. Much of this information 
 on the homes, education, festivals, and runners would be of interest to chil¬ 
 dren and could be adapted for their age level. The book also takes up the 
 
148 
 
 discovery of Peru, its conquest by Pizarro, the civil strife among the Spaniards 
 following the conquest and the settlement of the country. 
 
 Robinson, Henry Morton. Stout Cortez. New York. The Century Co. 
 1931. 347 p. 
 
 The first chapter sums up the events in Spain and the New World in the 15th 
 century and gives a brief sketch of Cortez as a youth at school. The remainder 
 of the book is devoted to his life in America, his conquest of Mexico, its rebuild¬ 
 ing, his brief hour of glory and then the decline and loss of power and death. 
 
 Romoli, Kathleen. Colombia: Gateway to South America. Garden City, 
 New York. Doubleday, Doran & Co. 1941. 364 p., illus. 
 
 Chapter VIII (p. 48) of this book gives an interesting and colorful description 
 of the Chibcha Indians and their homes and villages as the Spanish conquerors 
 found them. Many of their legends and traditions are included, as well as 
 their tribal administration. 
 
 Shay, Frank. Incredible Pizarro. New York. The Mohawk Press. 1932. 
 342 p., illus. 
 
 A biography of Pizarro packed with details which give the background of the 
 times and the people. The first part of the book is devoted to this introductory 
 material to show the events that influenced Pizarro’s later life. The wealth 
 of material used makes it a good reference book although it slows the action 
 and detracts from the main figure. The author admits his life-long admiration 
 for Pizarro. The fifteen illustrations include pictures of Pizarro and other 
 notable figures and events of the period. 
 
 Vaillant, George C. Aztecs of Mexico. Garden City, New York. Double¬ 
 day, Doran & Co., 1941. 340 p., illus. 
 
 In this book the Associate Curator of Mexican Archaeology of the American 
 Museum of Natural History, has traced the origin, rise and fall of the Aztec 
 nation. The major portion of the book is based on contemporary observations 
 of the Aztecs and the Spaniards who conquered them. There is much inter¬ 
 esting information on the customs, arts and crafts, the Aztec’s relation to the 
 tribe, his school, religion, ritual and wars. The Aztec capital, Tenochtitlan, 
 which stood on the present site of Mexico’s capital, is described in detail. The 
 book concludes with a chapter on the Aztecs after their conquest. Sixty-four 
 halftone plates and 28 pen and ink drawings illustrate every phase of Aztec 
 life and culture. Contains a bibliography of Spanish and English works. 
 
 Wilgus, A. Curtis. The Development of Hispanic America. New York. 
 Farrar & Rinehart. 1941. 941 p. 
 
 In Chapter II (p. 23-49) the author briefly describes the ethnological back¬ 
 ground of the Americas, and includes a discussion of the various theories on the 
 origin of early man in America, the origin and civilization of the Mayas, the 
 Aztecs, the Incas and the Chibchas. A good summary for background on which 
 to base further reading. 
 
 Williams, Mary W. The People and Politics of Xatin America. New York. 
 Ginn & Co. 1938. 888 p. 
 
 The origin of the aboriginal Americans and a survey of some of the principal 
 peoples encountered by the Spanish conquerors is discussed in Chapter II 
 (p. 17-64). The advent of the Mayas and the rise of their civilization is treated 
 at some length, as are the Aztecs, Toltecs, the pre-Incan people and the Inca 
 empire. The Chibchas of Colombia and their neighbors are also included. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Aztec Pulque God (Nat. Hist., cover design for March 1937 and note, p. 218). 
 
 This drawing in color from the Codex Magliabecchiano, a Mexican man¬ 
 uscript of the latter XVI century, is recommended because it is authentic, 
 reproduced on a scale which makes it easy to recognize the distinguishing 
 paraphernalia of the god portrayed, and because it is accompanied by a brief, 
 clear explanatory note (p. 218). The deity portrayed is one of 400 gods asso¬ 
 ciated with pulque, an intoxicating drink made from the fermented sap of the 
 maguey, but the teacher may use the material as a basis for explaining other 
 gods. Children will be able to make out the characteristic insignia: feather 
 banner and square shield in the left hand, stone ax in the right, gold nose orna¬ 
 ment symbolizing the moon, and headdress of paper surmounted by feathers. 
 
149 
 
 Bennett, Wendell C. Macchu Picchu (Nat. Hist., June 1935, p. 65-72, illus.). 
 
 A detailed description of the ruined city of Macchu Picchu discovered by 
 Dr. Hiram Bingham in 1911, and its significance for unraveling unsolved prob¬ 
 lems pertaining to pre-Columbian civilization. There are 11 photographs 
 which show details of the stone work, air views of the site, an intihuatana or 
 sundial by which the seasons were accurately calculated, and other views. The 
 material about the sundial is recommended to the elementary teacher for work 
 in social studies on time recording. 
 
 - Weaving in the Land of the Incas (Nat. Hist., June 1935, p. 65-72, illus.). 
 
 Description of clothing worn by men and women as recorded by writers at 
 the time of the Conquest and as evidenced by specimens found in tombs in the 
 dry desert region along the coast; information on fabrics and weaving; descrip¬ 
 tion of burial customs; illustrations showing fabrics, clothing, and “mummy 
 bundle/’ 
 
 Castaneda, Carlos E. The Beginnings of University Life in America. ( Caih ' 
 Hist, rev., July 1938, p. 153-174.) 
 
 Vivid acquaintance with the people of the sixteenth century in Hispanic 
 America as their pattern of life unfolded around their educational institutions. 
 From the beginning of the conquest there were private teachers who gave the 
 children of the conquistadores and of the colonists the rudiments of education 
 and prepared them for higher study. Many of the Indians became expert 
 Latin scholars and in turn taught the children of their conquerors. Conditions 
 for entering the newly founded colleges, their programs of study, the tuition, 
 the college buildings, the faculty and students are set forth. Sons of mer¬ 
 chants, conquistadores, and Indians, all classes came to the colleges. As in 
 our day, college life was full of social events and merrymaking. Bullfights 
 took the place of our football games; masquerades and jousts and cavalcades 
 took the place of tennis and baseball; official festivities were numerous. As 
 interest increases and records become available, misconceptions regarding the 
 Spanish point of view toward education in New Spain are clearing. The 
 Spanish were not angels, according to the author; neither were they fiends, but 
 like all of us, they were human. 
 
 Curran, C. H. Insect Lore of the Aztecs (Nat. Hist., Marcl} 1936, p. 196-203, 
 illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. Content and picture interest for upper 
 elementary grades. 
 
 Donlevy, E. Harriett. Boy of Genoa (Grade Teacher, October 1939, p. 42, 
 illus.). 
 
 An episode in the life ofjColumbus arranged for dramatization. Two scenes 
 with six characters: Columbus, his father, a sea captain and three sailors. 
 The action takes place at the home of Columbus and at the wharf. An illus¬ 
 tration shows a group of sailors on a wharf at Genoa with Columbus in the 
 background. The costumes and locale will give suggestions for original illus¬ 
 trations and stage settings. Can be used as presented or as basis for creative 
 work. Costumes suggested might be easily obtained at home. Gives feeling 
 of superstitions existing about the shape of the earth at the time of Columbus. 
 Social studies and language arts material at intermediate level. 
 
 Fischer, Helene, and Luis Marquez. A Mexican Land of Lakes and Lacquers 
 (Natl. Geog., May 1937, p. 633-648, illus.). 
 
 Mystery shrouds the forebears of the Tarascan Indians who fled to the moun¬ 
 tains rather than submit to Spanish rule. Today their descendants live in the 
 State of Michoacdn whose capital, Morelia, is 135 miles west of Mexico City. 
 Tradition tells of Tarascan runners who carried fish caught in Lake Patzcuaro 
 to the palace and placed it on the Emperor’s table still smoking hot. The 
 Tarascans, unlike most Indians, are often bearded. Noted in earlier times for 
 exquisite feather paintings, they do fine work in lacquer today. There is a 
 description of the Dance of the Old Men. Useful in linking past to present. 
 
 Korff, Serge A. Notes on Inca and Pre-Inca Ruins in Bolivia and Peru (Mag. of 
 Art, January 1939, p. 22-25, illus.). 
 
 This article does not contain technicalities that might puzzle the general 
 reader. The elementary teacher will find information to increase her own 
 appreciation of pre-Columbian art in America and useful in teaching social 
 studies, beginning at fifth grade level. Seven large photographs by the author 
 
150 
 
 can be used effectively in a study of architecture. They show a monolithic 
 figure, the main archway to Tiahuanaco temple, the fortress of Sachsahuaman, 
 the reservoir and part of the water distributing system at Sachsahuaman, a 
 corner of the temple at Macchu-Picchu, a sundial on the parapet above the 
 river gorge at Macchu-Picchu, as well as the interior of the temple court at 
 Macchu-Picchu 
 
 Lemos, Pedro J. de. Colonial Days Lived Again ( School Arts , November 1940, 
 p. 87-94, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Illustrations are valuable teaching aids, begin¬ 
 ning in elementary grades, for art and social studies. Activity suggestion: 
 reconstructing a miniature colonial house. 
 
 Magellan ( Amer . For. Serv. Jour., October 1936, p. 556-557). 
 
 One page of printed material setting forth the facts of the life of the Portu¬ 
 guese navigator who sailed for the crown of Spain, and the historical importance 
 of his expedition; accompanied by a full-page color photograph of the Magellan 
 Memorial at Magailanes, Chile. Picture value for elementary school. Text 
 described by the editor as an editorial frown upon history in frivolous vein.” 
 
 Manchester, Paul Thomas, and Charles Maxwell Lancaster. The 
 Araucanians (World Affairs, September 1941, p. 180-182). 
 
 Part of a translation of La Araucana, said to be greatest historic poem of 
 modern times, and first piece of literary merit produced in America. It was 
 written in Chile in 1569 by a captain in the Spanish army, Alonso de Ercilla, 
 grandee of Spain, and tells a story of the valiant Araucanian Indians who 
 resisted the Spanish invaders. Picture of life and customs of Indians and their 
 methods of warfare. Junior high pupils will gain historical information and 
 appreciation. May be used for choral speaking groups. 
 
 Marden, Luis. On the Cortes Trail (Natl. Geog., September 1940, p. 335-375, 
 illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. 
 
 Mayan Dancing Priest: Bas Relief (Theatre Arts Monthly , May 1939, p. 626). 
 
 Photograph in black and white, finely lighted to show detail. Will help 
 teachers interpret smaller and less clear reproductions they may see of the 
 detailed work of these ancient sculptors. 
 
 Mayer, Irma R. The Little Admiral (Grade Teacher, October 1939, p. 56, 97, 
 illus.). 
 
 A play in two acts with four scenes for intermediate grade children. There 
 are six principal characters: Christopher Columbus, his son Diego at the age of 
 eleven and the Little Admiral of the play; Queen Isabella; King Ferdinand; 
 Don Juan; a monk; and sailors, Indians, court ladies, and pages. The latter 
 could include a whole class. The action provides for pageantry in the last 
 scene which might be used effectively for special occasions, school assemblies, 
 parents party, etc. Content gives young children sense of direction of Spain; 
 Canary Islands, West Indies and an appreciation of the Indians who met 
 Columbus and their ways. The illustration suggests stage setting and costumes. 
 
 Morley, Sylvanus Griswold. Yucat&n, Home of the Gifted Maya (Natl. Geog., 
 November 1936, p. 591-644, illus.). 
 
 Excellent account of the Mayan culture of Yucatan by the man who directed 
 the work of the Carnegie Institution in A ucat&n. Comprehensive view of 
 man’s history in the peninsula, his cultivation of maize and other crops his 
 animals, the cities and temples he built. For general background and content 
 for lesson planning. Includes description of game of ball played by Mayan 
 youth. 
 
 Murphy. Robert Cushman. The Earliest Spanish Advances Southward from 
 Panama along the West Coast of South America (Hispanic Amer. Hist. Rev., 
 February 1941, p. 3-28). 
 
 Geographic documentation of the historical record of Spanish advances south¬ 
 ward from the discovery of the Gulf of Darien in 1501 to the capture of Ata- 
 hualpa in 1532, in the light of personal knowledge of the coast. A chronological 
 list of discoveries and expeditions is most helpful to teacher who wishes an over¬ 
 all picture of the period. The teacher who has been using material with more 
 “color” will find the keen precision of this type of material both accessible and 
 exciting. 
 
151 
 
 Pages from the Codex Borbonicus ( Theatre Arts Monthly, August 1938, p. 622). 
 
 There are two pages reproduced from the Codex Borbonicus. These are 
 reproduced in black and white. The one showing a children’s festival dance 
 around a pole decorated with pennants and offerings is of especial interest as 
 there are few action pictures of Indian children. This will give suggestions 
 for an outdoor or assembly festival that the elementary teacher may want to 
 give in connection with dances from other nations. 
 
 Stirling, Matthew W. Discovering the New World’s Oldest Dated Work of 
 Man (Natl. Geog., August 1939, p. 183-218, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. Orientation material for units on calendar, 
 early American dates; material for elementary astronomy. 
 
 The Maya of Middle America. Carnegie Institution of Washington (News Service 
 Bull.,' School Ed., vol. II, 1930, 1931, 1932.). 
 
 A comprehensive overview of this culture group for the teacher. Excellent 
 maps, color sheets, photographs. Complete information for background needs 
 of teachers through junior high school level. 
 
 Tyler, Douglas. Columbus Saw them First (Nat. Hist., June 1941, p. 40-49, 
 illus.). 
 
 Dominica, a British possession in the Lesser Antilles, is today the last refuge 
 of the Caribs, the second group of American Indians to become known to history. 
 The Caribs were largely annihilated because they could not be subjugated. 
 Our words cannibal and canoe stem from their language. The Carib kanawa 
 was a dugout whose length was upward of 60 feet, about 8 feet wide in the middle, 
 its sides raised by wooden planks. It carried two masts each supporting one 
 sail and could accommodate 50 or 60 men at the paddles (picture given). 
 Excellent material for teacher to tie up present with the past. Material on 
 life and customs, legends, heroes, medicine men, intermarriage, trade; pictures 
 of Carib family and thatched dwelling; four steps in the weaving of a water¬ 
 proof basket. 
 
 Vaillant, George C. The Death Throes of the Aztec Nation (Nat. Hist., 
 March 1937, p. 185-195, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. Vitally interesting reading for the teacher 
 because of its “modern” note; pictures of particular interest to children old 
 enough to study the conquest of Mexico. 
 
 -. History of the Valley of Mexico (Nat. Hist., November 1936, p. 324-328). 
 
 A resum6 of the results of expeditions by the author for the American Mu¬ 
 seum of Natural History from 1928 to 1936. The chart that accompanies the 
 article was drawn by William Blake and was prepared as a digest of the various 
 elements which reflect the history of man in Central Mexico. The text briefly 
 interprets these data. For reference material only, adult level. 
 
 -. A Sacred Almanac of the Aztecs (Tanalmatl of the Codex Borbonicus). 
 
 Pamphlet. New York. Issued under the direction of the Committee on 
 Popular Publications, American Museum of Natural History. 1940. 
 
 The Aztec word tonalamatl means “the book wherein the period tonalpahualli) 
 of good and bad days is inscribed.” The picture manuscript herein described 
 is one of the best drawn examples from the Valley of Mexico, apparently of pre- 
 Spanish date. The fine collection of plates was made for a projected publication 
 of the American Museum of Natural History which was never published, and 
 only 600 copies of this reference were printed; however, teachers in position to 
 see it will find it valuable. There are lists of days, “months”, etc., with their 
 deities. [Cortes’ interpreter Marina (Malinche, Malintzin, Malinalli) was pre¬ 
 sumably named for the day of grass which saw her birth.] For calendar study, 
 history, art, mythology. 
 
 Wilson, William Jerome. The Spanish Discovery of the South American 
 Mainland (Geog. Rev., April 1941, p. 283-299, illus.). 
 
 Material from a manuscript in the Library of Congress which, if authentic, 
 dates the Spanish discovery of the mainland of America four years earlier than 
 has been accepted. The narrative translated tells of storms, men and women, 
 birds and trees encountered, and of pearls and pearl fishing. The notes discuss 
 the charge that Columbus concealed discovery of pearls. For the teacher- 
 student, interested in original sources and appreciative of the contemporary 
 flavor of past events. 
 
 490718 0 - 42 - 11 
 

 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
PART II. HEROES OF WAR AND PEACE 
 
 REFERENCES FOR THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Newcomb, Covelle. Black Fire. New York. Longmans, Green & Co. 1940. 
 275 p., illus. 
 
 Well written story of Haiti beginning with the birth of Henri Christophe and 
 covering events through the country’s independence from France and the aboli¬ 
 tion of slavery. There is also material on Toussaint L’Ouverture and Dessa- 
 lines, as well as a good picture of colonial life in one of the least known of our 
 southern neighbors. Good for supplementary material in history. 
 
 Richards, Irmagarde, and Elena Landazuri. Children of Mexico: Their 
 Land and Its Story. San Francisco. Harr-Wagner. 1935. 323 p.. illus. 
 
 Chapter XIV (p. 200-214) contains a brief sketch of the life of Benito Juarez, 
 a national hero of Mexico, from his early childhood as a shepherd boy, through 
 his student days, the revolution of Mexico and his final triumph as president of 
 his country. 
 
 REFERENCES FOR THE JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOLS 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Neighbors to the South. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1941. 302 p., illus. 
 
 Brief biographies of the seventeen men of Latin America whose portrait 
 busts are found in the Gallery of Patriots of the Pan American Union are 
 included in Chapter XII (p. 252-293). Among them are well-known names 
 like Bolivar, Juarez and San Martin as well as others like Sucre, Morazan, 
 Marti, less well known in the United States. 
 
 Lansing, Marion. Liberators and Heroes of South America. Boston. L. C. 
 Page & Co. 1940. 320 p., illus. 
 
 An account of the men who fought for South America’s independence prefaced 
 by a brief history of the Incas. The book includes brief sketches on the fol¬ 
 lowing men: Miranda, San Martin, O’Higgins, Bolivar, Paez, Belgratio, Ar- 
 tigas, Moreno, Sucre, Santander, Bonifacio, Dom Pedro, Unanue and Sar- 
 miento. Includes much background material for beginning study of Latin 
 American history. Twenty-five illustrations include portraits of the liberators 
 and heroes. 
 
 Marschall, Phyllis, and John Crane. The Dauntless Liberator. New York. 
 The Century Co. 1933. 306 p., illus. 
 
 The events in the life of Simon Bolivar, South America’s Liberator, are por¬ 
 trayed against the background of that continent’s struggle for independence. 
 Along with Bolivar, the book presents other men who fought with him for 
 independence from Spain—Miranda, San Martin, Sucre, P4ez, Santander and 
 others. There is interesting material on the events which helped shape these 
 men’s careers. 
 
 Waugh, Evelyn. Simon Bolivar. New York. The Macmillan Co. 1941. 
 
 A detailed biography of one of South America’s liberators. The discussion 
 of his youth also gives an interesting picture of the country, as well as many 
 of the legends and customs of the people. The major part of the book is 
 devoted to South America’s struggle for independence and the detailed treat- 
 
 ( 153 ) 
 
154 
 
 ment is occasionally relieved by dramatic treatment of events. A valuable 
 feature of the book is the inclusion of material on the contemporary scene in 
 Europe and North America. Many of the other noted men of the independ¬ 
 ence period are introduced: Miranda, Sucre, Santander, O’Higgins, and San 
 Martin. 
 
 Williamson, Thames. The Last of the Gauchos. New York. Bobbs-Merrill Co. 
 1937. 
 
 Good picture of the Argentine pampas and the life of the gauchos on the 
 vast cattle estancias, as well as the owners of the estates. Good description of 
 a round-up, tracking down cattle thieves and breaking young horses to ride. 
 Includes some material on Artigas, gaucho and national hero of Uruguay. 
 Good background material for colonial life. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 D’EgA, Raul. History and Travel in the Americas (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1938, p. 86-96, illus.). 
 
 General introduction, good information on the great epic of the wars of 
 independence, earlier and later points of interest in the history of the southern 
 continent. 
 
 Herring, Hubert. Cuba: The Island Republic (Jr. Bed Cross Jour., March 
 1939, p. 204-205, illus.). 
 
 Overview of Cuba and her history, with much information on Cuba’s long 
 struggle for freedom and her heroes, including Carlos Manuel de GYspedes, 
 Maximo G6mez the Dominican, and Antonio Maceo the mulatto, one of Cuba’s 
 great military leaders. 
 
 Lee, Charles Henry. Highlights in the Life of Antonio Jose de Sucre (Bolivia, 
 Jan.-Feb. 1941, p. 6-8.) 
 
 Sucre, Liberator of Bolivia, is one of the most knightly figures in the Parade 
 of America’s Heroes. Mr. Lee’s article, based on one of his weekly broadcasts 
 on this theme, carried in Spanish over short-wave stations of NBC, does not 
 cover fully the facts of Sucre’s life and death, but makes very real to the reader 
 the young general whose untiring energy, great gift for accuracy and organiza¬ 
 tion,combined with his unselfishness, loyalty and sincerity, made him especially 
 trusted and honored by his chief, Bolivar. 
 
 Marden, Luis. Caracas: Cradle of the Liberator (Natl. Geog., April 1940, p. 
 477-513, illus.). 
 
 Excellent portrait of Simon Bolivar the Liberator, in color; brief material on 
 his life; good pictorial background. 
 
 Pan America in Review: Haiti (World Youth, June 6, 1940, p. 8-9, illus.). 
 
 Sketches of Toussaint L’Ouverture, the slave whose ability raised him to the 
 rank of general in the French army and made him a hero of independence, and 
 of Henri Christophe, the slave who became president of the republic and later 
 declared himself king. 
 
 Sim6n Bolivar: The Great Liberator (Junior Arts and Activ., January 1941, 
 portrait, p. 9). 
 
 This is a portrait by G. Hukkala that children will like. In the background 
 of this portrait page is an outline map of South America with the countries 
 Bolivar liberated, the so-called Bolivarian countries, shaded in. An inset of a 
 two-paragraph biography at elementary reading level completes the page. 
 
 REFERENCES FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Finlay, Carlos E. Carlos Finlay and Yellow Fever. New York. Oxford 
 Press. 1940. 249 p. 
 
 A technical survey of the work in discovering the cause of yellow fever and 
 its control; written by the son of Carlos Finlay, one of the pioneers in the field. 
 The first chapter is devoted to Finlay’s family and personal history. The text 
 of many interesting letters and documents relating to the experiments are in¬ 
 cluded and the last chapter of the book gives a good summary of the work done 
 by Finlay and the United States commission. 
 
155 
 
 Nichols, Madaline W. Sarmiento: A Chronicle of Inter-American Friendship. 
 Published by the author, 303 B St. SE., Washington, D. C. 1940. 81 p. 
 
 In the first three chapters the author summarizes the early life and activities 
 of Sarmiento, pointing up his outstanding characteristics—energy, honesty, 
 determination, and vanity. His great interest which began in childhood and 
 never diminished throughout his lifetime earned for him the title “schoolmaster 
 president of the Argentine.” The author also discusses Sarmiento’s admiration 
 for the United States and devotes two interesting chapters to Sarmiento’s tour 
 of this country in 1847 and his impressions and reactions to the life and customs 
 as he saw them. 
 
 Robertson, William Spence. Rise of the Spanish-American Republics: As 
 Told in the Lives of Their Liberators. New York. D. Appleton & Co. 1918. 
 380 p., illus. 
 
 The first chapter sets forth the historical background and follows with the 
 story of Spanish-American liberation told through the lives of seven leaders of 
 the revolution—Miranda, Hidalgo, Iturbide, San Martin, Bolivar, Sucre, and 
 Moreno. Although the emphasis is on the campaigns and battles, the traits, 
 personalities, and adventures of the liberators are effectively treated. The 
 concluding chapter gives a good summary of the problems confronting the re¬ 
 publics after independence. There is a map of Spanish America on the eve 
 of the revolution, and the 13 illustrations include a picture of each of the men 
 discussed in the text. 
 
 Rourke, Thomas. Man of Glory: Simon Bolivar. New York. Wm. Morrow 
 & Co. 1939. 369 p. 
 
 The author has devoted much of the book to Bolivar’s early development in 
 order to clarify many of his later actions. Much emphasis is placed on the 
 influence of his tutor, Simon Rodriguez. Prominent place in the book is also 
 given to the group of patriots who aided in the wars of liberation: Miranda, 
 Sucre, San Martin and Pdez. 
 
 Stewart, Watt, and Harold F. Peterson. Builders of Latin America. New 
 York. Harper & Bros. 1942. 343 p., illus. 
 
 A general picture of life in the other Americas as shown in the lives of some 
 of their great men and women. Included in the book are Indian rulers, con¬ 
 querors, missionaries, leaders of the independence movement and the “strong 
 men” who helped shape the course of the new republics. Here, too, are the 
 teachers and poets, the engineers, archaeologists and statesmen. The book 
 is divided into four Parts: I. Foundations, II. Revolution, III. Dictatorship, 
 IV. Toward a Better Future, and each is introduced by a brief survey of the 
 period represented. The 64 excellent photographs which illustrate the book 
 cover a wide range of interest. Intended for high school level, but the teacher 
 of younger children will find material she can adapt. 
 
 Vandercook, John W. Black Majesty. New York. Harper & Bros. 1928. 
 207 p. 
 
 The book centers on the life of Henri Christophe, the slave boy who became 
 king, and Dessalines nnd L’Ouverture, who worked with him to liberate their 
 country. In addition to a good picture of the island and conditions there in 
 colonial days, there is a detailed description of Sans Souci, Christophe’s palace, 
 his great plantations and the island’s progress and place in the world during 
 his rule as well as an excellent description of the Citadel La Ferriere, the gigantic 
 fort erected by Christophe against the day when the French might again 
 attack the island, and which still stands today. 
 
 Williams, Mary Wilhelmine. Dorn Pedro the Magnanimous. Chapel Hill- 
 University of North Carolina Press. 1937. 414 p. 
 
 Accurate, well written account of the life of Brazil’s great emperor. In addi¬ 
 tion to the biographical material, the book gives a good picture of the middle of 
 the nineteenth century in Brazil—the internal progress, the abolition of slavery, 
 the revolution, and finally the banishment of Dom Pedro and his family. Also, 
 of especial interest is the chapter on Dom Pedro as teacher of the Brazilian 
 nation together with the chapter on his tour of the United States and his 
 impressions of the country. 
 
156 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 An Eighteenth Century Scientist in Colombia: Jos6 Celestino Mutis {Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, June 1932, p. 401-404, illus.). 
 
 A Spaniard by birth, Mutis settled in Colombia as a young man and made a 
 notable contribution to natural history, especially botany. 
 
 BenItez, Justo Pastor. Jose Caspar de Francia: Dictator of Paraguay {Bull. 
 Pan Amer. Union, November 1940, p. 737-742, illus.). 
 
 Few historical characters in America have been the subject of so much 
 speculation as has Dr. Francia, “Perpetual Dictator’’ of Paraguay. 
 
 Berutti, Jose J. Sarmiento {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, September 1938, p. 505- 
 512, illus.). 
 
 Under the full page portrait of Sarmiento is this caption: “As teacher, diplo¬ 
 mat and President of Argentina, his chief interest was the extension and im¬ 
 provement of education.” Sarmiento visited the United States in 1847 and as 
 Argentine Minister was stationed in Washington 1865-68. He knew Horace 
 Mann and introduced into Argentina much that he had admired in schools of 
 the United States. To supplement other material on Sarmiento. For teacher 
 in upper elementary grades. 
 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. Francisco de Miranda. June 1933 num¬ 
 ber. Illus. 
 
 The entire issue is devoted to this forerunner of South American independence. 
 
 - Homage to Sucre. June 1930 number. Illus. 
 
 The entire issue is devoted to Antonio Jose de Sucre, one of Bolivar’s great 
 generals, who was instrumental in bringing about the independence of Ecuador, 
 Bolivia and Peru. 
 
 - Sim6n Bolivar. December 1930 number. Illus. 
 
 The entire issue is devoted to the life, ideals and accomplishments of the man 
 who liberated five republics and has been called “The Liberator.” 
 
 Castillero R., E. J. Pedro J. Sosa: Panamanian {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1936, p. 141-145, illus.). 
 
 An engineer who played an important part in surveying the route of the 
 Panama Canal and in the construction carried on by the French concessionaires. 
 
 Castro, Hector David. Antonio Jos6 Canas: Salvadorean {Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, February 1936, p. 119-123, illus.). 
 
 The first Central American diplomat accredited to Washington. He believed 
 in a “continental system,” preserving the independence of all the American 
 republics. 
 
 Currea de Aya, MarIa. Women of America: Policarpa Salavarrieta {Bull. 
 Pan. Amer. Union, October 1939, p. 583-585, illus.). 
 
 A Colombian heroine of the struggle for independence. 
 
 De Alba, Pedro. Eugenio Maria de Hostos and His Ideas of Social Morality 
 {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, February 1939, p. 85-95, illus.). 
 
 Born in Puerto Rico, this gifted writer, educator and profound thinker is 
 considered one of the most eminent contributors to the civilization of the 
 Americas. 
 
 De Freitas-Valle, C. Joaquim Nabuco: Brazilian {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1936, p. 94-98, illus.). 
 
 Brazilian abolitionist, author and statesman. 
 
 De la Riva Aguero, Josfi. Hip61ito Un&nue {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, p. 513- 
 525, illus.). 
 
 An intelluctual leader in the movement for Peruvian independence. 
 
 Donoso, Ricardo. Diego Barros Arana {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, February 1936, 
 p. 99-102, illus.). 
 
 Barros Arana is one of Chile’s greatest historians and educators. 
 
 Dur6n, R. E. Jose Cecilio del Valle {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, January 1935, 
 p. 39-45, illus.). 
 
 Sketch of the public life of Jose Cecilio del Valle, foremost figure in the 
 history of Honduras and author of the Declaration of Independence of the 
 Central American republics; one of the great figures among the heroes of inde¬ 
 pendence. A man of great activity, noted for his brilliant writings, Valle 
 
157 
 
 was made a member of the Academy of Science of Paris. The elementary 
 teacher can use the material for retelling the story of the Central American 
 patriot. 
 
 Fernandez Olguin, Eduardo. Simon de Iriondo {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 November 1935, p. 840-846, illus.). 
 
 To Iriondo’s achievements as a citizen and governor of Santa Fe (Argentina) 
 are due in large part the colonization and development of the province. 
 
 Fournie, Emilio Luis Morquio: Uruguayan. {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1936, p. 156-160, illus.). 
 
 Eminent physician and founder of the American Institute for the Protection 
 of Childhood. 
 
 Ganzert, Frederick William. Jose Maria da Silva Paranhos, Baron do Rio- 
 Branco. {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, p. 231-238, illus.). 
 
 The Baron do Rio-Branco, Brazilian statesman, was one of the greatest 
 workers for peace in this hemisphere. 
 
 Guachalla, Luis F. The panamericanism of Bolivar {Bolivia, July-Aug. 1941, 
 
 p. 6-8). 
 
 An address delivered by the Minister of Bolivia in the United States at a 
 ceremony that took place before the statue of Bolivar in Central Park, New 
 York, in celebration of the 158th anniversary of the Liberator’s death. Fresh 
 recognition of the path pointed out by the great South American who called 
 the first congress of the Americas at Panama, as a way to protect our democ¬ 
 racies. Direct quotations from the speech with which an Aymara Indian 
 priest welcomed the man responsible for a new era of liberty, and from a speech 
 of President John Quincy Adams, who expresses more guarded hopes for this 
 new idea. 
 
 Herring, Hubert. Cuba: The Island Republic {Jr. Red Cross Jour., March 
 1939, p. 204-205, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. 
 
 James, Concha Romero. Don Jose Toribio Medina, Man and Scholar {Bull. 
 Pan Amer. Union, January 1931, p. 4-9, illus.). 
 
 The great Chilean historian admired for his indefatigable work as a scholar 
 (he wrote more than 400 books and monographs on subjects dealing with 
 American history) and for his winning personality. 
 
 Jerez, VIctor. Jose Matfas Delgado {Bull. Pan Amer. Union , November 1932> 
 p. 749-758, illus.). 
 
 Issue commemorating the first centennial of the death of the patriotic priest 
 of El Salvador. 
 
 •- The Lincoln of Central America: Father Jos6 Simeon Canas {Bull. Pan 
 
 Amer. Union, September 1938, p. 524-527, illus.). 
 
 This eminent Salvadorean strove to free Central America from Spain and 
 to abolish slavery. 
 
 Johnson, Maria Irene. Carlos Antonio Lopez: Paraguayan {Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, February 1936, p. 146-148, illus.). 
 
 A statesman who promoted the welfare of his country in many ways. 
 
 Lee, Charles Henry. Highlights in the Life of Antonio Jos6 de Sucre {Bolivia, 
 January-Februarv, 1941, p. 6-8). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. 
 
 Marden, Luis. Caracas: Cradle of the Liberator {Natl. Geog., April 1940, p. 
 477-513, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School listing. 
 
 Marquez Sterling, Manuel. Enrique Jos6 Varona: A Tribute. {Bull. Pan 
 Amer. Union, June 1934, p. 431-436, illus.). 
 
 An essay on a great Cuban philosopher, educator and patriot; a man beloved 
 by the students who turned to him for leadership in critical times. 
 
 Moll, Aristides A. Finlay, Sanitary Pioneer and Benefactor of Mankind {Bulb 
 Pan Amer. Union, December 1933, p. 935-946, illus.). 
 
 The eminent physician and scientist to whom the world is indebted for the 
 correct theory of the transmission of yellow fever. 
 
 - Carlos J. Finlay: Cuba. {Bull. Pan Amer. Union, Februarv 1936, p. 
 
 110-112, illus.). 
 
158 
 
 Monteiro de Carvalho, Mario, Joaquim Nabuco (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1934, p. 127-133). 
 
 Brazilian abolitionist, author and statesman. 
 
 Newhall, Beatrice. Eugenio Espejo: Ecuadorean. (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1936, p. 116-118, illus.). 
 
 Precursor of Spanish American independence who, as a physician and writer, 
 contributed to the advance of science and letters in Ecuador. 
 
 Palmer, Robin. A Boy on the Pampas (Jr. Red Cross News, September 1939, 
 p. 18-20, illus.). 
 
 The account gives a good picture of family life of English settlers on the 
 Argentine pampas nearly a hundred years ago. There are amusing incidents 
 about a neighbor’s pet ostrich who enjoyed human companionship. There were 
 no schools on the pampas but private teachers were engaged and school was 
 established in the home. The boy of the story is William Henry Hudson who 
 became the great naturalist and the author of Green Mansions. 
 
 There is a picture of an ombu tree, a common sight on the pampas, and a 
 picture of a gaucho with his bolas. Social studies, language arts, family life. 
 
 Rippy, J. Fred. Bolivar as Viewed by Contemporary Diplomats of the United 
 States (Hispanic Amer. Hist. Rev., August 1935, p. 287-297). 
 
 “. . . Such was the hero of the war of liberation in northern South America 
 as viewed by diplomatic agents of the United States who served their country 
 near the large stage whereon he acted.” Interesting sidelight on contemporary 
 opinions. 
 
 Rojas, Aristides. Washington at the Centenary of Bolivar (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, July 1930, p. 507-514). 
 
 During the celebration of the centenary of Bolivar in 1883 a statue of General 
 Washington was erected in the city of Caracas. This article explains why 
 Washington was honored in the birthplace of Bolivar and the significance of the 
 gesture to hemisphere democratic ideals. The article describes the medal 
 entrusted to Lafayette to present to Bolivar as a gift from Washington’s family. 
 The letter of presentation from Lafayette and a letter of acceptance from Bolivar 
 are reproduced as well as a letter written by Washington and given to Bolivar 
 by the Washington family. The medal is reproduced on page 510. Teachers 
 of sixth grade and above will find the information valuable for children with 
 numismatic interests. Teachers of English will find the reproduced letters 
 helpful for contrast of expression and execution. 
 
 KoDRiGUEz Demorizi, Emilio. Father Billini (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, Febru¬ 
 ary 1936, p. 113-115, illus.). 
 
 For a quarter of a century he helped the poor in the capital of the Dominican 
 Republic. 
 
 Samper Ortega, Daniel. Francisco de Paula Santander (Bull. Pan Amer. 
 Union, June 1940, p. 437-440, illus.). 
 
 General Santander is the national hero of Colombia and the organizer of the 
 republic. 
 
 Sim6n BolIvar, the Liberator (Theatre Arts Monthly, May 1939, frontispiece). 
 
 A portrait of Bolivar chosen with discrimination and beautifully reproduced, 
 suitable for framing; accompanied by some illuminating comments by the 
 editor. 
 
 KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Amer. For. Serv. Jour_ 
 
 Bull. Pan Amer. Union_ 
 
 Cath. Hist. Rev_ 
 
 Geog. Rev_ 
 
 Hispanic Amer. Hist. Rev 
 
 Jr. Arts and Activ_ 
 
 Jr. Red Cross News_ 
 
 Mag. of Art_ 
 
 Natl. Geog_ 
 
 Nat. Hist_ 
 
 News Service Bull_„ 
 
 American Foreign Service Journal. 
 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. 
 Catholic Historical Review. 
 
 Geographical Review. 
 
 Hispanic American Historical Review. 
 Junior Arts and Activities. 
 
 American Junior Red Cross News. 
 
 Magazine of Art. 
 
 National Geographic Magazine. 
 
 Natural History. 
 
 News Service Bulletin, Carnegie Institution 
 of Washington. 
 

 159 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
{ Children of the Other Americas } 
 
 TRANSPORTATION 
 
 ( 161 ) 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . . ~ -.A. - • M r ~ • • — 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 Page 
 
 I. Introduction_ 165 
 
 II. References for the Intermediate Grades: 
 
 1. Books _^_ 165 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 166 
 
 III. References for the Junior High School: 
 
 1. Books_ 166 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 167 
 
 IV. References for the Teacher: 
 
 1. Books_ 168 
 
 2. Periodicals and pamphlets_ 169 
 
 Key to Abbreviations_ 170 
 
 (163) 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRANSPORTATION 
 
 I. INTRODUCTION 
 
 Modern ocean liners plough through the sea lanes of southern 
 waters. Overhead clipper planes follow the skyways. Steel rails and 
 new highways cross boundaries linking the Americas, drawing them 
 closer in time, helping us to know them better. Modern transporta¬ 
 tion is a thrilling chapter in the story of the Americas. It is the story 
 of imagination, courage, and determination in the face of almost insur¬ 
 mountable obstacles. 
 
 But side by side with the latest means of transportation in many 
 sections in Latin America, men and products still move from place to 
 place as they did centuries ago. Bending-low under his burden, the 
 Indian carrier steps aside to dodge the onrushing automobile. The 
 muleteer on the trail and the boatman in his balsa craft look up at the 
 plane that roars overhead. Remnants of highways built before 
 Columbus still remain. Bridges of maguey fibers span yawning 
 chasms. And here and there oxcarts, gay with brightly painted 
 wheels, still creak through the village streets. 
 
 These varied means of transportation and the many different people 
 who use them are described in the following references and give an 
 interesting picture of life in the other Americas. 
 
 II. REFERENCES FOR THE INTERMEDIATE GRADES 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Coatsworth, Elizabeth. The Boy with the Parrot: A Story of Guatemala. 
 New York. The Macmillan Co. 1930. 101 p., illus. 
 
 A glimpse of the life of a pack peddler in Guatemala and his adventures along 
 the way and in the capital when he makes his first trip away from his village. 
 Goetz, Delia. Panchita. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 1941. 180 
 
 p., illus. 
 
 Includes a description of two trips to the market in the capital. The first is 
 made afoot in the company of friends and acquaintances. The second trip is 
 a breath-taking adventure for little Panchita who has never before ridden in a 
 bus. 
 
 Malkus, Alida. Along the Inca Highway. Boston. D. C. Heath. New 
 World Neighbors Series. 1941. 56 p., illus. 
 
 The first part of this brief book describes a trip by plane from the Canal Zone 
 to Peru. The next section tells of the coming of the Spanish conquerors and 
 their travel in ships and their slow, overland marches. 
 
 Thomas, Margaret Boring. The Burro’s Money Bag. New York. Abing¬ 
 don Press. 1931. 123 p., illus. 
 
 The story of a little boy who more than anything else wanted a burro. He 
 goes on a train trip to the city with his grandfather and after many adventures 
 he returns home and finally succeeds in earning enough money to buy the 
 coveted burro. Contains good material for a unit on Mexico. 
 
 (165) 
 
166 
 
 2. PERIODICALS 
 
 Bolivia. Cover design, July-Aug. 1941. 
 
 Good picture of a balsa boat of woven reed, used on Lake Titicaca. For art 
 and for adaptation of materials at hand. 
 
 The Calendar Picture {Jr. Red Cross News, February 1940, p. 14). 
 
 The title refers to the American Junior Red Cross Calendar. The month’s 
 subject is Panama, the oldest settlement of white men on the American main¬ 
 land, and the Panama Canal. Children are introduced to the history of the 
 isthmus and to the earliest planning for the canal; to Ferdinand de Lesseps and 
 to Colonel Geo. W. Goethals. The time taken for construction, the cost, the 
 many difficulties encountered are covered. Social studies reference material, 
 much information in concise form. 
 
 Connecting Links among the Americas {Jr. Schol., Oct. 14, p. 6-7, 15, illus.). 
 
 A general account of transportation in Latin Amei'ica in 1940, where as a 
 llama train plods along, the wings of a great airplane may flash overhead. In 
 remote parts of South America, primitive means of transportation are still in 
 use. Donkeys, llamas, oxcarts, even goats and sheep haul produce through 
 jungles and over mountain passes. Lakes and rivers are important arteries 
 of trade. Primitive dugouts contrast with Diesel motor vessels. Railroads have 
 developed more slowly than in North America because of the great areas of 
 mountains and jungle, but there is a new impetus to the building of roads. 
 The Pan American Highway, when completed, will run from Alaska to Cape 
 Horn. Meanwhile, flying hours grow shorter with new and improved ships. 
 
 Flying over Rio {Jr. Red Cross Jour., January 1939). 
 
 Shows plane flying over the harbor of Rio de Janeiro. 
 
 Oberhauser, Ann. Costa Rican Oxcart {Jr. Arts and Activ., June 1941, p. 23 
 illus.). 
 
 Project for making a Costa Rican oxcart whose distinctive feature is the 
 skillful decoration lavished on it. Each section of the country has a dis¬ 
 tinctive style. Because many roads of Costa Rica are mere trails through 
 dense forest, they can only be traversed on foot, and men, women and children 
 are burden bearers. More than 100 pounds is the common weight of a man’s 
 load. 
 
 Pan American Highway {Jr. Red Cross News, April 1941, p. 210-211, illus.). 
 
 A map showing the route of the Pan American Highway, adapted from 
 the official Pan American Highways System map, accompanied by ten photo¬ 
 graphs of scenes along the way. The map material could be adapted on a large- 
 scale drawing as backdrop for assembly programs. Stories can be written 
 about experiences at the places shown in the pictures. The equator marker in 
 Ecuador is useful to stimulate interest in finding locations on maps; the view of 
 the Los Remedios aqueduct is of interest in the study of irrigation. 
 
 Thomas, Estelle Webb. Amigo {Story Parade, April 1939, p. 26-29, illus.). 
 
 A humorous story in rhyme about young Rodrigo and his burro, Amigo, 
 who are on their way to a fiesta on St. John’s Day (June 24). Appealing illus¬ 
 trations. 
 
 III. REFERENCES FOR THE JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Dalgliesh, Alice. Wings around South America. New York. Scribner’s 
 Sons. 1941. 158 p., illus. 
 
 The description of a trip which took the author and the illustrator of this 
 book on a hasty trip to Colombia, Panama, Ecuador, Peru, Brazil, Argentina 
 and Trinidad in that order. There are brief comments on the customs of the 
 country and the people and a good deal of information on the details in con¬ 
 nection with the flight. The many attractive pictures in color and in black and 
 white are far superior to the text. 
 
167 
 
 Gill, Richard C. The Volcano of Gold. New York. Frederick A. Stokes Co. 
 1938. 256 p., illus. 
 
 A well written description of a journey on foot and by canoe into the jungles 
 of Ecuador which a young American boy makes in the company of an Indian 
 friend. 
 
 Goetz, Delia. Neighbors to the South. New York. Harcourt, Brace & Co. 
 1941. 293 p., illus. 
 
 Chapter VII summarizes the story of travel among the Latin American 
 countries and between the United States and Latin America from the earliest 
 days. The Indian runners, the beginning of travel by ships, the building of 
 railways and highways, and the way in which increased air travel has affected 
 lifp and progress in individual countries and inter-American relations. 
 
 Peck, Anne Merriman. Roundabout South America. New York. Harper 
 Bros. 1940. 359 p. 
 
 The author’s report of her travels in South America which took her off the 
 beaten path by many different means of transportation. 
 
 Tschiffely, A. F. The Tale of Two Horses. New York. Simon and Schuster. 
 1935. 220 p., illus. 
 
 The account of a 10,000-mile horseback trip from Argentina to Washington, 
 D. C., told in the imaginary story of the two horses who made the trip. A great 
 deal of information is included about the countries through which they travel, 
 the hardships and the adventures which they encounter along the way. 
 
 Wiese, Kurt. The Parrot Dealer. New York. Coward-McCann, Inc. 1932. 
 239 p., illus. 
 
 In this story of life in Brazil, the author includes a graphic account of a trip 
 with a mule train, a journey in the wake of a revolution, a shark fishing expedi¬ 
 tion and a jaguar hunt. Much material about the country presented in an 
 interesting way. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 D’Eca, Raul. History and Travel in the Americas (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 February 1938, p. 86^-96, illus.). 
 
 Good introduction to the study of Latin America. It touches on the naming 
 of the hemisphere, earliest inhabitants, the great epic of the wars of independ¬ 
 ence, other points of historic interest, and possibilities of the future. 
 
 De Saint-ExupAry, Antoine. Toward the Frontiers of Night (Jr. Red Cross 
 Jour., November 1939, p. 67-68, reprinted from book Night Flight, Appleton- 
 Century). 
 
 “ . . . Thus the three planes of the air-mail service, from Patagonia, Chile 
 and Paraguay, were converging from south, west and north to Buenos Aires 
 ...” Exceedingly beautiful description of night scenes, the plane, the 
 thoughts of Fabien who brings the mail from the far south. As approach to 
 work in transportation, regional areas; for language arts. 
 
 Fisher, Clyde. Eclipse in Peru (Nat. Hist., November 1937, p. 631-640, illus.). 
 
 The text is in the form of a travelogue. In addition to the astronomy interest, 
 the photographs show monuments of the past as the traveler sees them today. 
 Pictured are: ancient Chimu fortress at Paramonga; Chan-Chan, great ancient 
 city of the coastal (Chimu) civilization, at Trujillo; Perichole Palace, Lima, a 
 fine example of Spanish Colonial architecture built for a Viceroy’s favorite, the 
 great actress of her day; a descendant of the Inca in native costume, playing a reed 
 flute. 
 
 Flying over Rio (Jr. Red Cross Jour., January 1939, cover.) 
 
 Shows plane flying over the harbor of Rio de Janeiro. 
 
 Lanks, Herbert C. The Inter-American Highway (Bull Pan Amer. Union, 
 December 1938, p. 700-713, illus.). 
 
 The illustrations and physical description of the countries—the ruggedness of 
 the terrain, volcanoes, flora—will continue useful regardless of later progress 
 made in construction of the highway itself. 
 
 Marden, Luis. On the Cortes Trail (Natl. Geog., September 1940, p. 335-375, 
 illus.). 
 
 A vivid and detailed account of trip over the route that Cortes followed 
 more than 400 years ago, mapped from documents and histories. Interwoven 
 
 490718 0 - 42 - 12 
 
168 
 
 is the historical account of the Conqueror’s inarch. Informal style. Excellent 
 pictures of contemporary scene accompany the article; picture series entitled 
 “In Montezuma’s Painted Land.” 
 
 The Pan American Highway will Unite All of the Americas (House and Garden , 
 May 1941, p. 30-31, illus.). 
 
 Twenty-two capitoned pictures showing glimpses of the route from Texas 
 to Panama. Good suggestions for posters, friezes, or home-made movies at 
 elementary school level. There is a shaded outline map of Mexico and Central 
 America showing the route of the completed highway. The photographs 
 include costumes, industries, recreation and architecture. 
 
 Valentini, E. E. The Pan American Highway (Bull. Pan Amer. Union y July 
 1941, p. 386-396, illus.). 
 
 Comprehensive material from the office concerned with the over-all project. 
 Resolutions and recommendations which led to the birth of the highway idea 
 in 1923; progress of the project through the years; present needs and status; 
 geographical conditions; significance of the highway as a means of international 
 solidarity, appreciation and good will. Inquiries most frequently received: 
 Can I drive through to the Panama Canal?—to Buenos Aires? (The answer 
 is no—not yet). Two highway outline maps, one of Mexico and Central 
 America, the other of South America. 11 photographs. 
 
 IV. REFERENCES FOR THE TEACHER 
 
 1. BOOKS 
 
 Carlson, Fred A. Geography of Latin America. New York, Prentice-Hall, 
 Inc. 1941. 642 p., illus. 
 
 Brief information on inter-American waterways and railways as well as on 
 the transportation facilities of the individual countries of South America is 
 included in this book. Particularly helpful are the 200 maps and photographs 
 some of which show trade routes and others illustrate transportation methods 
 and scenes along the inter-American highway. 
 
 Franck, Harry A. and Herbert C. Lanks. The Pan American Highway. 
 From the Rio Grande to the Canal Zone. New York. D. Appleton-Century 
 Co. 1940. 249 p. illus. 
 
 The countries, the peoples and their customs as seen along the highway from 
 northern Mexico, through Guatemala, Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua, Costa 
 Rica and down to Panama are described by the authors, who also took time for 
 many side trips along the way. One hundred fifty superb photographs illustrate 
 the book, giving the reader vivid impressions of the beauty of the landscape as 
 well as an excellent close-up of the people at work and at play. Particularly 
 recommended for the illustrations, which would be valuable to pupil and teacher. 
 
 Hager, Alice Rogers. Wings over the Americas. New York. The Mac¬ 
 millan Co. 1940. 162 p., illus. 
 
 From her experience in flying over many thousands of miles of new airways 
 in the Americas as an aviation reporter, the author writes an exciting and 
 interesting account of flying in Latin America. In addition to giving a great 
 deal of fascinating material on commercial flying, the author introduces us to 
 many personalities connected with aviation in the Americas. Included also 
 are brief comments on the countries and the peoples. Thirty-one good photo¬ 
 graphs, most of them of places and planes, illustrate the book. Two end paper 
 maps are included. 
 
 Niles, Blair. Peruvian Pageant. Indianapolis. Bobbs-Merrill & Co. 309 p., 
 illus. 
 
 Combining history with her own travel account, the author presents a color¬ 
 ful and readable story of a “journey in time” in which she uses ancient and 
 modern means of transportation to take her to village and city throughout Peru. 
 Excellent photographs illustrate the book, and an index and map add to the 
 reader’s convenience. 
 
 Raushenbush, Joan. Look at Latin America. Headline Book Series. New 
 York. Foreign Policy Assn. 1940. 64 p., illus. 
 
 The route of the Pan American highway, the principal railroads, airways and 
 shipping lines are shown on excellent maps and supplemented by brief comment 
 
169 
 
 in the text. Material and maps and charts on peoples, land and climate, prod¬ 
 ucts, schools, health, industries and many other aspects of the twenty republics 
 are also included in this handy reference book on Latin America. 
 
 Simpson, Lesley Byrd. Manv Mexicos. New York. G. P. Putnam’s Sons. 
 1941. 336 p. 
 
 In Chapter XIV (p. 160-165) the author briefly discusses transportation in 
 Mexico at the time of the Spanish conquest and brings it down to the present 
 day as one of the most vital and difficult questions which fa ces modern Mexico. 
 
 2. PERIODICALS AND PAMPHLETS 
 
 Daniels, Josephus. The Diplomatic Corps Tours Central Mexico in the Presi¬ 
 dential Train (Amer. For. Serv. Jour., February 1936, p. 70-73, 110, illus.). 
 
 Informal account, including description of a visit to Chichen Itzd, in the form 
 of a travelogue. Of special interest for the glimpse of official representatives 
 of the United States government on tour. Ambassador Daniels relates how 
 the party was received and discusses the ruins as an interested layman. 
 
 D’E^a, Raul. History and Travel in the Americas (Bull. Pan Amer . Jjnion, 
 February 1938, p. 68-96, illus.). 
 
 Material for lesson planning in upper elementary grades. See Junior High 
 School list. 
 
 Fisher, Clyde. Eclipse in Peru (Nat. Hist., November 1937, p. 631-640, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Astronomy and picture interest of ancient sites 
 as seen today; elementary grades will need teacher’s guidance. 
 
 Lanks, Herbert C. The Inter-American Highway (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 December 1938, p. 700-713, illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Picture interest for elementary grades. In¬ 
 cluded are the snow-crowned Sleeping Woman (Ixtaccihuatl), a street in Sat* 
 Salvador, etc. 
 
 MacManus, Seumas. Parish Priest of the Pacific (Catholic World, April 1939, 
 
 p. 60-68). 
 
 Delightful travel story of voyage through Panama Canal and along the coast 
 of Central America, told by a well-known Irish author. Padre Tomds of San 
 Jos6 de Guatemala, the center of interest in this narrative, is a personality 
 familiar to many travelers. People and social customs are described and the 
 teacher will find material to retell to her class, such as the case of the man who 
 tried to sell a large number of parrots at the time of a psittacosis (parrot-fever) 
 scare. 
 
 Marden, Luis. On the Cort6s Trail (Natl. Geog., September 1940, p. 335-373, 
 illus.). 
 
 See Junior High School list. Material for teacher to retell to elementary; 
 pictures. 
 
 Mears, Louise W. A Test on the Panama Canal (Instructor, Apil 1936, p. 36). 
 
 A completion test on the history of the canal and the geography of the 
 isthmus, for intermediate grade pupils. There are eighteen statements to be 
 completed, with an accompanying key. 
 
 The Pan American Highway (Child Life, Activities Sec., November 1940, illus.). 
 
 Discussion of the Pan American Highway as far as completed and of sections 
 surveyed and partially completed, based on a report of the Travel Division of 
 the Pan American Union. There is an outline map of the western hemisphere, 
 with/a scale of miles, showing the highway as planned and as partly completed. 
 
 Valentini, E. E. The Pan American Highway (Bull. Pan Amer. Union, 
 July 1941, p. 386-396, illus.). 
 
 Comprehensive material with content interest for elementary grades. See 
 Junior High School listing. The elementary teacher will value photographs 
 of scenes along the highway, especially a herd of llamas in Peru, cattle on the 
 Argentine pampas and an Ecuadorian village scene. 
 
 Wood, Mabel V. The Parand Way to the Iguazu Falls (Jour. Geog., May 1931, 
 p. 205-218, illus.). 
 
 Description of a trip from Buenos Aires to the Iguazu Falls by way of the 
 Parand River, the observations of a teacher who knew the questions children 
 would ask. Changing ways of transportation will not “date” the material 
 stressed: glimpses through doorways, description of the hilltop houses of /erba 
 
170 
 
 mate planters, islands in the Parand, wild orchids, annual flood, the brilliant 
 stars of the Southern Cross, fog, wind, sunsets, the Iguazu Falls second only to 
 Africa’s Victoria Falls in height. 
 
 KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 Amer. For. Serv. Jour.. 
 Bull. Pan Amer. Union 
 
 Jour. Geog_ 
 
 Jr. Arts and Activ_ 
 
 Jr. Red Cross Jour_ 
 
 Jr. Red Cross News_ 
 
 Jr. Schol_ 
 
 Natl. Geog_ 
 
 Nat. Hist_ 
 
 American Foreigij Service Journal. 
 Bulletin of the Pan American Union. 
 Journal of Geography. 
 
 Junior Arts and Activities. 
 
 Junior Red Cross Journal. 
 
 American Junior Red Cross News. 
 Junior Scholastic. 
 
 National Geographic Magazine. 
 
 Natural History. 
 

 
 
 171 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ✓ 
 
 
 
172 
 
 TEACHER’S ADDITIONS 
 
 U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: f»4S